Instruction Manual For Screw Compressor Unit Controller Mypro Touch Type-S

INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR SCREW COMPRESSOR UNIT CONTROLLER

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S
WARNING
注意
Read this manual carefully before you can use and service "MYPRO TOUCH" safely and properly.
Important Notice
• This manual has been prepared as a guide to allow you to use the Screw Compressor Unit Controller MYPRO TOUCH
Type-S properly and safely. Follow all the instructions in this manual. Failure to do so could result in unforeseen
accidents.
• Keep this manual handy for ready and regular reference by all persons working on your MYPRO TOUCH Type-S.
• If the manual is lost or damaged, contact any of the Mayekawa offices or sales/service centers in your area to order a
new copy.
• This manual must remain with the product when you resell it to another user.
• Mayekawa reserves the right to make changes to the specifications of the product the contents of this manual for
improvements without prior notice.
• If you have any query due to inconsistency between the product and the information in this manual that can result from
such changes, please ask questions to any of the Mayekawa offices or sales/service centers in your area.
• Be sure to start operation, inspection, and servicing of the equipment only after having thoroughly read and
understood all the hazard preventive instructions and precautions in this manual and connected equipment’s manual.
Almost all the past accidents occurred due to failure to follow the basic safety rules.
All safety instructions and precautions in this manual are highlighted by appropriate one of the following symbol-letter
combinations:
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided, could result in death or serious
WARNING injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided, will or could result in minor or
moderate injury. This also indicates an instruction that should be followed to obtain full
CAUTION performance from the product.
• The safety instructions and precautions in this manual are not exhaustive. There may be other safety precautions to
be observed that vary from user to user. It is your responsibility to establish a safety management system most
appropriate for your particular use of the product.
• Never, disassemble or otherwise interfere with the Screw Compressor Unit Controller MYPRO TOUCH Type-S, as it
contains many electronic components that can be affected adversely by disassembly or other interference. Mayekawa
Mfg. Co., Ltd. assumes no responsibility for any undesirable consequences that would result from disassembly of or
interference with the controller.
• Use this controller solely for control and management of the screw compressor units produced by Mayekawa Mfg.
Co., Ltd.
QT1101-13
Preface
Thank you for your purchase of Mayekawa Screw Unit Controller MYPRO TOUCH Type-S.
Before installing and putting your MYPRO TOUCH Type-S into service, check the following points:
a. Is your MYPRO TOUCH Type-S exactly of the factory-option variation you specified?
There are a factory set goods enumerated as follows in MYPRO TOUCH.

MYPRO TOUCH-S: 6 digital inputs; 10 digital outputs (for AC load); 16 analog inputs
MYPRO TOUCH-S-DC: 6 digital inputs; 10 digital outputs (for DC load); 16 analog inputs;
Additionally, there is an option for enhancing.

(extension) 4 analog outputs;
(extension) 4 digital outputs (for AC load);
(extension) 2 digital inputs, 2 digital outputs (for AC load);
(extension) 4 digital outputs (for DC load);
(extension) 2 digital inputs, 2 digital outputs (for DC load);
b. Are all necessary items supplied?

Check the items in the package against the packaging list.
The standard version MYPRO TOUCH Type-S should be provided with a set of the following items:
CPU chassis kits (CPU board; 2 analog input boards; digital input/output board; CPU-AD harness;
AD- AD harness; CPU-digital input/output harness; power harness)
Touch panel (12.1”)
16 Analog input connectors
16 Digital input/output connectors
Instruction manual (one copy of this manual)
c. Are the settings in the following screen correct?

Be sure to confirm the following settings in the corresponding screens before putting MYPRO TOUCH into service.
System Configuration - Are the settings for the each item appropriate for the compressor unit of control target?
Alarm/Failure LIMITS - Are the settings for each alarm appropriate?
WARNING
注意
Please set to observe application limits and recommended matter of the compressor and the device
used a set each value.
d. "Protection film" of the scratch prevention in manufacturing is put on the protection seat of the touch panel.
(The surface is rough "Protection film", and scratch attaches lightly by the fingernail.)
Please peel off before it uses it and use it.
Mayekawa Mfg. Co., Ltd.
MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

-2-
QT1101-13
Table of Contents
Important Notice · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 1
Preface · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 2
Chapter 0 : Information on This Manual · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
0.1 This Manual and Other Related Manuals · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
0.2 Organization of This Manual · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
0.3 Glossary of Special Terms · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 5
0.4 Units· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6
0.5 Words Displayed on Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6
0.6 Acronyms and Abbreviations · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 6
Chapter 1 : General Description · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 7
1.1 Functions and Features · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 7
1.2 System Organization of MYPRO TOUCH · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 8
1.3 Usable Control Functions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 9
Chapter 2 Components and Their Functions · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 10
2.1 Touch Panel · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 10
2.2 Central Processing Unit Assembly · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 14
2.3 CPU board MT-CPU-02 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 15
2.3.1 Reset Switch on CPU Board · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 17
2.3.2 Replacement of Internal Timing Clock on CPU Board · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 18
2.4 Analog Input Boards MT-AD-02 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 19
2.4.1 Current / Voltage Selection and Terminal Block Connections on Analog Input Boards · · · · · · · 21
2.4.2 Input Type Selection for Channels 15 and 16 of Analog Input Boards · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 22
2.5.1 Digital Input/Output Board MT-DIOA-01 (only AC load) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 23
2.5.2 Digital Input/Output Board MT-DIOA-DC01 (only DC load) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 24
2.6 Extension Analog Output Board MT-DA-02(Option) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 25
2.7.1 Extension Digital Input/Output (DI/O) Board (Option:only AC load) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 26
2.7.2 Extension Digital Input/Output (DI/O) Board (Option:only DC load) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 27
Chapter 3 : Screen Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 28
3.1 Display Screens · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 28
3.1.1 Acronyms and Abbreviations Used for Indicated Items · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 28
3.1.2 Main Graphic Screen (Graphic View) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 32
3.1.3 Main Status Screen (Top screen) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 34
3.1.4 Function Icon · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 40
3.1.5 Screen transition diagram (Screen Transition) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 41
3.2 Operation Method · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 48
3.2.1 Password · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 48
3.2.2 Method of movement screen and changing set value · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 50
3.2.3 Changing Set points Method · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 50
3.3 System Configuration (Initial Setting Method) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 51
3.3.1 ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 51
3.3.2 ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 53
3.3.3 ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 59
3.3.4 ‘CONFIG. & SETTING IMPORT/EXPORT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 60
3.4 Adjustment of the System (Setting way for Trial and Readjustment) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 62
3.4.1 ‘SET TIME’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 63
3.4.2 ‘PASSWORD’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 63
3.4.3 ‘CALIBRATION’ Icon · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 65
3.4.3.1 ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 66
3.4.3.2 ‘AUXILIARY INPUT TIMER’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 69
3.4.3.3 ‘OPTION ANALOG INPUT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 70
3.4.3.4 ‘SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 71
3.4.3.5 ‘ANALOG INPUT ADJUSTMENT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 78
3.4.3.6 ‘DI/O STATUS’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 79
3.5 Alarm/Failure of the system (Alarm/Failure setting method for security of devices) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 80
3.5.1 ‘ALARM LOG’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 81
3.5.2 ‘FAILURE LOG’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 81
3.5.3 ‘EVENT LOG’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 82
3.5.4 ‘LIMITS 1/4 to 3/4’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 83
3.5.5 ‘LIMITS 4/4’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 83

-3-
QT1101-13
3.5.6 ‘RANGE OVER’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 85
3.6 System Operations (Setting Method for Normal Operation) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 86
3.6.1 ‘CONTROL SUMMARY (1/2)’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 86
3.6.1.1 ‘SET POINTS’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 88
3.6.1.2 ‘SCHEDULER’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 90
3.6.1.3 ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 92
3.6.1.4 ‘VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ Screen· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 96
3.6.1.5 ‘AUTO Vi’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 100
3.6.1.6 ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 102
3.6.1.7 ‘HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 104
3.6.1.8 ‘ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER SV’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 105
3.6.1.9 ‘LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 106
3.6.2 ‘CONTROL SUMMARY (2/2)’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 107
3.6.2.1 ‘CONDENSER CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 108
3.6.2.2 ‘CHILLER LBT CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 111
3.6.2.3 ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SSH) CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 112
3.6.2.4 ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SP) CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 113
3.6.2.5 ‘EXPANSION VALVE (LBT) CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 113
3.6.2.6 ‘LEVEL CONTROL’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 114
3.6.2.7 ‘AUTO STAGE’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 115
3.6.2.8 ‘COMMUNICATION SETUP’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 120
3.6.2.9 ‘VFD SETUP’ · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 121
3.7 Check of System (Graph ICON, Monitor ICON) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 122
3.7.1 ‘GRAPH’ Icon · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 123
3.7.1.1 ‘TREND GRAPH’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 123
3.7.1.2 ‘HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 123
3.7.1.3 ‘TREND DATA EXPORT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 125
3.7.2 ‘MONITOR’ Icon · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 126
3.7.2.1 ‘PROGRAM VERSION’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 126
3.7.2.2 ‘DEVICE MONITOR’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 127
3.7.2.3 ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 127
3.7.2.4 ‘SYSTEM OVER VIEW’ Screen· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 128
3.7.2.5 ‘COUNTER’ Screen· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 128
3.7.2.6 ‘ASSIGNMENT’ Screen · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 129
Chapter 4 : Operation · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 130
4.1 Compressor unit operation control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 130
4.1.1 Start/Stop Control in Different Operation Control Modes · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 130
4.2 Control system – Digital Input/Output · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 132
4.3 Types of Alarm/Failure and Judgment condition · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 136
Chapter 5 : Communication· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 140
5.1 Outline of “Communication” on MYPRO TOUCH · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 140
5.2 Communication with External Device · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 141
5.2.1 Communication System Configuration with External Equipments · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 141
5.2.2 Remote Communication Device and Communication Protocols· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 141
5.3 AUTO STAGE Control · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 142
5.3.1 System configuration of AUTO STAGE communication · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 142
5.3.2 Out line of number control (AUTO STAGE) · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 143
Chapter 6 : Troubleshooting · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 146
Chapter 7 : Specifications · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 150
7.1 MYPRO TOUCH Specification · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 150
Central Processing Unit board Assembly specification · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 151
Touch Panel Specification · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 153
7.2 MYPRO TOUCH Replaceable Parts List · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 155
7.3 MYPRO TOUCH Input/Output list · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 156
7.4 Input/Output Connecting Diagram · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 159
Appendix · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 161
Appendix1. Introducing of MYPRO TOUCH Support software · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 161
Appendix1.1 “MYPRO TOUCH Data Logger” · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 161
Appendix1.2 “MYPRO TOUCH Updater” · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 161
Appendix2. MODBUS Protocol · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 162
Program Revision Record · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 163
Instruction Manual Revision Record · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 167

-4-
QT1101-13
Chapter 0 : Information on This Manual
0.1 This Manual and Other Related Manuals

This manual is about MYPRO TOUCH Type-S as follows:
- SCREW COMPRESSOR UNIT CONTROLLER (Model MYPRO TOUCH Type-S) MANUAL

It contains information necessary for the engineering staff in charge of operation, maintenance, and system of MYPRO
TOUCH Type-S. The information includes description on the MYPRO TOUCH Type-S’s functions and specifications,
instructions for wiring/connections, setting and operation, method for troubleshooting, and other data necessary for
maintenance service.
Mayekawa reserves the right to make changes to Photos, Drawings, Screens and pictures in this manual for improvements
without prior notice.
0.2 Organization of This Manual

This manual consists of the following three groups of chapters.
Chapters 1 to 3: Setting of MYPRO TOUCH

Chapter 1 contains the general description and Features
Chapter 2 contains description of parts (such as Touch panel, Board) which constitute MYPRO TOUCH.
Chapter 3 contains the following items of information: the flow from introduction, operation instruction, setting, operation to
compressor function checking of MYPRO TOUCH and description of each display screen of them.
Chapters 4 to 5: Control of MYPRO TOUCH

Chapter 4 contains description of the ways for operation and control method of MYPRO TOUCH.
Chapter 5 contains description of communications of MYPRO TOUCH.
Chapters 6 to 7: Maintenance of MYPRO TOUCH

Chapter 6 contains description of troubleshooting of MYPRO TOUCH.
Chapter 7 contains description of specification of MYPRO TOUCH.
0.3 Glossary of Special Terms

The special terms used in this manual are defined below.
ALARM/FAILURE
ALARM is a minor alarm that does not involve any compressor unit shutdown.
FAILURE is a serious alarm that involves compressor unit shutdown.
AUTO STAGE Control

The automatic staging control works on multiple compressor units with their controllers inter-connected through
communication ports. Of these controllers, one is assigned to the “master station”. The master station issues commands to
start or stop the compressor under control of each of the other controllers (called the “slave stations”) to properly adjust the
number of operating compressors according to the required gas compressing capacity for the refrigerating system.
Compressor unit
Compressor unit refers to a system consisting of a compressor, condenser, expansion values, chiller, and driving motors.
Each compressor unit operates under control of one MYPRO TOUCH (Controller).

-5-
QT1101-13
Manipulating Value
The amount of control expressed in a sum of the proportional, integral, and derivative controls (PID control) concerning with
the capacity, speed, and other controls.
(ALARM) Mask time

Mask time refers to the time set by the user during which no determination to or not to issue an alarm takes place.
Master station
“Master station” is defined differently according to the control configuration using MYPRO TOUCH.
- In the case of the automatic staging control (AUTO STAGE), the master station is the MYPRO TOUCH that gives
operational commands to the other MYPRO TOUCH according to information of its own as well as that it receives from the
slave MYPRO TOUCH.
- In the case of the control using a remote control device such as a computer through communications, the master station
refers to the remote control device controlling the MYPRO TOUCH in the network.
Offset
If analog input values are different from actual values, a positive or negative offset value is added for proper processing and
indication. You can specify offset values as part of settings.
Passwords
You must enter a password of the specified level before you can make settings in some special screen. Two different levels
of password (LEVEL-1 and LEVEL-2) must be registered beforehand to be able to access these screens, each requiring a
specific level of password for authorization. See Section 3.4.2 ‘PASSWORD’ Screen for further details.
Scaling
Scaling means a setting to specify the range (upper and lower limits) for input values from each sensor.
Screen
A screen that is accessed from each menu. It is used for making parameter settings and for checking the current status of
settings or operation of the compressor unit.
0.4 Units
Unless otherwise specified, all pressures are indicated in MPa (gauge readings) and temperatures in °C (degrees Celsius).
0.5 Words Displayed on Screen

In this manual, the words displayed on the screen (menus, screen, parameter items, selective options, etc.) are indicated in all
capital letters enclosed by single quotation marks like ‘SETUP’ (although quotation marks are basically omitted in tables).
0.6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

For interpretation of the acronyms and abbreviations used in display, see Section 3.1 Display Screens.

-6-
QT1101-13
Chapter 1 : General Description
1.1 Functions and Features

MYPRO TOUCH is a controller developed for controlling operation of the Mayekawa-produced screw compressor units.
The controller has the following standard features:
Sequence control and process control inputs/outputs

- 16 digital inputs/outputs No-voltage contact signals or under-voltage solid-state relay (SSR) signals
- 16 analog inputs 4 to 20 mA DC inputs, 1 to 5 V DC inputs, or 1-kΩ potentiometer inputs
User-controller interface
- TFT color LCD, 800X600 dots (SVGA) display
- Touch panel system (analog resistive film system), 1024x1024 resolution
This user-friendly interface allows intuitive operation by adopting touch panel.
Communication ports
The following communication ports are offered as standard equipment.
- An Ethernet (IEEE802.3u, 100base-TX) communication port (Connector: RJ-11)
- A USB 2.0 port (Connector: Type-A))
- A half-duplex 4-wire serial communication port conforming to RS-485
The serial communications function allows remote monitoring the operating conditions of compressor units, making their
start/stop control, and changing various parameter settings. The MODBUS protocol employed is world standard protocol
for serial communications in industry and allows for the use of commercially available supervisory control and data
acquisition (SCADA) software as well as connection to and communication with PLC MODBUS communications units of
various manufacturers.
Optional extension boards for additional inputs/outputs channels and communication ports
The following optional items are available for expanded connections to MYPRO TOUCH.
- Extension digital/analog converter (DA) board for additional 4 analog outputs (up to 1 piece)
- Extension 4 digital output boards or 2 extension digital output boards and 2 digital input boards (up to 1 piece)
- Extension analog input board for additional 8 analog inputs (up to 4 pieces)
Either of two status screens is selectable: “Main Graphic” and “Main Status”.

-7-
QT1101-13
1.2 System Organization of MYPRO TOUCH

Schematic for System organization of MYPRO TOUCH
[MYPRO External Communication PC
TOUCH] PC for Remote Supervision Device ([MYPRO TOUCH]
or ・Profibus-DP MYPRO-CPⅣ, etc Support Soft)
[MYPRO Ethernet/IP ・DeviceNet (Modbus Unit)
TOUCH] ・Profinet
etc. USB Communication
Ethernet RS-485
RS-485 Ethernet RS-232C (2 or4 wire) - Program Changing
for MYPRO TOUCH RS-422/485 Modbus - Configuration
(AUTO STAGE) - Data logging
[MYPRO TOUCH] Control Panel
Ethernet
③
Touch Panel Terminal Block
12.1" (PFXGP4601TAD) ⑤
or ②
5.7" (PFXGP4301TAD)
④
COM2 COM1 or
RS-485 RS-232C
①
[MYPRO TOUCH] Control Panel

CPU Chassis
COM2 COM1 USB AD Board AD Board AD Board AD Board
RS-485 RS-485
MT-AD-02 MT-AD-02 MT-AD-02 MT-AD-02
CPU Board
MT-CPU-02
Ext.
DA Board
MT-DA-02
DI/O(10/6) Board Ext.DI/O

MT-DIOA-01 (4/0) Board Ext.DI/O
MT-DIO4-01 (4/0) Board Ext.DI/O
MT-DIO4-01 (4/0) Board Ext.DI/O
MT-DIO4-01 (2/2) Board
MT-DIO2-01
Name Q.ty Note

1 CPU-HMI Communication Cable(1.8[m]) 1 RS-485 D-sub 9pin The provision of Japan is also possible.
2 RS-232C Custom Closs Cable (3.0[m]) 1 It is necessary for connecting Anybus-touch panel. (self-made cable)
Protocol Converter The model is different according to the protocol.
3 1
Anybus Communicator D-sub connector : #4-40 (inch screw)
4 RS-232C Straight Cable(3.0[m]) 1 It is necessary for connecting the level converter touch panel.
When the transmission distance exceeds 100m, an external power supply is
5 RS-232C - RS-485 Level ConVerter 1
necessary.
* It does not show electric wiring and wiring for control (analog input/output, digital input/output).
* The solid line means standard connection and the dashed line means optional connection.
* Extension analog input board is required for 16 analog inputs or more.
Extension digital input/output board is required for 20 digital inputs/outputs or more.
However, extension boards should be set up in MYPRO TOUCH control panel separately. It cannot be set in the central
processing unit chassis. (Depending on condition, size up of the control panel is required.)

-8-
QT1101-13
1.3 Usable Control Functions

You can use MYPRO TOUCH Type-S for following Screw –type compressors.
J-Series - SINGLE without Economizer

SINGLE with Economizer
FM160 - FM160 without Economizer
FM160 with Economizer
V-Series - SINGLE - without Economizer
with Economizer
UD-V with Condenser Control
UD-V with Chiller Control
400 Series
- Compound
You can mainly use following control functions of MYPRO TOUCH Type-S.
Internal
Control Function Control Target
controller No.
Compressor capacity control by Discharge/Suction pressure (PID 01/16)

Compressor (low stage) capacity control
Compressor capacity control by leaving brine temperature (PID 02/16)
Evaporator expansion valve control by suction superheat (PID 03/16)
Evaporator expansion valve 1 control Evaporator expansion valve control by suction pressure (PID 04/16)
Evaporator expansion valve control by leaving brine temperature (PID 05/16)
Economizer/intercooler expansion valve control Inter cooler expansion valve control by intermediated superheat (PID 06/16)
Liquid injection expansion valve control

Liquid injection oil cooling control (PID 07/16)
by discharge temperature/ superheat
Chiller flow control Process flow control by leaving cool brine temperature (PID 08/16)
Condenser fan revolutions/ stage control Condenser fan speed control by discharge pressure (PID 09/16)
Compound two-stage Compressor

Compressor high stage capacity control by intermediate pressure (PID 10/16)
high stage capacity control
Compressor VFD control by suction pressure (PID 11/16)

Compressor Variable Frequency Drive(VFD) control
Compressor VFD control by leaving cool brine temperature (PID 12/16)
Evaporator expansion valve control by suction superheat 2 (PID 13/16)
Evaporator expansion valve 2 control
Evaporator expansion valve control by suction pressure (PID 14/16)
Chiller liquid level control Level control by chiller liquid (PID 15/16)
Unused Unused (PID 16/16)
Other
Capacity control by remote capacity command inputs (analog/digital input)
Compressor number control (AUTO STAGE)
Vi automatic variable control (Auto-Vi)
Hot gas bypass control
Starting bypass control
Compressor oil seal control
You can select using function from ‘System Configuration’ when these control functions are used.
However, sometimes multiple control functions cannot be used at one time, when their inputs/outputs are overlapped.
The function is not available when it has not been connected (extensioned) as hardware.
For detail, see Section 7.3 MYPRO TOUCH Input/Output list.

-9-
QT1101-13
Chapter 2 Components and Their Functions
2.1 Touch Panel
Bottom View
Front View Back View
Components of Touch Plane

Part Item Function
It shows status of Touch Panel.

Color Condition Description
Off-line
Green Lighting
Operating
A Status LED Orange Blinking Starting up soft-ware
Red Lighting Power-up
Firefly “Backlight control” of GP has been set as standby mode,
Lighting
lighting and its screen goes black.
- No light Power-off
B Power connector To supply DC24V(See next page” Important Notice for Power Supply”)
This LED is lighting, when SD card is insert.

MEMO : Do not insert or remove the SD card during lighting of the LED lamp. It may causes
corruption of the SD card data.
C SD card access LED
Color Condition Description
Lighting SD card has been inserted.
Green
No light SD card has not been inserted or has not been accessed.
USB(mini-B) One supporting USB 2.0(mini-B) Communication distance: 5 meters or less

E
interface For touch panel maintenance
SD card
If you have question how to insert / remove SD card or order of its batteries, please contact
interface cover/ battery
F our Sales.
insertion cover for
As for Exchanging batteries, please see next page.
replacement
It is only for communication with central processing unit board in MYPRO TOUCH. You
G COM2 : Serial interface
cannot use it for other use.
RS-232C serial interface

H COM1 : Serial interface D-Sub9 Pin Plug Type Connector
It can be used for Interface with external communication Devices.
Support USB 2.0(Type A)×1

USB(Type A) USB storage (memory) for data accumulation is available.
I
interface Power supply pressure : DC5V±5%, Output current : 500mA(Max),
Maximum communication Distance : 5 meters

- 10 -
QT1101-13
Important Notice for Power Supplying
- Class 2 power supply is available for DC24V inputs.
- Make sure to twist together ends of power supply cables before connecting them with power supply plug or ring terminal
for enhancing its electromagnetic noise immunity.
- Do not bring or bundle power supply cable to main circuit (high voltage, high current) lines or input/output signal lines.
- Connect lighting surge absorber for light surge measures.
- Make power supply cable as short as possible to reduce electromagnetic noise.
WARNING
注意
Short circuit, fire, unplanned device operation
- Do not connect with live-line at the time of power supply connection.
- Do not put excessive force to power supply cable, to avoid accidental disconnection
- Make sure to fix power supply cable to touch panel main body or in board firmly.
- Terminals in power supply terminal block should be tightened by proper torque.(power supply
terminal block : 1.4 N•m)
- Install it to cabinet before connecting with power supply cables or communication lines.
Make sure to follow above instructions. Death, serious injury or property damage may result if you do
not.
Power Supply Connection

- Separate input/output (such as central processing unit board) line and touch panel line as shown the figure when you
connect power supply.
- Connect with the ground and main body separately when you connect lighting surge absorber.
(Select the surge absorber whose maximum circuit voltage is higher than peak voltage of using power.)
- Connect with constant voltage transformer when voltage variation is big.
- Between line and the ground, use power supply with low noise.
- Connect with isolation transformer (noise cut transformer), if it is noisy.
- Capacity of constant voltage transformer and isolation transformer should be bigger than rated value.
Earth
- Earth touch panel separately from other devices (such as Central Processing Unit board) as dedicated earth.
- If you cannot prepare dedicated earth space, common earth is possible.
(If the common earthing point is corresponding to D-class grounding, it is available.)
Important Notice
- Make sure, if the earth resistance is 100Ω or less.
2
- Use Frame ground (for earthing) electric wire 2 mm (AWG 14) or more.
- Earthing point should be close to touch panel main body to shorten earth wire distance. If the earth wire is longer, use
thicker insulated wire.
- Frame ground and signal ground are connected inside of the touch panel main body. Design its system not to form short
circuit loop, when signal ground terminals are used for connecting touch panel with external devices.
- Obey your local rules or standard. Make sure that its earth resistance is 100Ω and the line for the earthing is at least
2
2 mm or AWG 14.
WARNING
注意
Short circuit, fire, unplanned device operation

- Do not use common ground. It may cause accidents or machine trouble.
- Use dedicated ground when you earth the devices.
Make sure to follow above instructions. Death, serious injury or property damage may result if you do
not.

- 11 -
QT1101-13
Replacement Primary battery
Using battery for the touch panel is primary battery. The battery is replaceable.
Replacement Procedure
“TP BATTERY” will be shown on the screen when the voltage
of touch panel backup battery has dropped. 1. Disconnect the power supply from the touch panel main
(See 3.1.3 main status screen (TOP SCREEN) ) body.
2. Touch the housing or grand connection (not the power

WARNING supply) to discharge any electrostatic charge from your body,
注意
3. Open the SD card interface cover by pressing its tab. Next,
The risk of electric shock, explosion and discharge open the replacement battery insertion cover by pressing its
- Follow the setup steps to replace battery tab.
properly and safely.
- Turn off the power of touch panel before
replacing the battery.
Make sure to follow above instructions. Death or
serious injury may result if you do not.
The risk of explosion, fire or chemical

- Use only replaceable battery of our offer.
- Do not short circuit.
- Recycle used battery or dispose it properly.
Make sure to follow above instructions. Death or
serious injury may result if you do not.
(1) SD card interface cover / tab
(2) Replacement battery insertion cover / tab
CAUTION 4. Insert the replacement battery and connector all the way.
注意 Either side of the battery can face top or bottom.
Loss of data
Primary battery cannot be recharged and are used

for data backup of memory and internal clock.
Backup data will be lost when primary battery
voltage has dropped. Beep of alarm sounds before 1
month when voltage of the primary battery has
dropped completely. The beep indicates timing to
replace the battery.
- Replace the battery within one month after the
beep. It may cause a loss of backup data, if you
(1) Connector
do not.
- Replace the battery within ten minutes after (2) Replacement battery
turning off the power supply of touch panel
main body.
5. First close the replacement battery cover, and then close
- Take above timing (within one month after beep
sounds) of replacing the battery as a guide. We the SD card interface cover.
have no service for restoration or recovery of MEMO: Make sure the cables are inserted completely
data and clock in backup SRAM (Static Random
Access Memory) after beep sounds. We do not inside the enclosure. Otherwise, you can damage
take any responsibility for the losses. the cables when you close the cover.
- You are recommended to replace primary
battery as periodic replacement in the 5th year
after purchase. 6. Reconnect the power supply to the touch panel main body.
Make sure to follow above instructions. Property
damage may result if you do not. Completed Replacement

- 12 -
QT1101-13
Brightness adjustment of Touch Panel
In the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH, Brightness can be adjusted by 16 stages.
<< Adjustment procedure >>

1. It touches in order in "upper right corner -> upper left corner" or "upper left corner -> upper right corner" (40 dots or less
in length and breadth) of the panel within 0.5 seconds.
The brightness adjustment bar is displayed.
Brightness adjustment Bar
Touch the display
Bright
2. Strength of brightness is adjusted by touching "+" or "-" of the brightness adjustment bar.
3. The brightness adjustment bar is shut by touching "X" of the brightness adjustment bar, and the adjustment is ended.
Note)
- It doesn't put it in this mode while the touch panel is starting. Please enter this mode after the operating screen is
displayed.
- Running (Be communicating with connected equipment), this operation is possible.

- 13 -
QT1101-13
2.2 Central Processing Unit Assembly
Top View
(Analog input connection terminal part）
Inside upper section (without cover):

CPU Board
Side view Front View(with cover）
Bottom View
(Digital input/output 力
connection terminal part）
Inside lower section: AD board,DI/O board,
Extension DA board, ExtensionDI/O board
Installation example of control panel inside

- 14 -
QT1101-13
2.3 CPU board MT-CPU-02

15 17
12 18
1
3
13
8
16
2
11
4
14
5
6
19
20
9
10 7
Parts on CPU Board MT-CPU-02

No. Parts Function
1 DC24V power connector It is used to supply DC24V from switching power supply to CPU board.
(J19) (Use the plug “PC4/3-ST-7.62” for connection.)
2 CPU operation checking
lamp(LED8) Red lamp blinks at regular intervals while the CPU is running normally.
3 Reset switch
(SW4) It is used to reset MYPRO TOUCH system.
CAUTION
注意
Operate the reset switch carefully.
4 DIP switch
The top switch is numbered “1” and the bottom one is numbered “6”. Slide each switch to the
(SW5)
top to set it to ON. The factory default setting of these 6 switches (from 1 to 6) are ‘ON, ON,
ON, ON, OFF, OFF’.
5 DIP switch
The top switch is numbered “1” and the bottom one is numbered “4”. Slide each switch to the
(SW7)
top to set it to ON. The factory default setting of these 4 switches (from 1 to 4) are ‘OFF, OFF,
OFF, OFF’.
6 AD board connector It is used to connect an AD board to the CPU board.
(J18) (Use harness”MT-HCPAD-0100-U” between CPU board and AD board for connection.)
7 DI/O board connector It is used to connect a DI/O board to the CPU board.
(J4) (Use harness “MT-HCDIO-0100-U” between CPU board and DI/O board for connection.)
8 Extension DA board
It is used to connect an extension DA board to the CPU board.
connector
(Use harness”MT-HCPDA-0100-U” between CPU board and extension DA board for
(J20)
connection.)
9 Extension DI/O Diver
board connector It is used to connect extension DI/O driver boards. The connectors are provided on the CPU
(J5 to J12) board and can accommodate 4 extension DI/O driver boards (16 inputs/outputs).
The #1(J5, J9) connector is for digital inputs/outputs 1 to 4, #2(J6, J10) for digital
inputs/outputs 5 to 8, #3(J7, J11) for digital inputs/outputs 9 to 12, and #4 (J8, J12) for digital
inputs/outputs 13 to 16.

- 15 -
QT1101-13
Parts on CPU Board MT-CPU-02(continued)

No. Parts Function
10 Extension DI/O board
connector It used to connect an extension DI/O board to the CPU board.
(J13 to J16) (Use harness “MT-HEDIO-0100-U” between CPU board and extension DI/O board for
connection.)
The J13 connector is for digital inputs/outputs 1 to 4, J14 for digital inputs/outputs 5 to 8,
J15 for digital inputs/outputs 9 to 12, and J16 for digital inputs/outputs 13 to 16.
11 COM1 operation lamp

(LED6) Lights green during sending; lights red during receiving.
12 COM1 terminal block It provides terminals for 4-wire RS-485 communication ports.
(TB1) It is used for data communication of the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH HMI.
13 COM1 terminating
resistor switches These switches turn ON/OFF each terminating resistors installed in the CPU board.
(SW2) They provide termination for the sending and receiving lines independently.
14 COM2 operation lamp

(LED7) Lights green during sending; lights red during receiving.
15 COM2 terminal It provides terminals for 4-wire RS-485 communication ports.

block(TB2) It is mainly used for data communication of MYPRO TOUCH optional selection ”Auto Stage”
16 COM2 terminating
resistor switches These switches turn ON/OFF each terminating resistors installed in the CPU board.
(SW3) They provide termination for the sending and receiving lines independently.
17 Battery holder
(BAT1) This holder is used for internal timing clock. (lithium primary battery CR2032)
18 USB(Type-B) connector It is used to connect MYPRO TOUCH support software.

(J3) Do not use it for other purpose.
19 JTA connector It is only used for production adjustment.
(J1) It is not used usually. Do not connect it with anything.
20 Heat sink
CAUTION
注意
The heatsink is hot. Do not touch it by hand.
WARNING
注意
Make sure not to operate any switches on CPU board during compressor unit running.

- 16 -
QT1101-13
2.3.1 Reset Switch on CPU Board

MYPRO TOUCH CPU side system reset (CPU reset) is required by a user when “There is no read request” or” There is no
response to write request” are shown on the MYPRO TOUCH display screen.
Use reset switch for CPU resetting.

The reset switch is in the location encircled in the above figure.
Press and release the switch to reset MYPRO TOUCH. MYPRO TOUCH will be rebooted (but the system is not set up by simply
pressing this switch).
The system can also be reset by turning OFF and then ON the MYPRO TOUCH CPU power supply.
WARNING
注意
Resetting MYPRO TOUCH brings the controller in a momentary unstable condition, following which MYPRO
TOUCH is placed in a condition that would result just after turning power ON. As this condition is detrimental to
the compressor unit if it occurs during operation, never perform system resetting while the compressor and
accessory is in operation.
* Setting Point initialization Method with hardware

All SW7 should be turn on and then turn on the power supply or perform CPU reset to initialize all set points with
only hardware.
After that, turn off all SW7, and then do CPU reset again for the normal reboot.

- 17 -
QT1101-13
2.3.2 Replacement of Internal Timing Clock on CPU Board

MYPRO TOUCH uses a primary battery as a power source to keep driving the internal clock in the event of a power failure. The
battery can supply power enough to back up the memory of setting data for about three years. The battery starts running down
immediately after it is produced even if it is not used.
If power failure occurs when the battery is completely discharged, the internal clock will be reset to the initial value.
NOTE: The battery life may be shorter than three years in high-temperature or other unfavorable environments.
To prevent this kind of problem, MYPRO TOUCH has a low battery detection function. If a low battery condition is detected, this
function causes the “BATTERY ALARM” message blinking at the center of the top line in the status display screens.
(MYPRO TOUCH doesn't output Digital Output of warning.)
CAUTION
注意
If the “BATTERY ALARM” message is displayed, replace
the battery immediately.
If the CPU is reset in the following condition as turning on
the power supply with the internal battery discharged,
MYPRO TOUCH will automatically be restarted under
“Control program stopping condition” for the sake of safety.
Once this has occurred, the compressor cannot be
operated any further unless the primary battery is replaced
with new battery of the normal voltage.
CPU board
Battery voltage dropped warning display
Replace the battery under system power off condition. However, you should replace it within only 1 minute. If it takes more than
電池電圧低下警報表示
1 minute, internal clock may be back to initial value. Make sure to check the timing data after the replacement.
Use the following method to replace the internal battery.

(1) Insert your finger into the part indicated by the arrow and pull the battery. Now the battery is free for removal.
Be sure to hold the battery; otherwise, it will drop from the board when the clip is released.
CAUTION
注意
Do this operation carefully not to let the battery
touch any of the nearby components.
(The right side figure shows the condition which you can remove the battery.)
.
(2) While holding a new battery by its top and bottom, engage the battery with the clip (indicated by the circle on the left side
figure) at the right part in the holder.
(The right side figure shows the battery engaged with

the clips. You should still keep holding the battery. It
could drop out of the board if you take your finger off
from it.)
(3) Press down the battery gently into its horizontal position in the holder. Then the battery is set the proper position (the clips
engage the battery) by metal fitting. Check the condition, if the holder tabs engage the battery steadily.

- 18 -
QT1101-13
2.4 Analog Input Boards MT-AD-02

1
Second First
6
目
2
3 4
5
Parts on AD Board MT-AD-02

No. Parts Function
1 DC24V power supply
connector It is used to supply DC24V from switching power supply to AD board.
(J3) (Use plugs “PC4/3-ST-7.62” for connection.)
2 AD board connector
It is used to connect an AD board to the CPU board.
(J1)
(Use contact harness”MT-HCPDA-0100-U” between CPU board and an AD board.)
As above photos, its pin configuration is same as No.4 (J2).(They are replaceable.)
3 AD board channel setting
rotary switch It is used to set channels on AD board.
(SW11) 1 AD board can take in 8 analog inputs.
It specifies as below.
Setting "1" for analog input Ch.01 to 08,
Setting "2" for analog input Ch. 09 to 16,
Setting "4" for analog input Ch.17 to 24(extension),
Setting "8" for analog input Ch.25 to 32(extension)
Set the channel as same as above photos, No.5 (SW12).
4 AD board connector
(J2) It is used to connect extension AD boards.
(MYPRO TOUCH Type-S uses 2 AD boards as standard condition.)
(Use harness”MT-HADAD-0100-U” between AD boards for connection.)
As above photos, its pin configuration is same as No.2 (J1). (They are replaceable.)
5 AD board channel setting

rotary switch It is used to set channels on AD board.
(SW12) 1 AD board can take in 8 analog inputs.
It specifies as below.
Setting "1" for analog input Ch.01 to 08,
Setting "2" for analog input Ch. 09 to 16,
Setting "4" for analog input Ch.17 to 24(extension),
Setting "8" for analog input Ch.25 to 32(extension)
Set the channel as same as above photos, No.3 (SW11).
6 Potentiometer input
selector switch It allows to use analog inputs CH7, CH8 (CH15, CH16 for the second board) by selecting
current/voltage inputs or potentiometer inputs.
Flip the each switches to the right to activate A side (current/voltage), to the left to activate B
side(potentiometer input)
The factory default is as follow,
They had been set A side (current/voltage) for the each switches on the first AD board,
They had been set B side (potentiometer input) for the each switches on the second AD
board.

- 19 -
QT1101-13
No. Parts Function

7 Current/voltage selector
switches (SW1 to 8) for Each of the switches selects either voltage or current for analog inputs.
analog inputs Set each switch to ON for current input or OFF for voltage input. (All of these switches are
defaulted to OFF.)
8 Analog input terminal

blocks It is used to connect analog input wires.
(Use plugs “MSTB2.5/3-ST-5.08” for connection.)
Each terminal block can supply sensors with power (although the power level is limited).
Either current/voltage input or potentiometer input is selectable for CH15 and CH16.
CH15A and CH16A are assigned to current/voltage inputs. CH15B is assigned to low-stage
potentiometer inputs, and CH16B is assigned to high-stage potentiometer inputs.
To use CH15 and CH16, connect desired input lines to the corresponding terminal blocks
and then set the current/voltage selector switches for on the CPU board CH 15 and CH 16 as
appropriate (See Section 2.2).
NOTE:
Use also the above analog input boards when adding analog input channels (AD CH17 to CH32).
However, there is not enough space to set the boards in CPU chassis. Make enough configuration space for them.
Terminal Block
First Board Second Board
This part is not used in the first board. Refer to next page.

- 20 -
QT1101-13
2.4.1 Current / Voltage Selection and Terminal Block Connections on
Analog Input Boards

Set analog input current /voltage selecting switches SW1 to 8 (for CH1 to CH8) on the associated analog input boards. Set the
switches to ON when the analog input sources provide current signals or Set these switches to OFF for voltage signal inputs
depending on the input analog signal sources.
The analog input circuits (internal circuit of MYPRO TOUCH) are schematically shown below.
AD board
Internal circuit of MYPRO
24V
TOUCH Current/voltage
selector switch
スイッチ
1 24V
Input To AD converter circuit

2 +
Filter
Circuit 250Ω
3 -
AG
Board mounting hole

FG 基板取り付け穴
When the current/voltage selector switch is set to ON, a 250Ω resistor is connected to the input circuit as shown in the above
diagram. DC current signals of 4 to 20 mA are then converted into 1 to 5 V DC voltage signals before being input to the
analog-to-digital (A/D) converter circuit. When the selector switch is set to OFF, the current signals are input directly to the A/D
converter circuit.
Make connections on each terminal block as follows:

- Current signal sources using MYPRO TOUCH’s power supply:
Connect “+” side of the signal source to the 24V terminal of the terminal block. Connect “-” side to an appropriate one of the “+”
terminal 1 to 16 on the terminal block.
- Current signal sources using an outside power supply:
Connect the “+” side of the signal source to an appropriate one of the “+” terminals 1 to 16 on the terminal block and the “-” side
to an appropriate one of the “-” terminals 1 to 16 on the terminal block.
- Voltage signal sources:
Connect the “+” side of the signal source to an appropriate one of the “+” terminals 1 to 16 on the terminal block and the “-” side
to an appropriate one of the “-” terminals 1 to 16 on the terminal block.
CAUTION
注意
Move the switch until it clicks.
NOTE:
The switch is set to OFF before shipment from the factory. (Voltage type signal source)

- 21 -
QT1101-13
2.4.2 Input Type Selection for Channels 15 and 16 of Analog Input Boards
The analog input channels CH7 and CH8 (on the second AD board, they are CH15 and CH16) can select and use
current/voltage inputs or potentiometer inputs on MYPRO TOUCH.
When the lever of the analog input selector switch marked “SW9” on the AD board is moved to “A” side, CH7 (CH15 for the
second) is set for current/voltage inputs (analog input terminal block CH7A (CH15A) is enabled). When the lever is moved to the
“B” side, CH7 (CH15) is set for potentiometer inputs (analog input terminal block CH7B (CH15B) is enabled).
For CH8 (CH16 for the second), you can take same way of switching with the selector switch marked “SW10” on the AD board
(see NOTE under the table below).
The diagram below shows the A/D converter circuit (internal circuit of MYPRO TOUCH AD board) to schematically depict the
above explanation.
AD board
Current/voltage A case of
inputs 15CH
CH15A
from analog input A
board AD
converter
Potentiometer Integrated
inputs Potentiometer B
CH15B converter circuit circuit
from analog input
board
Analog input
selector switch
SW9
Selection of signal Source Type for Channel 15 (in the case for low-stage slide valve position)
SW7 SW9
Input Source Connection switch position switch position
on AD board on AD board
Potentiometer Potentiometer inputs 1 to 3 are connected to Any position B
terminals LF1 to LF3 of terminal block CH15B on (ON and OFF)
analog input board.
Current signal source Connect “+” side to terminal 24V on CH15A ON A

with power supplied terminal block of analog input board, and “-” side
from MYPRO TOUCH to terminal15A+.
Current signal source Connect “+” side of input to terminal 15A+ on ON A

with power supplied CH15A terminal block of analog input board, and
from outside “-” side to terminal 15A-.
Voltage signal source Connect “+” side of input to terminal 15A+ on OFF A
CH15A terminal block of analog input board, and
“-” side to terminal 15A-.
NOTE:
The above table also applies to selection of analog input type for channel 16 if channel number “15” is read as “16”, switch
number “SW7” of the AD board as “SW8”, and switch number “SW9” as “SW10”.
CAUTION
注意
Move the switch lever until it clicks.

- 22 -
QT1101-13
2.5.1 Digital Input/Output Board MT-DIOA-01 (only AC load)
* This DI/O board is only for AC (alternating current) load. It is not possible to use it for DC (direct current) load.
1
3
MT-DIOA-01
4
8
9
5
2
Parts on DIO Board MT-DIOA-01

No. Name Function
1 DI/O(6/10)board connector
It is used to connect a DI/O board to the CPU board.
(Use harness” MT-HCDIO-O1OO-U” for between the CPU board and a DI/O board for
connection.)
2 DI/O terminal Block
It is used for connection of digital input/output wires.
Terminal 1A and1B correspond to DI/O CH1 and Terminal 16A and 16B correspond to
DI/O CH16.
3 DI/O operation lamp
It is operation checking lamp for whether digital input/output is “ON or OFF”.(Lighting
means “ON”, no light means “OFF”)
LED1 corresponds to DI/O CH1 and LED16 corresponds to DI/O CH16.
4 DO (digital Output) circuit On the MT-DIOA-01 board, DI/O CH1 to CH10 are assigned for digital outputs.
5 DI (digital input) circuit On the MT-DIOA-01 board, DI/O CH11 to CH16 are assigned for digital inputs.
6 Solid state relay Solid state relay(SSR) : G3MC-202P-VD, DC12V
(Output adaptive load is AC 100 to 240V, 2A)
7 TNR
(ceramic variable resister) It is provided to protect contacts of the relays.
8 CP
(circuit protector) It is used for overcurrent protection parts of relay.
It shuts down the outputs when the current, which is over 2A, flows to the relay contact.
At the time, white knob of circuit protector will comes up slightly.
At first, eliminate the overcurrent and press into the white knob to reset.
9 FG(frame ground )terminal It allows to keep the continuity between ground (terminal) and the printed circuit board.
WARNING
注意
Make sure to check the continuity of the FG terminal to ground

(terminal); If it is not enough, the digital input/output board does not
work normally.

- 23 -
QT1101-13
2.5.2 Digital Input/Output Board MT-DIOA-DC01 (only DC load)
* This DI/O board is only for DC (direct current) load. It is not possible to use it for AC (alternating current) load.
1
3
MT-DIOA-DC01
4
8
9
5
2
Parts on DIO Board MT-DIOA-DC01

No. Name Function
1 DI/O(6/10)board connector
It is used to connect a DI/O board to the CPU board.
(Use harness” MT-HCDIO-O1OO-U” for between the CPU board and a DI/O board for
connection.)
2 DI/O terminal Block
It is used for connection of digital input/output wires.
Terminal 1A and1B correspond to DI/O CH1 and Terminal 16A and 16B correspond to
DI/O CH16.
3 DI/O operation lamp
It is operation checking lamp for whether digital input/output is “ON or OFF”.(Lighting
means “ON”, no light means “OFF”)
LED1 corresponds to DI/O CH1 and LED16 corresponds to DI/O CH16.
4 DO (digital Output) circuit On the MT-DIOA-01 board, DI/O CH1 to CH10 are assigned for digital outputs.
5 DI (digital input) circuit On the MT-DIOA-01 board, DI/O CH11 to CH16 are assigned for digital inputs.
6 Solid state relay Solid state relay(SSR) : G3DZ-DZ02P, DC12V
(Output adaptive load is DC 5 to 24V, 2A)
7 TNR
(ceramic variable resister) It is provided to protect contacts of the relays.
8 CP
(circuit protector) It is used for overcurrent protection parts of relay.
At first, eliminate the overcurrent and press into the white knob to reset.
9 FG(frame ground )terminal It allows to keep the continuity between ground (terminal) and the printed circuit board.
WARNING
注意
Make sure to check the continuity of the FG terminal to ground

(terminal); If it is not enough, the digital input/output board does not
work normally.

- 24 -
QT1101-13
2.6 Extension Analog Output Board MT-DA-02(Option)

1
Parts on DA board MT-DA-02 (Option)

No. Parts Function
1 DC24V power supply
connector It is used to supply DC24V from switching power supply to extension DA board.
(J2) (Use plugs “PC4/3-ST-7.62” for connection.)
2 DA board connector
It is used to connect an extension DA board to the CPU board.
(J1)
(Use harness”MT-HCPDA-0100-U” between CPU board and an extension DA board for
connection.)
3 Analog output terminal
It is used to connect analog output (DC 4 to 20mA) wires.
blocks
(Use plugs “IC2.5/3-ST-5.08” for connection.)
(TB1)
CAUTION
注意
You cannot select each setting using analog outputs, without installation of extension analog output
board.
Install extension output board before the setting using analog outputs.

- 25 -
QT1101-13
2.7.1 Extension Digital Input/Output (DI/O) Board (Option:only AC load)

* This DI/O board is only for AC (alternating current) load. It is not possible to use it for DC (direct current) load.
DI/O (0/4) board MT-DIO4-01 + DI/O (0/4) driver board REF-MCS200-SO3
DI/O (2/2) board MT-DIO2-01 + DI/O (2/2) driver board REF-MCS200-SC23
For 4 outputs：MT-DIO4-01 For 2 inputs/2 outputs：MT-DIO2-01
1
4
3
6
5
8
9
DI/O (0/4) driver board DI/O (2/2) driver board

：REF-MCS200-SO3 ：REF-MCS200-SC23
Parts on extension DI/O board

No. Parts Function
1 DI/O board connector It is used to connect an extension DI/O board to the CPU board.
(Use harness “MT-HEDIO-0100-U” between the CPU board and an extension DI/O board
for connection.)
2 DI/O terminal block It is used for connection of digital input/output wires.
Terminal 1A and1B correspond to DI/O CH1 and Terminal 4A and 4B correspond to DI/O
CH4.
3 DIO operation lamp It indicates whether digital input/output is “ON or OFF”.(Lighting means “ON”, no light
means “OFF”)
LED1 corresponds to DI/O CH1 and LED 4 corresponds to DI/O CH 4
4, 5 DO (digital output) circuit,
On the MT-DIO4-01 board, DI/O CH1 to CH4 are assigned for digital outputs.
DI (digital input) circuit
On the MT-DIO2-01 board, DI/O CH1 to CH2 are assigned for digital outputs and
DI/O CH3 to CH4 are assigned for digital inputs
6 Solid state reply Solid state reply(SSR) : G3MC-202P-VD, DC12V
(Output applicable load is AC 100 to 240V, 2A)
7 TNR
(ceramic variable resister)) It is provided to protect contacts of the relays.
8 CP
(Circuit protector) It is used for overcurrent protection parts of relay.
At first, eliminate the over current and press into the white knob to rest.
9 FG(frame ground)
terminal It allows to keep continuity between ground (terminal) and the printed circuit board.
CAUTION
注意
Make sure to check the continuity of the FG terminal to ground (terminal); If it
is not enough, the digital input/output board does not work normally.

- 26 -
QT1101-13
2.7.2 Extension Digital Input/Output (DI/O) Board (Option:only DC load)

* This DI/O board is only for DC (direct current) load. It is not possible to use it for AC (alternating current) load.
DI/O (0/4) board MT-DIO4-DC01 + DI/O (0/4) driver board REF-MCS200-SO3 (The driver board is the same for the AC load.)
DI/O (2/2) board MT-DIO2-DC01 + DI/O (2/2) driver board REF-MCS200-SC23 (The driver board is the same for the AC load.)
For 4 outputs：MT-DIO4-DC01 For 2 inputs/2 outputs：MT-DIO2-DC01
1
4
3
6
5
8
9
DI/O (0/4) driver board DI/O (2/2) driver board

：REF-MCS200-SO3 ：REF-MCS200-SC23
Parts on extension DI/O board

No. Parts Function
1 DI/O board connector It is used to connect an extension DI/O board to the CPU board.
(Use harness “MT-HEDIO-0100-U” between the CPU board and an extension DI/O board
for connection.)
2 DI/O terminal block It is used for connection of digital input/output wires.
Terminal 1A and1B correspond to DI/O CH1 and Terminal 4A and 4B correspond to DI/O
CH4.
3 DIO operation lamp It indicates whether digital input/output is “ON or OFF”.(Lighting means “ON”, no light
means “OFF”)
LED1 corresponds to DI/O CH1 and LED 4 corresponds to DI/O CH 4
4, 5 DO (digital output) circuit,
On the MT-DIO4-01 board, DI/O CH1 to CH4 are assigned for digital outputs.
DI (digital input) circuit
On the MT-DIO2-01 board, DI/O CH1 to CH2 are assigned for digital outputs and
DI/O CH3 to CH4 are assigned for digital inputs
6 Solid state reply Solid state reply(SSR) : G3DZ-DZ02P, DC12V
(Output applicable load is DC 5 to 24V, 2A)
7 TNR
(ceramic variable resister)) It is provided to protect contacts of the relays.
8 CP
(Circuit protector) It is used for overcurrent protection parts of relay.
At first, eliminate the over current and press into the white knob to rest.
9 FG(frame ground)
terminal It allows to keep continuity between ground (terminal) and the printed circuit board.
CAUTION
注意
Make sure to check the continuity of the FG terminal to ground (terminal); If it
is not enough, the digital input/output board does not work normally.

- 27 -
QT1101-13
Chapter 3 : Screen Operation
3.1 Display Screens

MYPRO TOUCH has two types of status display screen: the “Main Graphic Screen (Graphic View)” and “Main Status Screen
(Top Screen)”. You can switch these screens depending on which operation you would like to monitor.
3.1.1 Acronyms and Abbreviations Used for Indicated Items

In these two screens, the indicated items are represented using the acronyms and abbreviations shown in the following tables.
The tables also show the channel numbers for analog and digital inputs and outputs. For digital input/output channel numbers,
their sign in the drawings are also shown. (As for the connection diagram, see the end of this manual.)
Real analog inputs

Acronym Full Spelling Input Channel No.
SP SUCTION PRESSURE AI 1
DP DISCHARGE PRESSURE AI 2
OP OIL SUPPLY PRESSURE AI 3
AFP AFTER FILTER PRESSURE AI 4
BFP BEFORE FILTER PRESSURE AI 4
ST SUCTION TEMPERATURE AI 5
DT DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE AI 6
OT OIL SUPPLY TEMPERATURE AI 7
OS OIL SEPARETER TEMPERATURE AI 8
AFFP AFTER FINE FILTER PRESSURE AI 8
IP INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE AI 9
IT INTERMEDIATE TEMPERTURE AI10
SDP SYSTEM DISCHARGE PRESSURE AI11 or AI22
LVL LIQUID LEVEL AI11
MA MOTOR ELECTRIC CURRENT AI12
EBT CHILLER ENTERING BRINE TEMPERATURE AI13
LBT CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE AI14
LSV (LOW STAGE) SLIDE VALVE POSITION AI15
HSV HIGH STAGE SLIDE VALVE POSITION AI16
SSP SYSTEM SUCTION PRESURE AI16 or AI19
SVOP SLIDE VALVE OIL SUPPLY PRESSURE AI16
PSV Vi PORT SLIDE VALVE POSITION AI16
CGP1 CHILLER GAS OUTLET PRESSURE-1 AI17
CGT1 CHILLER GAS OUTLET TEMPERATURE-1 AI18
RLD REMOTE CAPACITY CONTROL TARGET AI20
CGP2 CHILLER GAS OUTLET PRESSURE-2 AI23
CGT2 CHILLER GAS OUTLET TEMPERATURE-2 AI24
Vacant channels
OPT1 OPTION ANALOG INPUT 1/4
of AI8, AI9, AI10, AI11, AI13, AI14,AI17 to AI32
Vacant channels
Vacant channels
Vacant channels

- 28 -
QT1101-13
Digital input/output
Acronym Full Spelling DI/O No. Drawing Sign
COMP COMPRESSOR DO 1 Y0
OILP OILPUMP DO 2 or 21 Y 1 or Y 14
O/P2 OILPUMP2 DO 2 or 21 Y 1 or Y 14
LOAD (LOW STAGE) LOADING SOLENOID VALVE DO 3 Y2
FMLD FM160 CAPACITY CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1 DO 3 Y2
UNLD (LOW STAGE) UNLOADING SOLENOID VALVE DO 4 Y3
FMUL FM160 CAPACITY CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2 DO 4 Y3
INJS LIQUID SUPPLY SOLENOID VALVE for LIQUID INJECTION DO 5 or 18 Y 4 or Y12
OILH OIL HEATER DO 5or7or18 Y4orY6orY12
INJY YOSAKU EXPANSION VALVE for LIQUID INJECTION DO 6 or 19 Y 5 or Y13
OILR OIL RETURN SOLENOID VALVE DO 6 or 7 Y 5 or Y 6
I/CS LIQUID SUPPLY SOLENOID VALVE for ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER DO 7 or 8 Y 6 or Y 7
L->H Vi SLIDE L->H SOLENOID VALVE FOR Vi -PORT DO 8 Y7
OILF OIL FEED SOLENOID VALVE DO 9 Y8
H->L Vi SLIDE H->L SOLENOID VALVE FOR Vi-PORT DO 9 Y8
FAIL FAILURE DO 10 Y9
EMGC EMERGENCY STOP DI 11 XA
MSRB MAIN STARTER READ BACK DI 12 XB
ITL1 INTERLOCK-1 DI 13 XC
ITL2 INTERLOCK-2 DI 14 XD
LOCK CAPACITY 100% LOCK DI 14 XD
ITL3 INTERLOCK-3 DI 15 XE
OLVH OIL LEVEL SWITCH DI 15 XE
RMST REMOTE START INPUT DI 16 XF
EVPS LIQUID SUPPLY SOLENOID VALVE for CHILLER DO 17 Y10
MPLD Vi INCREASE SOLENPID VLAVE FOR PORT-M DO 17 or 26 Y10 or Y19
EVPY YOSAKU EXPANSION VALVE for CHILLER DO 18 Y11
MPUL Vi DECREASE SOLENOID VALVE for PORT-M DO 18 or 27 Y11 or Y1A
CHLP CHILLER PUMP DO 19 Y12
SVBP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE for Vi SLIDE VALVE DO 19 Y12
SBYP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE for STARTING DO 20 Y13
HBYP BYPASS SOLENOID VALVE for HOT GAS DO 20 Y13
OILD OIL DRAIN SOLENOID VALVE DO 21 Y14
I/CY YOSAKU EXPANSION VALVE for ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER DO 21 Y14
ALRM ALARM DO 22 Y15
HILD HIGH STAGE LOADING SOLENOID VALVE DO 23 Y16
EVS2 LIQUID SUPPLY SOLENOID VALVE2 for CHILLER DO 23 Y16
LHLD Vi INCREASE SOLENOID VALVE for PORT-L/H DO 23 or 29 Y16 or Y1C
HIUL HIGH STAGE UNLOADING SOLENOID VALVE DO 24 Y17
EVY2 YOSAKU EXPANSION VALVE2 for CHILLER DO 24 Y17
LHUL Vi DECREASE SOLENOID VALVE for PORT-L/H DO 24 or 30 Y17 or Y1D
CND1 OUTPUT1 for CONDENSER(VFD) DO 25 Y18
AUX AUXILIARY DO 18 or 25 Y11 or Y18
CND2 OUTPUT2 for CONDENSER DO 26 Y19
CND3 OUTPUT3 for CONDENSER DO 27 Y1A
CND4 OUTPUT4 for CONDENSER DO 28 Y1B
IJY2 YOSAKU EXPANSION VALVE2 for LIQUID INJECTION DO 28 Y1B
CND5 OUTPUT5 for CONDENSER DO 29 Y1C
EVS3 LIQUID SUPPLY SOLENOID VALVE3 for CHILLER DO 29 Y1C
RDY READY TO START DO 29 Y1C
CND6 OUTPUT6 for CONDENSER DO 30 Y1D
EVY3 YOSAKU EXPANSION VALVE3 for CHILLER DO 30 Y1D

- 29 -
QT1101-13
Acronym Full Spelling DI/O No. Drawing Sign
RMLD REMOTE LOAD INPUT DI 31 X1E
RMUL REMOTE UNLOAD INPUT DI 32 X1F
Virtual analog inputs (derived from real analog inputs through calculation)
Acronym Full Spelling Assigned Input Channel No.
dOP OIL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AI65
dFP FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AI66
dP DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AI67
SSH SUCTION SUPERHEAT AI68
ISH INTERMEDIATE SUPERHEAT AI69
DSH DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT AI70
D/S DISCHARGE/SUCTION PRESSURE RATIO AI71
Vi CALCULATED Vi AI72
CRVi CURRENT Vi AI73
CAP COMPRESSOR CAPACITY AI74
SVP SLIDE VALVE PERCENTAGE AI75
ATP AUTO STAGE TARGET PRESSURE AI76
dOP2 OIL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE2 AI77
SSH2 SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 AI78
dFFP FINE FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE AI79
N.C. NOT CONNECTED
PID controller
Acronym Full Spelling Function Controller
NO
(LOW STAGE) SLIDE VALVE Low stage compressor capacity on suction
LSV P PID 01/16
on PRESSURE pressure control
(LOW STAGE) SLIDE VALVE Low stage compressor capacity on chiller
LSV T PID 02/16
on CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE leaving brine temperature control
CHILLER EXPANSION VALVE Chiller expansion valve opening degree on
SCTSH PID 03/16
on SUCTION SUPERHEAT suction superheat control
LIMIT on SUCTION PRESSURE Expansion valve opening degree limiter on
SPLMT PID 04/16
for CHILLER EXPANSIN VALVE suction pressure control
LIMIT on CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE Expansion valve opening degree limiter on
LBLMT PID 05/16
for CHILLER EXPANSIN VALVE chiller leaving brine temperature control
ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER EXPANSION VALVE Eco./Int. expansion valve opening degree
INTSH PID 06/16
on INTERMEDIATE SUPERHEAT on intermediate superheat control
Liquid injection expansion valve opening
INJCT LIQUID INJECTION degree on discharge temperature/superheat PID 07/16
control
FLOW CONTROL VALVE Flow control valve outputs on chiller leaving
LVGBT PID 08/16
on CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE brine temperature
CNDNS VFD CONDENSER FAN Condenser fan speed VFD control PID 09/16
HIGH STAGE SLIDE VALVE Compressor high stage capacity on
HI SV PID 10/16
on INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE intermediate pressure control
VFD COMPRESSOR Compressor capacity VFD control on
VFD P PID 11/16
on PRESSURE suction pressure control
VFD COMPRESSOR Compressor capacity VFD control on
VFD T PID 12/16
on CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE chiller leaving brine temperature control
CHILLER EXPANSION VALVE2 Evaporator expansion valve 2 opening
SCSSH2 PID 13/16
on SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 degree on suction superheat 2 control
Evaporator expansion valve 2 opening
LIMIT on CHILLER GAS OUTLET PRESSURE2
CGP2LM degree limiter on chiller gas outlet pressure PID 14/16
for CHILLER EXPANSIN VALVE2
2 control
LEVEL LEVEL Chiller liquid level control PID 15/16

- 30 -
QT1101-13
Others
Acronym Full Spelling
A/O ANALOG OUTPUT
AI ANALOG INPUT
C7 CHARACTER BIT 7
C8 CHARACTER BIT 8
CH. CHANNEL
COMM COMMUNICATION
COMP. COMPRESSOR
CTRL CONTROL
D/O DIGITAL OUTPUT
ECONO. ECONOMIZER/INTER COOLER
EXP.VALVE EXPANSION VALVE
H.SLIDE VALVE HIGH STAGE SLIDE VALVE
HI HIGH
HRS HOURS
HSV HIGH STAGE SLIDE VALVE POSITION
I/O INPUT/OUTPUT
INTER INTERMEDIATE
L.SLIDE VALVE LOW STAGE SLIDE VALVE
LB CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE
LO LOW
MV MANIPURATING VALUE
MVH MANIPULATING VALUE HIGH LIMIT
MVL MANIPULATING VALUE LOW LIMIT
OIL P. OIL PUMP
P. PAGE
PE EVEN PARITY
PN NON PARITY
PO ODD PARITY
PRES. PRESSURE
PRESS. PRESSURE
PV PROCESS VALUE
S1 STOP BIT 1
S2 STOP BIT 2
SETPT SET POINT
SH SUPERHEAT
SP SUCTION PRESSURE
SV SLIDE VALVE POSITION or SOLENOID VALVE
SV SET VALUE
TEMP TEMPERATURE
VFD VARIABLE FREQUNCY DRIVE
W/ WITH
W/O WITHOUT

- 31 -
QT1101-13
3.1.2 Main Graphic Screen (Graphic View)

The “Main Graphic Screen” shows the current compressor’s status using graphics. Gauge indication, colors and icons help you
to check operating conditions of the compressor and alarms intuitively. To select the Main Status Screen (TOP Screen), press
the arrow marks ( < , > ) in the right-and –left edge of the screen.
5 5
7
8
6
9
10
Display of Main Graphic Screen (Graphic View)

No. Name Function
1 Title block display area It displays the name of controller.
2 ID/level display area It displays User ID and password level of current operating.
3 DATE/time display area It displays current date and time.
It displays current suction, oiling, discharge and (intermediate) pressure are displayed in
4 Gauge display area
gauges.
To switch the Main Status Screen, press the arrow marks ( < , > ) in the right-and –left
5 Screen switching button
edge of the screen.
Graphic display for It displays the graphic of compressor peripheral part graphics and displays each pressure
6
Compressor part and temperature in digit. As for compressor capacity, it displays also digit and potentiometer.
It displays “BATTERY ALARM” warning when the RTC backup battery is discharged.
*
Low battery alarm CAUTION
display area 注意
If “BATTERY ALARM” is displayed at this area, replace the memory
backup battery immediately.
It is used to start the compressor only when the LOCAL mode (operation control mode) is
7 [ START ] button
selected. It does not work in the REMOTE, COMM, or AUTO STAGE mode
This button can be used to stop the compressor regardless of the operation mode selected
8 [ STOP ] button
(see CAUTION below).
You can use this button to clear an alarm if the compressor has stopped by issuance of an
9 [ CLEAR ALARM ] button
alarm (FAILURE).
Log on MYPRO TOUCH system when you change its sets points. For the logon, the user ID
10 [ LOG ON ] button and the password are required. The user ID and the password should be registered on
MYPRO TOUCH in advance. Only MYPRO TOUCH administrator can do the registration.

- 32 -
QT1101-13
CAUTION
注意
According to the selection for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, MYPRO TOUCH
automatically goes the following conditions when the STOP switch is pressed on the touch panel of
MYPRO TOUCH.
- When the ‘LOCAL’, ‘REMOTE’, or ‘COMM’ mode (expect the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode) has been
selected, pressing the STOP switch causes no change to the operation control mode in the case of
the ‘LOCAL’ mode. The mode automatically changes to ‘LOCAL’ in the case of the ‘REMOTE’ and
‘COMM’ modes. The compressor, if it is operating, will then stop after the liquid collecting process. (It
remains stopped thereafter.)
To restart the compressor, simply press the STOP switch if you need not to change the mode from
‘LOCAL’ to another, or turn ON the relevant operation control command after changing the mode from
‘LOCAL’ to the desired mode.
- When the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode has been selected, pressing the STOP switch does not cause any
change to the setting for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen. On the other
hand, the selection of ‘ENABLE’ you made for the ‘CONTROL’ item in the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen
automatically changes to ‘DISABLE’.
In this case, if the compressor under control is running when the STOP switch is pressed, the
compressor will then stop after completing the liquid collecting process.
Even the STOP switch is pressed on the master station and its ‘CONTROL’ item setting in the ‘AUTO
STAGE’ screen is consequently changed to ‘DISABLE’, the AUTO STAGE control continues to work
on all the other stations (slave stations).
To recover the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode control after pressing the STOP switch, it is necessary (for the
case of the master station and the case of a slave station) to perform the steps below. (Simply
pressing the START key on the station does not recover the automatic staging control.)
1. From the ‘CONTROL SUMMARY’, open the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen.

2. Select ‘ENABLE’ for the ‘CONTROL’ item in the screen.

- 33 -
QT1101-13
3.1.3 Main Status Screen (Top screen)

The “Main Status Screen” shows the status related to operation of the current compressor unit using letters and numeric values.
To switch the Main Graphic Screen (Graphic View), press the arrow marks ( < , > ) in the right-and –left edge of the screen.
2 Indication of alarm status
1 3
4 6
8
7
11
12 9
13 10
14 16
15 Touch panel
Low battery alarm
Display of Main Status Screen

No. Name Function
1 Title block display area It displays the name of controller.
2 ID/level display area It displays User ID and password level of current operating.
3 DATE/time display area It displays current date and time.
Current condition
4 It displays current operation mode, compressor status, and operation start/stop settings.
screen
It displays status of the current capacity control. This screen also gives an indication if
5 Controls screen increase of the compressor’s capacity is prohibited or it is forcedly reduced.
You can manually operate to increase or decrease of the compressor’s capacity.
It displays process values of individual analog inputs, calculated values derived from analog
6 Main PV screen
inputs, total operating time count, and operating time count of the day.
You can check the change of operation condition (change of digital input/output condition).
7 PID, Limiters screen By touching this part, the screen will be change to "EVENT LOG" screen and you can check
more detailed event history.
You can check the change of operation condition (change of digital input/output condition).
8 Event log display area By touching this part, the screen will be switch to "EVENT LOG" screen and you can check
more detailed event history.
It displays the ALARM (miner warning) that issued now and past ALARM (miner warning)
Alarm/Failure log history.
9
display area By touching this part (3 histories from the top), the screen will be change to “ALARM LOG"
screen and you can check more detailed ALARM (miner warning) history.
It displays the FAILURE (serious warning) that issued now and past FAILURE (serious
Alarm/Failure log warning) history.
10
display area By touching this part (3 histories from the bottom), the screen will be change to “FAILURE
LOG" screen and you can check more detailed FAILURE (serious warning) history.

- 34 -
QT1101-13
It displays “Low battery alarm” warning when the backup battery is discharged.
*
Low battery alarm CAUTION
display area 注意
If the low battery alarm “TP BATTERY” is displayed, replace the battery immediately.
It is used only to start the compressor operation when the LOCAL mode (operation control
11 [ START ] switch mode) is selected.
This switch does not work in the REMOTE, COMM, or AUTO STAGE mode.
This switch can be used to stop the compressor regardless of the operation mode selected
12 [ STOP ] switch
(Refer to 30 page note.).
[ CLEAR ALARM ] This switch is used to clear an alarm if the compressor has stopped by issuance of an alarm
13
switch (FAILURE).
You need the user ID and the password to change the set points (As for user ID and the
password, see 3.2.1 password). By touching this switch, the screen will be changed to user
ID/ password entry screen.
14 [ LOG ON ] switch
Log on the MYPRO TOUCH system.
For the logon, you need the user ID and the password. The user ID and the password should
be registered on MYPRO TOUCH in advance. Only MYPRO TOUCH administrator can do
the registration.
By touching this switch, the screen will be changed to MYPRO TOUCH system setting
[SYSTEM CONFIG.]
15 screen.
switch
Execute appropriate setting for each compressor unit that you use.
By touching this icon, MYPRO TOUCH touch panel screen does not operate (locked)
16 [ SCREEN LOCK ICON ] temporarily. During this time, you can clean up the touch panel.
Press “UNLOCK” switch for 3 seconds or more to unlock the function.

- 35 -
QT1101-13
‘CURRENT CONDITION’ Screen

‘OPERATION MODE’ screen displays the conditions of the selection of each item for operating mode and compressor control.
Items of ‘CURRENT CONDITION’ screen

Item Description
SUCTION PRESSURE It displays suction pressure process value (A/I Ch.01).
L. SLIDE VALVE It displays (Low stage) Compressor capacity (A/I Ch.15).
When AUTO Vi has been selected, a present port is displayed, and
SV PERCENTAGE L, M, and H is displayed, and the position of the port is displayed by
0-100%.
Calculated Vi It displays calculated Vi (discharge/ suction pressure ratio).
It indicates current setting point for the start (CUT IN)
CUT IN pressure/temperature. This item also indicates new setting
Pressure or temperature
(Operation start setpoint) resulting of switching/changing, which are made at ‘SCHEDULE’ or
‘COMM’.
It indicates current setting point for the stop (CUT OUT)
CUT OUT pressure/temperature. This item also indicates new setting
Pressure or temperature
(Operation stop setpoint) resulting of switching/changing, which are made at ‘SCHEDULE’ or
‘COMM’.
-ON Compressor starts/stops control according to the START and
LOCAL
-OFF STOP switch operation on the touch panel
-ON Compressor starts/stops control according to the remote start/stop
REMOTE
-OFF inputs at DI-16
OPERATION MODE
-ON Compressor starts/stops control according to commands given by
COMM
-OFF a remote device through communications
-ON Compressor starts/stops control according to the “automatic
STAGE
-OFF staging” (‘AUTO STAGE’) control (option).
STOP Compressor is stopped.
ANTI CYCLE Compressor is in “anti-cycle” state.
AUTO STOP Compressor is automatically stopped.
CUT IN Operation sequence of compressor is started.
COMP. STATE SYSTEM START System is being activated.
(state of compressor) OIL PUMP START Oil pump is started.
START Compressor is being started.
RUN Compressor is running.
CUT OUT Stop control sequence is started.
PUMP OUT Collecting liquid is in progress.

- 36 -
QT1101-13
‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen

This screen displays the current states of the capacity control.
‘Items of ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen

Item Description
It indicates the current set value for capacity control. This item also indicates
CONTROL SET POINT Pressure or
new setting resulting of switching/changing, which are made at ‘SCHEDULE’
(Capacity control set value) temperature
or ‘COMM’.
Slide Valve PID OUT

% It indicates calculated value currently used by the capacity controller.
(Capacity controller output)
VFD Comp. PID OUT Revolution that corresponds to the manipulating value is indicated for a
rpm
(Capacity controller output) variable frequency drive (VFD) compressor.
MANUAL It displays the system of capacity control that is set now.

OPERATION
AUTO
(Capacity control
COMM Switch the screen from Control Summary to Capacity Control, to change the
control system)
… setting.
It indicates the capacity (unloader) slide valve’s “increase” movement (as

LOAD finally determined from combination of the positioner, limiter, and sequence
STATE controls).
(Capacity control state) It indicates the capacity (unloader) slide valve’s “decrease” movement (as
UNLOAD finally determined from combination of the positioner, limiter, and sequence
controls).
It indicates that an increase in compressor’s capacity caused by an increase
LIMIT
MA in electric current of the compressor motor power is prohibited.
(Motor amperage limiter) It indicates that the compressor’s capacity is forcedly decreased upon
UNLOAD
increase in electric current of the compressor motor power.
LIMIT
DP in discharge pressure is prohibited.
(Discharge pressure limiter) It indicates that the compressor’s capacity is forcedly decreased upon
UNLOAD
increases in discharge pressure.
It indicates that an increase in compressor’s capacity caused by decrease in
LIMIT
SP suction pressure is prohibited.
(Suction pressure limiter) It indicates that the compressor’s capacity is forcedly decreased upon
UNLOAD
decreases in suction pressure.
LIMIT
IP in intermediate pressure is prohibited.
(Intermediate pressure limiter) It indicates that the compressor’s capacity is forcedly decreased upon
UNLOAD
increases in intermediate pressure.
NOTE:
- If a limiter is activated, the capacity control is limited even when the control target pressure or temperature is higher than the
capacity control set value (SETPOINT).
- When a limiter is activated, words ‘LIMIT’ and ‘UNLOAD’ are displayed in white. When the limiter is deactivated, they are
displayed in gray.
- To use or not to use of IP (Intermediate pressure limiter) results from the setting of Configuration ICON.

- 37 -
QT1101-13
‘MAIN PV’ Screen

This screen displays various process values and other analog input data. ‘
Items of ‘MAIN STATUS’ Screen

Item Description Item Description
Process value of suction temperature at
SP Process value of suction pressure at AI-01 ST
AI-05
Process value of system suction pressure at Calculated value of suction superheat at
( SSP ) SSH
AI-16 or 19 AI-68
Process value of chiller gas outlet pressure Process value of chiller gas outlet
( CGP1 ) ( CGT1 )
1 at AI-17 temperature 1 at AI-18
Calculated value of suction superheat 2
( SSH2 ) (CGT2 – CGP2 saturation temperature) at
AI-78
Process value of chiller gas outlet pressure Process value of chiller gas outlet
( CGP2 ) ( CGT2 )
2 at AI-25 temperature 2 at AI-26
Process value of discharge pressure at Process value of discharge temperature at
DP DT
AI-02 AI-06
Process value of system discharge pressure Calculated value of discharge superheat at
( SDP ) DSH
at AI-11 AI-70
( LVL ) Process value of liquid level at AI-11
Process value of supply oil pressure at Process value of supply oil temperature at
OP OT
AI-03 AI-07
Process value of separator oil temperature
( OS )
Process value of after-oil-filter pressure at at AI-08 (North American markets)
AFP
AI-04 Process value of after-fine-filter differential
( AFFP )
pressure at AI-08 (EU markets)
Process value of oil supply pressure for Calculated value of oil supply differential
( SVOP ) ( dOP2 )
slide valve at AI-17 pressure 2 at AI-81
Process value of intermediate pressure at Process value of intermediate temperature
( IP ) ( IT )
AI-09 at AI-10
Calculated value of after-fine-filter Calculated value of intermediate superheat
( dFFP ) ( ISH )
differential pressure at AI-79 at AI-69
Calculated value of oil supply differential Process value of chiller entring temperature
dOP ( EBT )
pressure at AI-65 at AI-13
Calculated value of differential pressure at Process value of chiller leaving temperature
dP ( LBT )
AI-67 at AI-14
Calculated value of after-oil-filter differential Process value of Process value
dFP MA
pressure at AI-68 compressor motor electric current at AI-12
Process value of low-stage slide valve Process value of high-stage slide valve
LSV ( HSV )
position at AI-15 position at AI-16
Process value of remote capacity command
( RLD )
input at AI-20
REFRIGERANT Refrigerant type
RUN Running time of last operation cycle STOP Time of duration of final stop
TODAY Today’s operating time
After-resetting (after-overhaul) operating
RUN TIME
time
TOTAL TIME Total (no-resettable) operating time
( OPT1 ) Process value of optional analog input 1/4 ( OPT2 ) Process value of optional analog input 2/4
( OPT3 ) Process value of optional analog input 3/4 ( OPT4 ) Process value of optional analog input 4/4

- 38 -
QT1101-13
NOTE:
- In the above table, “AI-xx” indicates an analog input channel number. After ‘AI-65’, virtual analog values are generated through
calculation inside MYPRO TOUCH and used as inputs.
- The parenthesized items are indicated only when the corresponding options have been selected. (For the method for selecting
options, see 3.3 System Configuration).)
- The following virtual input values are derived from the associated process value as follows:
• Calculated supply oil differential pressure “dOP”
Case 1 (all conditions except those of Case 2):
dOP = OP (actual oil supply pressure) - DP (actual discharge pressure)
Case 2 (when the compressor is of a Single J Group or an FM160 Group, and the "Oil Feed Type" is things except
"FULL LUBE"):
dOP = OP (actual oil supply pressure) - SP (actual suction pressure)
• Calculated differential pressure “dP”
Case 1 (all single-stage compressors except Single J Group compressors with operating oil pumps):
dP = AFP (actual after-oil-filter pressure) - SP (actual suction pressure)
Case 2 (two-stage compressor Compound-1 or Compound-2):
dP = AFP (actual after-oil-filter pressure) - IP (actual intermediate pressure)
Case 3 (Single J Group compressors with operating oil pumps):
dOP = OP (actual oil supply pressure) - SP (actual suction pressure)
Case 4 (Single J Group or FM160 Group compressors with no oil pumps or oil pumps not in operation):
Differential pressure calculation is disabled.
• Calculated after-oil-filter differential pressure “dFP”
Case 1 (all compressors except Single J Group and FM160 Group compressors):
dFP = DP (actual discharge pressure) - AFP (actual after-oil-filter pressure)
Case 2 (Single J Group compressors):
dFP = DP (actual discharge pressure) - OP (actual oil supply pressure)
Case 3 (FM160 Group compressors):
dP = AFP (actual after-oil-filter pressure) - OP (actual oil supply pressure)
• Calculated after-fine-filter differential pressure “dFFP”
dFFP = DP (actual discharge pressure) - AFFP (actual after-fine-filter oil pressure)
• Calculated supply oil differential pressure 2 “dOP2”
dOP2 = SVOP (actual oil supply pressure for slide valve) - DP (actual discharge pressure)
When 'MAIN PV' frame is pushed one second or more longer, 'PV MONITOR' screen is displayed.

- 39 -
QT1101-13
3.1.4 Function Icon
A list of 6 Icons will be display if you touch “MENU” part of the

bottom of “Main Graphic Screen” screen (Graphic View) or
” Main status Screen” (Top Screen).
If you touch each function icon, the screen that shown below
screen or the list menu of selection (titles of the screen) will be
displayed.
However, you need displayable (enable to display) user ID and
password to use the function icons.
Config. ICON (Lv.2) Control ICON (Lv.0) Graph ICON (Lv.0)

System Configuration Screen Control Summary Screen Graph Screen
Setting ICON Group (Lv.0) Alarm ICON Group (Lv.0) Monitor ICON Group (Lv.0)
Set Time ICON (Lv.1) Alarm Log ICON (Lv.0) Program Ver. ICON (Lv.0)
Password ICON (Lv.2) Failure Log ICON (Lv.0) System Details ICON (Lv.0)
Calibration ICON (Lv.1) Event Log ICON (Lv.0) Device Monitor ICON (Lv.2)
Limits ICON (Lv.1) Counter ICON (Lv.0)
Assignment ICON (Lv.0)
System Overview ICON (Lv.1)

- 40 -
QT1101-13
3.1.5 Screen transition diagram (Screen Transition)

Select Configuration
ICON
( Password Lv.2 )
NO
System Configuration Top Screen Graphic View

Window
YES Staring Sequence
Stopping Sequence
TOP SCR
System Configuration
System Details Parameter Clear Config.&Setting

No initialization Initialization for each set Import/Export
point. After the initialization,
each set point will be kept
at System Configuration
Classic System Config.
1/4 Config. & Setting

Import/Export
Classic System Config. 1/4
System Details 1/3
System Details 2/3
System Details 3/3
Press “SYS CONF” switch
to go to System Configuration

- 41 -
QT1101-13
SETTING ICON (Adjustment of the system)
Setting ICON
( No Password )
SETTING ×
Set Time ICON Password ICON Calibration ICON

( Password Lv.1 ) ( Password Lv.2 ) ( Password Lv.1 )
Set Time Password Calibration Menu
Analog Output Auxiliary Input Timer Option Analog Input Slide Valve Calibration
Assignment
Analog Input Analog Input DI/O Status

Adjustment 1/2 Adjustment 2/2

- 42 -
QT1101-13
ALARM/FAILURE ICON (Alarm of the system)
Alarm/Failure ICON
( No Password )
ALARM / FAILURE ×
Alarm Log ICON Failure Log ICON Event Log ICON LIMITS ICON
( No Password ) ( No Password ) ( No Password ) ( Password Lv.1 )
Alarm Log Failure Log Event Log
Limits 1/4 Limits 2/4 Limits 3/4 Limits 4/4 Range Over
(Unchangeable (Unchangeable (Unchangeable (Option A/I)
OEM Limits) OEM Limits) OEM Limits )

- 43 -
QT1101-13
CONTROL SUMMARY ICON (System operation)
Control Summary ICON

( No Password ) Control Summary 1/2 Control Summary 2/2
( Lv.1 for a change ) ( Lv.1 for a change )
(1)Set Points
(6)High Stage Capacity Control
(2)Capacity Control (SP DP)

(7)Economizer/Intercooler SV
(3)VFD Compressor (SP DP)

(8)Liquid Injection Control
(4)VFD Compressor (LBT)
(9)Other Set points

(5)Auto Vi Control
Control Summary 1/2
(1) (2) (3)
Set Points Scheduler Capacity Control VFD Compressor

(SP DP) or (LBT) (SP DP)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
VFD Compressor Auto Vi Control High Stage Economizer/Intercooler SV

(LBT) Capacity Control
(8) (9)
Liquid Injection Control Other Set points

・Anti Cycle
・Starting Bypass SV
・Hot Gas Bypass SV
・Oil Heater
・Seal Protection

- 44 -
QT1101-13
(9)Other Set points (14)Expansion Valve

(LBT) Control
(10)Condenser Control (Multi)
(15)Level Control
(10)Condenser Control (Single)
(11)Chiller LBT Control (16)Auto Stage
(17)VFD Setup
(12)Expansion Valve
(SSH) Control
(13)Expansion Valve
(SP) Control
Expansion Valve
(SP2) Control Control Summary 2/2
(10) (11) (12) (13)
Condenser Control Chiller LBT Control Expansion Valve Expansion Valve

(Multi) or (Single) (SSH) Control (SP) Control
(13) (14) (15)
Expansion Valve Expansion Valve Level Control

(SP2) Control (LBT) Control
(16)
Auto Stage Communication Setup

- 45 -
QT1101-13
GRAPH ICON (Diagnosis of the system)
Graph
ICON
( No Password )
Log Date Export Trend Graph Historical Trend Graph

( Password Lv.2 )
Long Range Short Range
Trend Graph Historical Trend Graph

- 46 -
QT1101-13
MONITOR ICON (Verifying of the system)
Monitor ICON
( NO Password )
MONITOR ×
Version ICON System Detail ICON Device Monitor ICON

( No Password ) ( No Password ) ( Password Lv.2 )
Counter ICON Assignment ICON System Overview ICON

( No Password ) ( No Password ) ( Password Lv.1 )
Show Program Version Device Monitor
Counter Assignment System Overview

(Unchangeable）
System Details 1/3 System Details 2/3 System Details 3/3
Display Only
時間
SEC-(n+2)
SEC-(n+1)
SEC-n
SEC-(n-1)
MVL%
0.0%
MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13 設定%-(n-1)
設定%-(n+1)
- 47 -
QT1101-13
3.2 Operation Method
3.2.1 Password
MYPRO TOUCH system has ‘Administration (Limit) by user ID
and password’
You need the user ID and the password when you change the
setting points or start the system operating.
For the items which needs the user ID and the password,
‘Pass word Icon’ like right figure will be displayed.
User ID/ password display

Password Icon
Log on switch
User ID and the password are composed of the alphabetic

character and figure eight characters.
[ Input Method of User ID and Password ]

1. When it touches 'LOG ON' switch, it moves to the 5. When user ID and the password are input, the LOG ON
password input screen. switch is displayed. This switch is fixed touching.
2. To input user ID, it touches the user ID column.
If it is correct, "COMPLETION" lamp turns on.

3. User ID is input. (alphanumeric character and capital
letters and small letters)
The ENT switch is fixed to touch.
(The cursor moves to the Password column by the
automatic operation. )
If it is wrong,"ERROR" lamp turns on.
4. The password is input. (alphanumeric character and

capital letters and small letters)
The ENT switch is fixed to touch.
When it touches the RESET switch when making a mistake,

the input of user ID and the password can be done over again.

- 48 -
QT1101-13
Levels are set for passwords.

Level Name ID (default) Password (default)
- Level- 2 "Administrator password" XYZ 2222
- Level- 1 "User password" ABC 1111
CAUTION
注意
To operate MYPRO TOUCH system properly, manage the user ID and the password with care.
An administrator should be chosen to manage the user ID and the password, and control them tightly.
Password category
Administrator password Level-2 (LogOff is Required on the Top Screen at the Graphic View for the invalidation. ）
Password Device Monitor
File Manager
での LogOff が必要） System Configuration Parameter Clear
System Details A/I Scaling
User password Level-1 (Required LogOff on the Top Screen at the Graphic View for the invalidation.）
Top Screen (changing) Graphic View (changing)
[Control Summary]( changing) Set Points( includes Scheduler) Other Set Points
VFD Setup Auto Vi Auto Stage(including Communication)
Capacity Control Exp. Valve Control (SSH) Exp. Valve Control (SP)
Exp. Valve Control (LBT) Economizer/Intercooler SV Liquid Injection Control
Chiller LBT Control Condenser Control High Stage Cap. Control
VFD Compressor (SP DP) VFD Compressor (LBT) Exp. Valve Control (SSH2)
Exp. Valve Control (CGP2) Level Control
[Setting] Slide Valve Setup Set Time
A/O Assignment A/I Adjustment Option A/I
Auxiliary Input Timer
[Alarm/Failure] Setting(Limits - Range Over)
No password
Top Screen Graphic View Control Summary (display)
[Monitor]
Show Program Version DI/O Status AD I /O Assignment
Alarm Log Failure Log Event Log
[Graph]
Trend Graph Historical Trend Graph (Memo Window）

- 49 -
QT1101-13
3.2.2 Method of movement screen and changing set value
Method of movement on screen

The screen moves in the switch in which the part and the screen title that is the blink (blink) are described when touching.
Touch blinking part or switches that are written a screen title to change the screen.
The switch, the maintenance mark, and the help mark etc. of a part of function name correspond.
3.2.3 Changing Set points Method
Changing set points method
Selecting from options Numerical entry
The settable items are displayed with a frame (no unit) like The items which are available to enter numbers, it is displayed
below figure. with white frame (with unit).
(In many cases, they are written by character string.) (Some numbers have no unit.)
The options are displayed if you touch the frame that you Numerical-keypad will be displayed if you touch the frame that
need to change. you need.
Touch the selected switch to set it.
* Depending on a condition, there is an item that you

cannot select. Touch the number and press the ENT switch to set.
If you select the item, it looks like you can complete the
changing, however, after that it will return to the original Note:
option. Whether it is positive pressure or negative pressure, the unit
Note that it has not been changed actually. will be “psi/"Hg”, if you select “psi” gauge as the unit of
pressure.
(The unit “psi” is displayed when it is unsigned, and “Hg” is
displayed when it is “-”.)
Inputting method by “psi” unit system

Input it with no change if it is the numerical entry of positive
pressure (“psi”).
Press minus ( - )switch at the top of inputting number if it is
the numerical entry of negative pressure (“"Hg”)

- 50 -
QT1101-13
3.3 System Configuration (Initial Setting Method)

Now we start to set up the MYPRO TOUCH system.
’Initialization of the set point’ should be done first after the introduction of MYPRO TOUCH system.
It means to return each setting point of your MYPRO TOUCH system to the factory default.
(Though the setting points had been initialized before the shipment, we are afraid if your MYPRO TOUCH setting points have
changed because of its shipping, the inventory time and the inventory condition,)
(There is no need to initialize your set points from next start up.)
Next step is ‘system configuration setting’.

The setting is needed to adapt the system, such as using compressors or units, to the current system condition
(1) Initialized Set Value Palameter Clear
(2) Composition setting of the Sysytem System Details
(3) Adjustment, Comfirmation, Set Value of analog output Analog Output Adjustment
(4) A set value is read/write from/to the USB memory. Config.&Setting Import/Export
The instruction will be follow the order of above procedure.
3.3.1 ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ Screen

’Initialization of the set point’ is the first step after the
introduction of MYPRO TOUCH system.
Initializations of each control setting points (return to factory
default) and system set-up are required.
‘System Configuration’ screen allows the initializations.
On the screen, compressor operating is not available because
MYPRO TOUCH system makes compressor control program
status stopping.
Procedure
Press the MYPRO TOUCH ‘System Configuration’ icon, which
is arranged in Function Icon part under the condition that the
MYPRO TOUCH system is running and the compressor units
are stopping status. (Configuration ICON）
(Before this step, the password required to be input.)
NOTE : It is not possible to shift to 'SYSTEM CONFIGURATION' at the following.

1. The input of the password is not completed.
2. The contact input of DI-12[MSRB] is ON.
3. 'CONTROL' item of 'AUTO STAGE' screen is 'ENABLE'.
CAUTION
注意
Setting of each items on’ EASY SETUP’ and ’SYSTEM DETAILS’ screens should be done properly to
adjust the setting for compressor units.
If there is a difference of the setting between controller and compressor units, the compressor will not
been controlled properly. Additionally, the protective function of the controller will not work.
Make sure to input ‘OFF’ as an operation command, to avoid unexpected start-up of the compressor
when “control program stopped state” is canceled (migrating normal booting state).
Before the operation, make sure to check the appropriate setting points on other function , when
youhave set or changed the setting items on ‘EASY SETUP’ or ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ screens.

- 51 -
QT1101-13
Below figure is displayed.
(1)PARAMETER CLEAR
(2)SYSTEM DETAILS
(3) ANALOG OUTPUT
ADJUSTMENT
(4)CONFIG.&SETTING
IMPORT/EXPORT
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Below operations are available on the’ System Configuration’ screen.

During displaying this screen, touch the appropriate switch on the above figure to initialize items of below figure.
The name of switch Initialization item Switch action
Control set points return The initializing of the control set points
PARAMETER CLEAR
to initial setting points. Reset the control set points.
Switches to the ‘SYSTEM DETAIL’ screen as the set points are.

SYSTEM DETAILS ---
Set and check the system.
ANALOG OUTPUT Switches to the ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT’ screen.
---
ADJUSTMENT Set and check the analog output.
CONFIG. & SETTING
--- Switches to the ‘CONFIG. & SETTING IMPORT/EXPORT’ screen.
IMPORT/EXPORT
CAUTION
注意
The MYPRO TOUCH operation will be momentary-unstable and after that it goes the same condition as
just after power on, when you operate the system reset.
Make sure not to do the system reset while the compressor is running.
Because this state of event adversely affect the devices while it occurs during the operating of
compressors or auxiliaries.
Initialization of the Set points
” This will be initialize (bring to default) set points would, you like
to continue? “, the execution confirmation message will be
displayed when you touch the ‘PARAMETER CLEAR’ switch.
Press CANCEL switch or INITIALIZE switch.
The MYPRO TOUCH initializes and defaults each set point if

you touch INITIALIZE switch. During this initializing, a timer will
be displayed and you cannot operate it.

- 52 -
QT1101-13
3.3.2 ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen
On the ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ screen, you can set System

Configuration.
CAUTION
注意
When the setting is changed by the following items, a set
all value (The control setting value is included) is
initialized.
- I/O PLATFORM
- COMPRESSOR
Items in ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen (SYSTEM DETAILS 1/3)

Item Setting Option Description
* ENGLISH
FRENCH
GERMAN
LANGUAGE PORTUGUESE
RUSSIAN
SPANISH
JAPANESE
POLISH
* NORTH AMERICA North American specification (OS is displayed.)
I/O PLATFORM SOUTH AMERICA South American specification
(Input/output
specification) EUROPE European specification (AFFP is displayed.)
ASIA Asian specification (Neither OS nor AFFP are displayed.)
* SINGLE Single-stage compressor models
ECONOMIZER W/O SENSOR Economizer (without IT and IP sensors)
ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR Economizer (with IT and IP sensors) (IP, IT and ISH are displayed.)
COMPOUND-1 (1610 & 1612) Two-stage compressor (1610 and 1612) (IP, IT and ISH are displayed.)
COMPOUND-2 (2016 & HIGHER) Two-stage compressor (2016 and higher) (HSV, IP, IT and ISH are displayed.)
SINGLE UD-V(VARIABLE Vi) Compressors with Auto Vi control
COMPRESSOR
400 SERIES 400 series compressors (SVOP and dOP2 are displayed.)
(Type)
SINGLE J J series compressors
ECONOMIZER W/O SENSOR J series with economizer (without IT and IP sensors)
ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR J series with economizer (with IT and IP sensors) (IP, IT and ISH are displayed.)
FM160 FM160 model compressor
ECONOMIZER W/O SENSOR FM160 with economizer (without IT and IP sensors)
ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR FM160 with economizer (with IT and IP sensors) (IP, IT and ISH are displayed.)
W/O OIL PUMP Without oil pump
OIL PUMP
(Number of oil * W/ 1-OIL PUMP Oil pump x 1
pumps)
W/ 2-OIL PUMPS Oil pumps x 2
* FULL LUBE Pump-pressurized oil feed
OIL FEED TYPE PRE LUBE Differential-pressure oil feed

PARTIAL LUBE Pump-pressurized oil feed only at startup
AUTO LUBE Auto oil feed on differential oil pressure judgment.
dFP CALCULATION * DP - AFP
(Filter differential
BFP - OP
pressure calculation
method) DP - OP
NOTE: In the table, the setting options marked * are the default settings

- 53 -
QT1101-13

dOP CALCULATION * OP - DP
(Oil differential OP - SP
pressure calculation method) DP - OP
* NOT USE NOT USE
OIL RETURN SV
USE USE
R22 Chloradifluoromethane (CHCIF2)
R23 Trifluoromethane (CHF3)
R134a 1,1,2,2-Tetrafluoromethane (C2H2F4)
R404A Blend of R-125/R-143a/R-134a
R407C Blend of R-32/R-125/R-134a
REFRIGERANT R410A Blend of R-32/R-125

(Type) R502 Blend of R-22/R-115
R507A R-125/R-143a
* R717(NH3) Ammonia(NH3)
R290(PROPANE) Propane(C3H8)
R744(CO2) Carbon dioxide (CO2)
USER DEFINED Undefined refrigerant (Superheat is not displayed.)
Mpascal Gauge Gauge pressure in MPa
* Kgf/cm2 Gauge Gauge pressure in Kgf/cm2
SENSOR PRESSURE UNIT bar Gauge Gauge pressure in bar
psi Gauge Gauge pressure in psi
kpascal Gauge Gauge pressure in kPa
MPascal Abs Absolute pressure in MPa
Mpascal Gauge Gauge pressure in MPa
Kgf/cm2 Abs Absolute pressure in Kgf/cm 2
PRESSURE DISPLAY Kgf/cm2 Gauge Gauge pressure in Kgf/cm2

(Units of pressure display) bar Abs Absolute pressure in bar
bar Gauge Gauge pressure in bar
psi Abs Absolute pressure in psi
* psi Gauge Gauge pressure in psi
K Absolute temperature
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY o
C Centigrade temperature
(Units of temperature display)
o
* F Fahrenheit temperature
* INTERLOCK-3 Use as INTERLOCK-3
DI15 USE
OIL LEVEL SWITCH Use as OIL LEVEL SWITCH
* YES Oil separator with temperature sensor.
OIL SEPARATOR TEMP. SENSOR
NO Oil separator without temperature sensor.
* YES With after-fine-filter pressure sensor
AFTER FINE FILTER PRESS. SENSOR
NO Without after-fine-filter pressure sensor
AUTO STAGE * NOT USE NOT USE

(Control Number of compressor) 2UNITS - 8UNITS USE
VFD COMPRESSOR * NOT USE NOT USE

(Inverter capacity control) USE USE
VFD COMPRESSOR OUTPUT LIMIT * NOT USE NOT USE

(Inverter outputs bandwidth control) USE USE

- 54 -
QT1101-13

* NOT USE NOT USE
USE DO10,11,12,16,17(UD-V) USE (‘AUTO Vi’ display)(D/O 10,11,12,16,17)
AUTO Vi CONTROL
USE DO19,1A,1B,1C,1D(UD-V) USE (‘AUTO Vi’ display)(D/O 19,1A,1B,1C,1D)
USE J SERIES USE (J model compressor)
MANUAL Manual control
* AUTO Auto control
CAPACITY CONTROL REMOTE DIGITAL Remote capacity control on the digital inputs
REMOTE ANALOG Remote capacity control on the analog inputs
COMM Remote capacity control on the communication
* NOT USE NOT USE
HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL
USE USE(IP,IT,ISH and HSV are displayed)
* DISABLE NOT USE
NONE/THERMAL EXPANSION None/ Thermostatic expansion valve
LIQUID INJECTION
YOSAKU-1 YOSAKU expansion valve x 1
OIL COOLING CONTROL
YOSAKU-2 YOSAKU expansion valve x 2
MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVE 4 - 20 mA driven expansion valve
* DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL TARGET
DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT
CAUTION
注意
Please set a setpoint appropriately on the inverter side at the lowest rotational speed, the maximum
speed, the start frequency, the acceleration time, the deceleration time, and analog input filter time
constant, when the VFD function is used.

- 55 -
QT1101-13
‘Items in ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen(SYSTEM DETAILS 2/3)

* DISABLE NOT USE
VFD ONLY Controls the condenser fans by the revolution only
VFD + 2 STEPS Controls the condenser fans by the revolution and two steps
CONDENSER CONTROL VFD + 3 STEPS Controls the condenser fans by the revolution and three steps
VFD + 5 STEPS Controls the condenser fans by the revolution and five steps
3 STEPS Controls the condenser fans by the three steps
6 STEPS Controls the condenser fans by the six steps
CONDENSER * LOCAL DISCHARGE PRESSURE

CONTROL TARGET SYSTEM DISCHARGE PRESSURE System discharge pressure (SDP is displayed.)
CONDENSER * ON/OFF SINGLE SET Single target ON/OFF control

CONTROL METHOD ON/OFF MULTI SET Multiple target ON/OFF control
ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER * NOT USE NOT USE

EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL USE USE (IP, IT and ISH are displayed.)
Liquid supply control depending on both low-stage capacity
* LSV & SP
ECONIMIZER/INTERCOOLER and suction pressure
LIQUID SUPPLY CONTROL Liquid supply control depending on both high-stage capacity
HSV & IP
and intermediate pressure
NONE/THERMAL EXPANSION None/ thermostatic expansion valve
EXPANSION VALVES
* YOSAKU YOSAKU expansion valve
(Type)
MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVE 4 - 20 mA driven expansion valve
LEVEL CONTROL * NOT USE NOT USE

(Chiller leaving brine control) USE USE
COMPRESSOR * NOT USE NOT USE

OIL SEAL CONTROL USE USE
* NOT USE NOT USE
BYPASS
HOT GAS BYPASS CONTROL
(Bypass control)
STARTING BYPASS CONTROL

- 56 -
QT1101-13

* NOT USE NOT USE
CHILLER CONTROL
USE USE
* 1 1 valve
LIQUID SUPPLY SV
(Number of 2 2 valves
Oil feed solenoid valve)
3 3 valves
NONE/THERMAL EXPANSION None/Thermostatic expansion valve
YOSAKU 1-VALVE
EXPANSION VALVES YOSAKU 2-VALVES

(Type) YOSAKU 3-VALVES
* 1-MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVE 4 - 20 mA driven expansion valve x 1
2-MOTORIZED CONTROL VALVES 4 - 20 mA driven expansion valve x 2
* SH ONLY Control by the superheat only
SH W/ SP LIMIT Control by the superheat with suction pressure limit
EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL
Control by the superheat with chiller leaving brine
(Control method of chiller SH W/ LBT LIMIT
temperature control.
expansion valve)
Control by the superheat with suction pressure limit and
SH W/ SP & LBT LIMIT
chiller leaving brine temperature control.
CHILLER GAS PRESSURE * NO None

SENSOR YES (CGP1 is displayed.)
CHILLER GAS TEMPERATURE * NO None

SENSOR YES (CGT1 is displayed.)
CHILLER * NO None
ENTERING TEMPERATURE
SENSOR YES (EBT is displayed.)
CHILLER * NO None
LEAVING TEMPERATURE
SENSOR YES (LBT is displayed.)
CHILLER * NOT USE
LEAVING TEMPERATURE
CONTROL USE
* NOT USE
CHILLER PUMP MODE AUTO START/STOP
CONTINUOUS

- 57 -
QT1101-13
‘Items in ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen (SYSTEM DETAILS 3/3)

Change to LOCAL MODE Change to the LOCAL mode

OPARATION MODE
ON FAILURE
* Keep Current MODE Staying in the current operation control mode
Change to LOCAL STOP Changed to the STOP state in the LOCAL mode
OPARATION MODE
RESTORE ON POWER UP
* Keep Current CONDITION Staying in the current operation control mode and state
* AUTO RESET Alarm is automatically reset

ALARM RESET
MANUAL RESET Alarm is reset by CLEAR ALARM switch
NO Alarm is not output
ALARM OUTPUT
* YES Alarm is output.
* NORMAL OPEN Normally “open”; “closed” on alarm
ALARM/FAILURE OUTPUT TYPE
NORMAL CLOSE Normally “closed”; “open” on alarm
* LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE Local suction pressure
CONTROL TARGET SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE System suction pressure (SSP is displayed.)
(CUT IN/OUT) CHILLER ENTERING TEMPERATURE Chiller entering process temperature (EBT is displayed.)
CHILLER LEAVING TEMPERATURE Chiller leaving process temperature (LTB is displayed)
* LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE Local suction pressure
SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE System suction pressure (SSP is displayed.)
CHILLER LEAVING TEMPERATURE Chiller leaving process temperature (LTB is displayed)
CONTROL TARGET
COMBINED LOCAL SP/LBT
(CAPACITY CONTROL)
COMBINED SYSTEM SP/LBT
LOCAL DISCHARGE PREESSURE
SYSTEM DISCHARGE PREESSURE System discharge pressure (SDP is displayed.)
Output for leading pump: Y01; output for lagging pump:
* LEAD Y01/LAG Y14
*4 Y14
OIL PUMP LEAD/LAG
Output for leading pump: Y14; output for lagging pump:
LEAD Y14/LAG Y01
Y01
* NO Not Use
DO18 AUX
YES Use
CT SIZE CT Ratio of Current Converter Input CT Ratio

- 58 -
QT1101-13
3.3.3 ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT’ Screen

This screen allows you to adjust the offset value for analog
outputs.
The offset values have already been adjusted by "0.0%" before

shipment from the factory and the adjustments are retained in
the non-volatile memory on the Central Processing Unit board.
Use this screen if fine adjustment to the preset values is
required on your site.
Item Headings in ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ADJUSTMENT’ Screen

Item Heading Description
OUT Displays the current output (in %) with offset value incorporated.
The actual output values are created by adding the calculated analog output values to the offset
OFFSET
values.( Any values up to ±10.0 can be set for ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’ offset values.)
If the output values are too small over the entire range, enter positive numbers as both the ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’ offset values. Enter
negative numbers in the opposite case.
Only for the ’SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen, it becomes possible to enter a value in the ‘OUT’ brackets (indicating the
current output percentage) to make the value be output as an actual output.

- 59 -
QT1101-13
3.3.4 ‘CONFIG. & SETTING IMPORT/EXPORT’ Screen

The screen will be switched to Right Figure, if you touch ‘Config.
& Setting Import/Export’ icon.
On this screen, you are allowed to read set points as CSV file,
also allowed to read and write using USB flash memory.
(1)
1. The preparation of the USB memory

(2)
At first, check if the USB flash memory has been connected to
the touch panel.
(3)
(4)
2. Data Transfer The transmission of data begins when it touches the

(1) TRANSFER ‘MYPRO CPU --> USB STRAGE’ transmit direction switch, and Window goes out while
Touch this (left upper) switch if you need to transfer transmit it as shown in the figure below.
(Export) set points to USB flash memory from TP.
(Modbus Device List :
400901 to 402000 + 409001 to 409700)
(2) TRANSFER ‘USB STRAGE-->MYPRO CPU’

Touch this (left upper) switch if you need to transfer
(Import) set points to TP from USB flash memory.
400901 to 402000 + 409001 to 409700)
(3) PARTIAL TRANSFER ‘USB --> CPU CONFIG ONLY’

Touch this (left lower) switch if you need to transfer When the transferring has finished, “COMPLETED!”
(Import) only ‘System Config. set points’ to TP from window offered as the right figure.
USB flash memory.
400901 to 401300) (about ‘System Config.’)
(4) PARTIAL TRANSFER ‘USB --> CPU LIMITS ONLY’

Touch this (left lower) switch if you need to transfer
(Import) only ‘LIMITS set points’ to TP from USB
flash memory.
401301 to 401658 + 409570 to 409571)
(about ‘LIMITS’) When making an error, the figure below window and the
error code are displayed.

- 60 -
QT1101-13
3. Data Validation in the USB memory

Touch ‘DISP’ switch to open the file manager. Then, you are
allowed to check the data validation in the USB memory.
The Error codes in "STATUS" area

STATUS
Description Countermeasure
No.
The target file does not exist for the transferring
4096 No file No. from the external storage to the connected
equipment.
The data that exceeds the internal device range
has been tried to transfer from the external storage - check if the range specification of the internal
12288 Internal device range error
to the connected equipment when the first address device is correct.
of the transferring is set by the internal device.
The external storage has not been inserted in the - Insert the external storage in the indicator.
16384 No external storage
indicator or SD card cover is opened. - Close the SD card cover.
Failed the reading the data from the external
20480 Read error storage, when the data is transferred from the - Check if the external storage has no damage.
external storage to the connected equipment.
Failed the writing to external storage when the - Check if there is enough space in the external
data is transferred from the connected equipment storage.
24576 Write error
to the external storage or there is no free space. - Check if the external storage has no damage.
The SD card is write –protected. - Awake the write-protect of the SD card.
- Check if the external storage has been
SD card error SD card or USB storage has not been formatted
28672 formatted correctly.
/USB storage error correctly or it has a damage
- Check if the external storage has no damage.
Failed the writing the data to the connected
Write error to - Check the communication of touchpanel and
49152 equipment, when the data is transferred from the
the connected equipment MYPRO TOUCH CPU.
Failed the reading the data from the connected
Read error from - Check the communication of touchpanel and
53248 equipment, when the data is transferred from the
the connected equipment MYPRO TOUCH CPU.
CAUTION
注意
Please do not pull out the USB flash memory between until completing transmit.
Please do not store it excluding data necessary for writing a set value (Import) in the USB flash memory
used for MYPRO TOUCH.
(It doesn't assume the responsibility about the damage of the file etc. at all. )
When prescribed folder (¥file) doesn't exist when preserving it in external storage, folder (¥file) is made
and preserved automatically.
Please copy each folder and preserve it when you preserve the CSV file in PC and other external storage.
When the content, the folder name, and the file name of the CSV file are changed, it is not possible to
read and write it correctly.
A part of data is not read/is not written at the setting and the operating time etc. of each PID contoroller.
Please confirm a set value before it begins to system running when you copy a set value.
Operate with care when you operate the set points file.
Delete the file with special attention. Once you delete the file, you cannot restore the file anymore.
(Basically, there is no need to delete the file.)

- 61 -
QT1101-13
3.4 Adjustment of the System (Setting way for Trial and Readjustment)
(Setting ICON）
The describing of the icons is for the setting method of the trial and readjustment.
(1) ‘SET TIME’ It allows to set the MYPRO TOUCH system time.
(2) ‘PASSWORD’ It allows to change the password file.
(3) ‘CALIBRATION’ It allows to adjust each MYPRO TOUCH system.
(1) ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT It allows to assign analog outputs.
(2) ‘AUXILIARY INPUT TIMER’ It allows to set each control judgment time.(Alarm/Failure judgment time is
‘Alarm/Failure’.)
(3) ‘OPTION ANALOG INPUT’ It allows to set the optional analog inputs, which apply unused vacant
channels.
(4) ‘SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION’ It allows to adjust the position of the compressor slide valves.
(5) ‘ANALOG INPUT ADJUSTMENT’ It allows to adjust analog inputs.
(6) ‘DI/O STATUS’ It allows to check the digital inputs/outputs status and test outputs.

- 62 -
QT1101-13
3.4.1 ‘SET TIME’ Screen

On ‘SET TIME’ screen, it allows you to make settings related to
the date and time.
Items in ‘SET TIME’ Screen
Title Item Description
Select a day of week from the setting
options.
WEEK 0: Monday, 1: Tuesday,
2:Wednesday , 3:Thuesday,
4:Friday, 5:Saturday, 6: Sunday
Enter the number for current month (“1”
SET MONTH
for January, “2” for February, and so on).
TIME
DAY Enter the current date.
YEAR Enter the current year.
HOUR Enter the current hour.
MINUTE Enter the current minute.
SECOND Enter the current second.
CAUTION
注意
MYPRO TOUCH system time may cause the clock error ' ±65 seconds/month ' on the condition that no
power distribution.
While in use, the clock error ' - 380~ +90 seconds/month ' may be caused by the temperature or the
usage period.
Especially if you use the function of schedule operation or data collection, check the difference with
the standard time (the interaction with the touch panel and MYPRO TOUCH CPU) with care, and make
a regular setting of the exact time.
3.4.2 ‘PASSWORD’ Screen

This screen allows you to change the previously registered user
ID and password.
When it touches PASSWORD ICON, it moves to the screen in a

right picture.
The password used with the indicator can be changed on this
screen.
The user can set it up to five in the maximum, Two or more
users can set the password level 1 and 2.
(User ID cannot overlap.)
1. Confirmation of SD card
Please confirm that it is in the state that the SD card can be
used.
CAUTION
注意
To operate MYPRO TOUCH system properly, manage the user ID and the password with care.
An administrator should be chosen to manage the user ID and the password, and control them tightly.

- 63 -
QT1101-13
2. Input of change matter

Please input the password level, ID, and the password
respectively.
The password level can set only "1" or "2".

ID must be composed of 8 characters in the alphanumeric
character.
The password must be composed of 4 characters in the
alphanumeric character.
3. Fixation of change matter

When it touches the CHANGE switch after the input of the
change matter is completed, Window in a right picture is
displayed.
Please push YES if you may change the setting.
If the error occurs when the change is completed, the

following error codes are displayed.
CSV Error Code (upper part of error code display)

0010h D script data Error
0011h LS area read range Error
0012h File name Error
0020h No SD card
0021h SD card Error
0101h File seek Error
0104h Folder make Error
0108h Write mode Error
0110h File make (open) Error
0111h File write Error
SecurityWriteStatus (lower part of error code display)

0 Write Complete
1 to 3 Reserved
4 No External strage
5 CSV file delete Error
6 to 7 Reserved
8 Number of User ID Over
9 Data write Error
10 CSV file name Error
11 CSV file format Error
12 CSV data Error
13 Mode Error
14 Overlap Error (User ID Overlap)
4. Change complete
When the setting is completed, it is displayed as as shown in
a right picture.
Please shut Window touching OK.

- 64 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3 ‘CALIBRATION’ Icon

- 65 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3.1 ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT’ Screen
This screen allows you to make new channel assignments or

change the existing assignments for the items of analog outputs
channel. Moreover, it allows to input offset values (fine adjustment).
Assignment List Display switch
It is possible to allocate it to the analog output by inputting the

CODE number of ASSIGNMENT LIST.
The assignments of bellows are available for the analog

outputs.
Analog inputs process value : AI 01 ~ AI 32
Analog Virtual input (Calculated Value) : AI 65 ~ AI 80
Each adjuster setting value (SV) : PID 1 ~ 15 SV
Each adjuster manipulating value (MV) : PID 1 ~ 15 MV
[ Input Method ]
1. Touch the ‘CODE’ column.
2. The keypad is displayed.
3. The code number for the item to want to output after
‘ASSIGNMENT LIST’ is confirmed is input.
4. Fix it pushing [ ENT ].
5. If the code number specification is correct, the input is
accepted.
It is not accepted when the mistake is found in the code
number, and the previous setting value is displayed.
(For example, it is not accepted because there is no
allocation in the code number "32". )
NOTE:
In the following table, the assignments for the items in parentheses ( ) are valid if the associated optional inputs are available.

- 66 -
QT1101-13
Item in ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT’ Screen

Heading title Item Description
DIRECTION DIRECT Controller outputs 0 to 100% are output as 4 to 20 mA DC signals.

(Polarity) REVERSE Controller outputs 0 to 100% are output as 20 to 4 mA DC signals.
000 : AI01 SUCTION PRESSURE Outputs process value of suction pressure at AI01
001 : AI02 DISCHARGE PRESSURE Outputs process value of discharge pressure at AI02
002 : AI03 OIL SUPPLY PRESSURE Outputs process value of oil supply pressure at AI03
003 : AI04 AFTER FILTER PRESSURE Outputs process value of after-filter-pressure at AI04
004 : AI05 SUCTION TEMPERATURE Outputs process value of suction temperature at AI05
005 : AI06 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE Outputs process value of discharge temperature at AI06
006 : AI07 OIL SUPPLY TEMPERATURE Outputs process value of oil supply temperature at AI07
007 : AI08 ( OIL SEPARATOR TEMPERATURE ) Outputs process value of oil separator temperature
( AFTER FINE FILTER PRESSURE ) or PV of after-fine-filter pressure at AI08
008 : AI09 ( INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE ) Outputs process value of intermediate pressure

( OPTION */4 ) or PV of optional analog input at AI09.
009 : AI10 ( INTERMEDIATE TEMPERATURE ) Outputs process value of intermediate temperature

010 : AI11 ( SYSTEM DISCHARGE PRESSURE ) Outputs process value of system discharge pressure
011 : AI12 COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT Outputs process value of compressor motor current at AI12.
012 : AI13 ( CHILLER ENTERING TEMPERATURE ) Outputs process value of chiller inlet temperature
ASSIGNMENT
( OPTION */4 ) or PV of optional analog input from AI13.
Process Value
013 : AI14 ( CHILLER LEAVING TEMPERATURE ) Outputs process value chiller outlet temperature
of Analog inputs
014 : AI15 (LOW STAGE) SLIDE VALVE POSITION Outputs process value of low-stage capacity at AI15
015 : AI16 ((HIGH STAGE) SLIDE VALVE POSITION)
Outputs Process value of high-stage slide valve position, slide valve
( SLIDE VALVE OIL PRESSURE )
oil feed pressure, system suction pressure, or optional analog input
( SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE )
at AI16.
( OPTION */4 )
016 : AI17 ( CHILLER LEAVING GAS PRESS. ) Outputs PV of evaporator gas outlet pressure at AI17
017 : AI18 ( CHILLER LEAVING GAS TEMP. ) Outputs PV of evaporator gas outlet temperature at AI18
018 : AI19 ( SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE ) Outputs PV of system suction pressure at AI19
019 : AI20
Outputs PV of remote capacity control target at AI20
( REMOTE CAPACITY CONTROL TARGET )
020 : AI21 ( OPTION */4 ) Outputs PV of optional analog input at AI21

021 : AI22 ( OPTION */4 ) Outputs PV pf optional analog input at AI22
024 : AI25 ( CHILLER LEAVING GAS PRESS.2 ) Outputs PV of evaporator gas outlet pressure 2 at AI25
025 : AI26 ( CHILLER LEAVING GAS TEMP.2 ) Outputs PV of evaporator gas outlet temperature 2 at AI26
026 to 063 : AI27 to AI32 INVALID No assignments for outputs at AI27 to AI32
064 : AI65 OIL DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Outputs calculated oil differential pressure (OP-DP) at AI65.
065 : AI66 FILTER DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Outputs calculated filter differential pressure (DP-AFP) at AI66.
066 : AI67 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Outputs calculated differential pressure (AFP-SP or AFP-IP) at AI67.
Outputs calculated suction superheat (ST-SP saturation temperature
ASSIGNMENT 067 : AI68 SUCTION SUPERHEAT
or GT1-SP1 saturation temperature) at AI68.
Outputs calculated intermediate superheat (IT-IP saturation

068 : AI69 ( INTERMEDIATE SUPERHEAT )
Virtual analog temperature) at AI69.
inputs
(Arithmetic Outputs calculated discharge superheat (DT-DP saturation
069 : AI70 DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT
value) temperature) at AI70.
Outputs discharge pressure divided by calculated suction pressure
070 : AI71 ( DIS./SUC. PRESSURE RATIO ) value at AI71. (in case of J Economizer W/ Sensor , Discharge
Pressure / Intermediate pressure )
071 : AI72 ( CALCULATED Vi ) Outputs calculated Vi value at AI72.

- 67 -
QT1101-13
Item in ‘ANALOG OUTPUT ASSIGNMENT’ Screen

Heading title item Description
072 : AI73 ( Vi POSITION ) Outputs Vi position at AI73
073 : AI74 ( COMPRESSOR CAPACITY ) Outputs compressor capacity at AI74
074 : AI75 ( SLIDE VALVE PERCENT ) Outputs percent of slide valve position at AI75
ASSIGNMENT 075 : AI76

( AUTO STAGE TARGET PRESSURE ) Outputs suction pressure for automatic staging control at AI76.
Virtual analog
inputs 076 : AI77 Outputs calculated oil differential pressure 2 (“slide valve oil supply
(Arithmetic value) ( OIL DEFFERENTIAL PRESSURE2 ) pressure (SVOP)” – “discharge pressure (DP)”) at AI77.
Outputs calculated suction superheat2 (“chiller gas temperature2 (CGT2)”

077 : AI78 ( SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 )
– “chiller gas pressure2 (CGP2) saturation temperature”) at AI78.
078 to 079 : INVALID ID No assignments for outputs at AI79 to AI80
081 : PID 01/16 SV PID 01/16 CAPACITY CONTROL PID OUT
Outputs set value or manipulating value for low-stage capacity control
083 : PID 01/16 MV based on suction pressure control.
097 : PID 02/16 SV PID 02/16 ( CAPACITY-CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or manipulating value for low-stage capacity control
099 : PID 02/16 MV based on process outlet temperature control.
113 : PID 03/16 SV PID 03/16 ( SUCTION SUPERHEAT CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or manipulating value of evaporator expansion valve
115 : PID 03/16 MV for suction superheat control.
177 : PID 07/16 SV PID 07/16 ( LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or actual manipulating value of liquid injection
YOSAKU expansion valve for discharge temperature or discharge
179 : PID 07/16 MV superheat control.
193 : PID 08/16 SV PID 08/16 ( CHILLER LBT CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or manipulating value for process flow rate control
195 : PID 08/16 MV based on process outlet temperature control.
ASSIGNMENT 209 : PID 09/16 SV PID 09/16 ( DISCARGE PRESSURE CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or manipulating value for condenser fan speed
211 : PID 09/16 MV control based on discharge pressure control.
Controller Set
Value 225 : PID 10/16 SV PID 10/16 ( HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL PID OUT )
(SV) Outputs set value or actual manipulating value for high-stage capacity
or 227 : PID 10/16 MV control based on intermediate pressure control.
Controller
Manipulating 241 : PID 11/16 SV PID 11/16 ( VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL PID OUT )
Value Outputs set value actual manipulating value for VFD control based on
(MV) 243 : PID 11/16 MV suction pressure control.
257 : PID 12/16 SV PID 12/16 ( VFD-COMPRESSOR CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or manipulating value for VFD control based on
259 : PID 12/16 MV process outlet temperature control.
273 : PID 13/16 SV PID 13/16
Outputs actual manipulating value of evaporator expansion valve for
275 : PID 13/16 MV suction superheat 2 control.
289 : PID 14/16 SV PID 14/16
Outputs actual manipulating value of limiter for chiller gas pressure 2
291 : PID 14/16 MV control.
305 : PID 15/16 SV PID 15/16 ( LEVEL CONTROL PID OUT )
Outputs set value or manipulating value of flow rate regulator valve for
307 : PID 15/16 MV chiller liquid level control.
321 : PID 16/16 SV
No assignments for outputs at PID 16/16.
323 : PID 16/16 MV
336 : NOT USE NOT USE

337 : REPLACEMENT A/O01
ASSIGNMENT If the analog output item having been assigned to A/O## is to be
338 : REPLACEMENT A/O02 reassigned to another channel, selecting ‘A/O## REPLACEMENT’ during
339 : REPLACEMNET A/O03 the setting for the new channel automatically reassigns the item to the
new channel.
340 : REPLACEMENT A/O04

- 68 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3.2 ‘AUXILIARY INPUT TIMER’ Screen
This window allows you to make timer settings for digital input to
the external input channels.
NOTE:
In the following table, ‘INTERLOCK-3’ is valid only
when the associated optional function is provided.
Item in’ AUXILIARY INPUT TIMER’ Screen

Screen title item Description
This item is for setting the limit delay time until the operation confirmation
input at DI-12 (X0B) turns ON after the operation command output at
COMP. MSRB(Starting) DO-01 (Y00) has turned ON during the startup sequence of the
compressor. If the operation confirmation input does not turn ON even
after the limit time, “START FAIL” alarm is issued.
This item is for setting the limit time for which the operation confirmation
input at DI-12 (X0B) may remain OFF during operation of the compressor.
COMP. MSRB(Running)
If the operation confirmation input remains OFF longer than the limit time,
“START FAIL” alarm is issued.
This item is for setting the limit delay time until the operation confirmation
input at DI-12 (X0B) turns OFF after the operation command output at
COMP. MSRB(Stopping) DO-01 (Y00) has turned OFF during the shutdown sequence of the
compressor. If the operation confirmation input does not turn off even after
the limit time, “START FAIL” alarm is issued.
This item is for setting the limit time for which the signal from external input
1 at DI-13 (X0C) may remain OFF during operation of the compressor
INTERLOCK-1
(After turning on the driving confirmation input of DI-12(X0B). ).
(External input 1)
If the input signal remains OFF longer than the limit time, “Interlock–1
Failure” alarm is issued.
This item is for setting the limit time for which the signal from external input
2 at DI-14 (X0D) may remain OFF after the cooling water pump early
AUXILIARY INPUT INTERLOCK-2 driving time (It is the same as Oil Pump Start Delay) passes (after the oil
TIMER (External input 2) pump operation command output at DO-02 (Y01) has turned ON).
If the signal remains OFF even after the limit time, “Interlock–2 Failure”
alarm is issued.
DI-14 functions as 100% LOCK when "EUROPE" is selected by "I/O
100% LOCK PLATEFORM".
(100% Running Input) It drives by 100% in turning on this signal in the capacity of the
compressor.
When chiller pump is not used : (the chiller liquid level switch.)
If the signal from external input 3 at DI-15 (X0E) remains OFF longer than
the limit time you set for this item after the cooling water pump early driving
time (It is the same as Oil Pump Start Delay) passes (after the oil pump
operation command output at DO-02 (Y01) has turned ON), then
( INTERLOCK-3 ) “Interlock–3 Failure” alarm is issued.
(External input 3)
When chiller pump is used : (the chiller water supply warning.)
If the signal from external input 3 at DI-15 (X0E) remains OFF longer than
the limit time you set for this item after the chiller pump operating
command at DI-19 (Y12) has turned ON, then “Interlock–3 Failure” alarm
is issued.
The DI-15(X0E) oil level switch input is generated while driving the
OIL LEVEL SWITCH compressor and when the state of turning off continues for 30 seconds
(fixation), "OIL LEVEL LOW" warning is generated.

- 69 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3.3 ‘OPTION ANALOG INPUT’ Screen
This window allows to assign up to 4 unoccupied analog input

channels to sensors so that their values ( with their units) can be
displayed on the screen. When analog input channels are
assigned to sensors in this window, not only the sensor data can
be displayed on the window and read the data via
communications, but also it becomes possible to assign an
ALARM (minor alarm) and FAILURE (serious alarm) thresholds
to the sensor outputs in both upward and downward directions.
You can change the displayed names on the screen.

(‘OPT#’ for default)
1. Touch the area which is shown at the right figure, if the

changing the name is required.
2. Input any letters, after the key board is displayed.
(Up to 4 alphanumeric characters)
3. Touch the ENT switch to enter.
(When not changing, it touches the ESC switch. )
4. With the icon, you are allowed to switch the name of
default and the inputting name.
You can assign a channel numbers of vacant channels to ‘CHANNEL’1/4 to 4/4 in the window. (Default values are “xxxx”,
indicating “no assignment”.)
The following units can be assigned to the option analog inputs.
Item Unit Description
* NO UNIT No unit
TEMPERATURE Temperature sensor
PRESSURE Pressure sensor
CURRENT Current sensor
SENSOR
RATE 0.0 - 100.0 %
VIBRATION Vibrometer sensor
REVOLUTION Revolutions sensor
FREQUENCY Frequency
* NOT USE No ALARM and FAILURE are assigned
LOW Low ALARM or Low FAILURE is assigned
ALARM and FAILURE
HIGH High ALARM or High FAILURE is assigned
HIGH & LOW Low and High ALARM, or Low and High FAILURE are assigned
NOTE:
Following types of ALARM (minor warning) or FAILURE (serious warning) are selectable for the assigned optional analog input
item. For the method, see Section 3.5.5 ‘LIMITS 4/4’ screen”.

- 70 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3.4 ‘SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION’ Screen

The settings in this screen are necessary to enable automatic calibration of the 0 % and 100 % position signals of the unloader
slide valve.
NOTE:
MYPRO TOUCH cannot complete the automatic calibration processing if any of the following conditions exists:
- The potentiometer for detecting the slide valve position has defective.
- The potentiometer is installed at an inappropriate angle.
- Connection to analog input channels is incorrect.
- Any of the analog input selections is incorrect (see Section 2.4.2 Input Type Selection for Channels 15 and 16 of Analog Input
Boards).
The setting in this screen is possible only when ‘YES’ is selected

for ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’ in the ‘OPERATION MODE’
screen.
If ‘NO’ is selected, the ‘NOT AVAILABLE’ message shown in
the right figure, indicating that the setting in the ‘SLIDE VALVE
SETUP’ screen is not possible.
When ‘YES’ is selected for ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’, the

screen displays as right figure.
WARNING
注意
Setup operation in this ‘SLIDE VALVE SETUP’ screen involves actual operation of the oil pump. Confirm the
safety in the compressor unit area before pressing the switches.
After an automatic correction is completed, it is possible to fine-tune it manually by 'ANALOG INPUT ADJUSTMENT' in the next
paragraph.
Because the adjustment value is input after it corrects it automatically, the numerical value is fine-tuned.

- 71 -
QT1101-13
Setup Method
The setup method in this screen is different depending on the compressor type. Use the appropriate one of the following 4
different methods.
a Single-stage compressors
(Single-stage compressors except compressors with an automatic Vi adjustment function and J-Series compressors and
two-stage compressors without a function for detecting the high-stage slide valve position)
1. Touch NEXT switch to activate ‘SLIDE VALVE 3. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to
CALIBRATION’ function. move the slide valve position to the 100% position.
DO-02(Y01) : Oil pump output turns ON
DO-03(Y02) : Low-stage capacity loading
solenoid valve output turns ON
DO-04(Y03) : Low-stage capacity unloading
solenoid valve output turns OFF
(Display showing the current settings for the slide When the actual capacity of the compressor has
valve) reached 100%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE
Location’ value does not rise anymore.), touch NEXT
switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM’ value.
2. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to
completely set the slide valve position to the unload NOTE: The processing does not advance to the next
position (0%). step unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’
DO-02(Y01) : Oil pump output turns ON value at this time is larger than the value at
DO-03(Y02) : Low-stage capacity loading the time of the ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM’
solenoid valve output turns OFF value in the above step.
solenoid valve output turns ON
When the actual capacity of the compressor has
reached 0.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE
Location’ value does not come down anymore.), touch
NEXT switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM’ value. (Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM’ value)
The ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value changes from 0 to
4095 as the input changes from 0 % to 100 %.
set back the slide valve position to the full unload
position.
DO-02(Y01) : Oil pump output turns ON
(Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM’ value) solenoid valve output turns ON
DO-05(Y04) : Low-stage capacity loading
solenoid valve output turns OFF
reached 5% or less, all of the out puts automatically
turn off.
(Screen showing the screen condition that is automatic

movement of the slide valve to unload the compressor)
NOTE: Touching the ESC switch at any time can cancel the setup procedure halfway.

- 72 -
QT1101-13
b Two-stage compressors
(when ‘COMPOUND-2 (2016 & HIGHER)’ has been selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’ screen)
1. Touch NEXT switch to activate the ‘SLIDE VALVE DO-05(Y04) : [HILD] output turns OFF
CALIBRATION’ function. DO-06(Y05) : [HIUL] output turns ON
When the actual high stage capacity of the compressor has
reached 0.0%, (The point of time that high stage ‘SLIDE
VALVE Location’ value does not come down anymore.),
touch NEXT switch to set high stage ‘SLIDE VALUE
(Display showing the current settings for slide valve) MINIMUM’ value.

completely set the low stage slide valve position to the
unload position (0%).
DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON (Screen for setting high stage ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM’ value)
DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns OFF
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON 5. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to move
When the actual low stage capacity of the compressor has the high stage slide valve position to the 100% position.
reached 0.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON
Location’ value does not come down anymore.), touch DO-05(Y04) : [HILD] output turns ON
NEXT switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM’ value. DO-06(Y05) : [HIUL] output turns OFF
The ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value changes from 0 to When the actual high stage capacity of the compressor
4095 as the input changes from 0 % to 100 %. has reached 100.0%, (The point of time that high stage
‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value does not rise anymore.),
touch NEXT switch to set high stage ‘SLIDE VALUE
MINIMUM’ value.
NOTE : The processing does not advance to the next step
(Screen for setting low stage ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM’ value) unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value at this time is
larger than the value at the time of the high stage ‘SLIDE
3. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to move VALVE MINIMUM’ value in the above step.
the low stage slide valve position to the 100% position.
DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON
DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns ON
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns OFF
When the actual low stage capacity of the compressor has (Screen for setting high stage ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM’ value)
reached 100.0%, touch NEXT switch to set low stage
‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM’ value. 6. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to set
NOTE : The processing does not advance to the next step back the slide valve position to the unload position
unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value at this time is completely.
larger than the value at the time of the low stage ‘SLIDE DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON
VALVE MINIMUM’ value in the above step. DO-04(Y03) : [LOAD] output turns ON
DO-06(Y05) : [HIUL] output turns ON
When the low/high stage actual capacity of the
compressor has reached 5% or less , all of the out puts
automatically turn off.
(Screen for setting low stage ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM’ value)
4. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to set

the high stage slide valve position to the full unload
position (0%). (Screen showing the status of automatic movement of
DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output urns ON the slide valve to unload the compressor)

- 73 -
QT1101-13
c Compressors with an automatic Vi adjustment function

(When ‘SINGLE UD-V (Variable Vi)’ has been selected for ‘COMPRESSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’ screen)
1. Touch NEXT switch to activate’ SLIDE VALVE

CALIBRATION’ function. DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON
When the capacity slide valve position has reached
100.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’
value does not rise anymore.), touch NEXT switch to
(Display showing the current settings for the unloader set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM at H Port’ value.
slide valve) NOTE : The processing does not advance to the next
step unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value at
2. At the end of a fixed 5-second period taken for this time is larger than the value at the time of the
confirming the rise in oil supply differential pressure, ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM(0%)’ value in the above
MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep the below status step.
to bring the Vi slide valve position to the H port.
DO-18(Y11) : [MPUL] output turns ON
DO-23(Y16) : [LHLD] output turns ON
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON
Wait for 60 seconds. (Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM at H PORT’)
(The Vi port is brought into the H port in this period).
adjust the slide valve position to M port.
DO-17(Y10) : [MPLD] output turns ON
DO-24(Y17) : [LHUL] output turns ON
(Adjustment is in progress to bring Vi port into H port) Wait for 60 seconds
(the Vi port is brought into the M port during this period).
completely set the slide valve position to the unload
position (0%) at the H port.
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON
DO-18(Y11) : [MPUL] output turns OFF
DO-23(Y16) : [LHLD] output turns OFF (Adjustment is in progress to bring Vi port into M port)
When the capacity and the slide valve position have
reached 0.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE 6. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to
Location’ value does not come down anymore.), touch move the capacity slide valve to the 100% position at M
NEXT switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM’ value. port.
The ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value changes from 0 to DO-17(Y10) : [MPLD] output turns OFF
4095 as the input changes from 0 % to 100 %. DO-24(Y17) : [LHUL] output turns OFF
When the slide valve position has reached 100.0%,
(The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value
does not rise anymore.), touch NEXT switch to set
‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM at M Port’ value.
(Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM (0 %)’)
NOTE: The processing does not advance to the next
4. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to step unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’
move the capacity slide valve position to the 100% value at this time is larger than the value at
position. the time of the H port value in the above step.

- 74 -
QT1101-13

set back the slide valve position to the full unload
position.
(Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM at M PORT’) DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON
7. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to reached 5.0% or less, the out puts of the DO-04(Y03)
adjust the slide valve position to L port. and the DO-02(Y01) automatically turn off.
DO-18(Y11) : [MPUL] output turns ON
DO-24(Y17) : [LHUL] output turns ON
Wait for 60 seconds (the Vi port is brought into the L
port during this period).
(Screen showing the status of automatic movement of
the slide valve for unloading.)
NOTE:
Depending on the setting made in the ‘SYSTEM
(Adjustment is in progress to bring Vi port into L port) CONFIGURATION’ (‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ screen), the
assignments for digital outputs may change to the following:
8. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to [MPLD] output DO-26(Y19)
move the capacity slide valve to the 100% position at L [MPUL] output DO-27(Y1A)
port. Vi slide “bypass” solenoid valve output DO-28(Y1B)
DO-18(Y11) : [MPUL] output turns OFF [LHLD] output DO-29(Y1C)
DO-24(Y17) : [LHUL] output turns OFF [LHUL] output DO-30(Y1D)
When the capacity and slide valve positions have
reached 100.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE
Location’ value does not rise anymore.), touch NEXT
switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM (100%)’.
NOTE : The processing does not advance to the next

step unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value
at this time is larger than the value at the time
of the M port value in the above step.
(Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM 100 %’ value)
NOTE: Pressing the ESC switch at any time can cancel the setup procedure halfway.

- 75 -
QT1101-13
d J Series compressors
(when ‘SINGLE J’, ‘SINGLE J ECONOMIZER W/O SENSOR’, or ‘SINGLE J ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR’ has been
selected for ‘COMPRESSOR’ in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’ screen)
1. Touch NEXT switch to activate the ‘SLIDE VALVE 4. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to
CALIBRATION’. move the capacity slide valve to the 100% position at H
port.
DO-08(Y07) : [L->H] output turns ON
(Display showing the current settings for unloader slide valve) DO-09(Y08) : [H->L] output turns OFF
2. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status for 100%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’
60 seconds to adjust the following output states in value does not rise anymore.), touch NEXT switch to
order to adjust the position of the solenoid valve for Vi set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM ’.
port to H port.
DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON NOTE : The processing does not advance to the next
DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns OFF step unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value at
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON this time is larger than the value at the time of the
DO-08(Y07) : [L->H] output turns ON ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUM( 0%)’ value in the above
DO-09(Y08) : [H->L] output turns OFF step.
Wait until the display changes at the end of 60 seconds.
(Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM at H PORT’)

(Adjustment is in progress to bring Vi port into H port)
5. MYPRO TOUCH retains the following output states for
3. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to 60 seconds in order to adjust the position of the
completely set back the capacity slide valve position to solenoid valve for Vi port to L port
the unload position (0%) at the H port again after DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON
switching the display. DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns OFF
DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns OFF
DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns OFF DO-08(Y07) : [L->H] output turns OFF
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON DO-09(Y08) : [H->L] output turns ON
DO-08(Y07) : [L->H] output turns ON Wait until the display changes at the end of 60
DO-09(Y08) : [H->L] output turns OFF seconds.
0.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’
value does not come down anymore.), touch NEXT
switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM (0%)’ value.
(Adjustment is in progress to bring Vi port into L port)
(Screen for the settings ‘SLIDE VALVE MINIMUN (0%)’)

- 76 -
QT1101-13
6. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to 7. MYPRO TOUCH allows you to keep below status to
move the capacity slide valve position to the 100% set back the slide valve position to the complete unload
position at the L port after switching the display . position.
DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON DO-02(Y01) : [OILP] output turns ON
DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns ON DO-03(Y02) : [LOAD] output turns OFF
DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns OFF DO-04(Y03) : [UNLD] output turns ON
DO-08(Y07) : [L->H] output turns OFF DO-08(Y07) : [L->H] output turns OFF
DO-09(Y08) : [H->L] output turns ON DO-09(Y08) : [H->L] output turns OFF
When the capacity slide valve position has reached When the actual capacity of the compressor has
100.0%, (The point of time that ‘SLIDE VALVE reached 5.0% or less, all of the out puts automatically
Location’ value does not rise anymore.), touch NEXT turn off.
switch to set ‘SLIDE VALUE MINIMUM ’.
NOTE: The processing does not advance to the next

step unless the ‘SLIDE VALVE Location’ value at
this time is larger than the value at the time of the
capacity slide valve 100% at the H port and also less (Screen showing the unloader slide valve being
than ‘Vi Location’ value at the H port. brought to the fully unloaded position automatically.)
In the following cases, the adjustment is not completed.

- 100% position at H-port < 100% position at L-port
- Vi position at H-port > Vi position at L-port
(Screen for setting ‘SLIDE VALVE MAXIMUM’) (The difference of 20%(819) or more is necessary. )
M port cannot be adjusted.

The position of "44.88%" is made M port by 'Vi Location' value
adjusted according to the above-mentioned procedure as
100% in H port 0%→ L port.
NOTE: Pressing the ESC switch at any time can cancel the setup procedure halfway.
Exit screen
Above screen will be displayed when ‘SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION’ is terminated.

Touch TOP SCR switch to go back to ’TOP SCREEN’.

- 77 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3.5 ‘ANALOG INPUT ADJUSTMENT’ Screen
This window allows you to adjust the offset and filter coefficient
values that are required for proper indication and processing of
each analog input data.
Item Headings in ‘ANALOG INPUT ADJUSTMENT’ Screen

Item Heading Description
Under this heading, the display shows a list of the items assigned to the individual analog input
CH. DESCRIPTION
channels.
If you enter positive or negative values in the brackets which are corresponding ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’
under this heading, MYPRO TOUCH makes scaling after adding these values to actual analog input
OFFSET
data and use them as process value. (see NOTE below) ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’ values may be up to ±
50 % of full scale.
If you decrease this value, the processing responses more quickly to change in process values but
FILTER
has more influence of noise and other interferences. The reverse is true when you increase this
COEFFICIENT
value. Any number between 0.00 and 0.99 can be entered.
CHANEL SELECT Select ‘CH. 1 - 16’ or ‘CH. 17 - 32’; the items for 16 channels are displayed for each selection.
Under this heading, values represented in industrial units are indicated. These values reflect the
PROCESS VALUE
offset calculation made to the filter coefficient values and scaling.
Displayed process value NOTE:

The left diagram shows the case in which the
Maximum value in
sensor range displayed values are too small in the entire
OFFSET measurement range. To make the values
‘HIGH’ appropriate for display, positive numbers should
be entered in both ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’ brackets.
If the displayed values are too large over the entire
range, negative numbers must be entered.
Minimum value in
sensor range
OFFSET ‘LOW’ Actual process value
0 100％
%

- 78 -
QT1101-13
3.4.3.6 ‘DI/O STATUS’ Screen

Using the ‘DI/O SATATUS’ screen, you can monitor the ON/OFF state of each digital input/output. This screen can also be used
for testing the condition of digital ON/OFF outputs by manually turning them ON/OFF.
Both monitoring and testing using this screen is possible when the following conditions are all met:
- ‘LOCAL’ is selected for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen.
- The compressor is in a stopped state (the state of operation confirmation input (MSRB) at DI-12 (X0B) is OFF).
- ‘NO (disapproval of auto start/stop) is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item in the ‘OPERATION
MODE’ screen.
- ‘YES’ (approval of manual operating) is selected for the ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’
screen.
Monitoring of digital outputs/inputs

The round shape lamps, which are in the mock picture of Digital
input/output board, show the status of the digital input status.
(ON: lighting, OFF: no right)
The square shape lamps, which are in the mock picture of
Digital input/output board, show the status of the digital output
status. (ON: lighting, OFF: no right)
Manually turning ON/OFF of the digital outputs

Press ‘ P ’switch or‘ T ’switch of that you need to manual
operate its digital output channel.
- Whenever you touch ‘ P ’(PERMANENT) switch, the
corresponding digital outputs alternately turn ON/OFF.
(Alternate outputs)
- While you are touching ‘ T ’ (TEMPORARY) switch, the
corresponding digital outputs turn on.
(Momentary outputs)
NOTE:
When this ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’ screen is closed, all the states you have changed in this screen are cleared (all digital
outputs are set to OFF).
CAUTION
注意
For the sake of safety, the following design considerations are incorporated:
- Only the momentary turning ON of output by the use of the ‘ T ’(TEMPORARY)switch is enable for the
compressor operation command (COMP) output at DO-01 (Y00). (Alternating output with the ‘ P ’
(PARMANENT) switch is impossible.)
- If the operation confirmation input (MSRB) at DI-12 (X0B) turns ON while the compressor operation
command output at DO-01 (Y00) is being momentarily turned ON by pressing the ‘ T ’ (TEMPORARY)
switch , the compressor operation command output at DO-01 (Y00) automatically turns OFF.

- 79 -
QT1101-13
3.5 Alarm/Failure of the system (Alarm/Failure setting method for security
of devices)
(Alarm/Failure ICON)
Below icons, mainly show the Alarm/Failure setting method for security of devises.
(1) ‘ALARM LOG’ It allows you to check Alarm history.
(2) ‘FAILURE LOG’ It allows you to check Failure history.
(3) ‘EVENT LOG’ It allows you to check variety of event histories.
(4) ‘LIMITS’ It allows you to set each Alarm/Failure set points. (‘OEM LIMITS’ is only for checking.)
It allows you to set the Alarm/Failure set points of ‘OPTION ANALOG INPUT’.
It allows you to set the Alarm/Failure set points of sensor ‘RANGE OVER’

- 80 -
QT1101-13
3.5.1 ‘ALARM LOG’ Screen
3.5.2 ‘FAILURE LOG’ Screen
This screen allows you to check the past 100 alarms/failure

records, their names, the dates and times of their issuance.
Both ALARM and FAILURE are logged and displayed.

The alarms/failure history is displayed from latest at the top to
the oldest at the bottom.
The display is overwritten the alarms/failure record beginning
with the chronologically oldest the alarms/failure record, when it
surpasses 100 records.
Whether the alarm has been cleared or is currently active is

shown by different colors.
Display part
Clear Alarm Switch Clear All Log Cursor display Switch
EMERGENCY STOP An FAILURE that was issued in the

past and has not been cleared
EMERGENCY STOP An ALARM that was issued in the past
and has not been cleared
EMERGENCY STOP An ALARM/FAILURE that was issued
in the past and has been cleared
(Blank) No alarm is logged for the number.
Up to 16 logged alarms/failures can be displayed at a time.

The display can be changed by touching CURSOR OFF switch
and displaying cursor for the cursor motion with below cursor
moving switches.
: moving to 10 newer logs

: moving to one before log
: moving to previous log

: moving to 10 older logs
“Trouble content and troubleshooting” of the alarm/failure will be displayed if you touch any one of the records in the 16 displayed
logs.
If it meets the warning release requirement, and it touches the warning release switch (Clear Alarm switch), warning is released,
and the display becomes light blue.
Please touch warning log deletion switch (Clear All Recovery) when you want to delete the warning log.
(* All logs are deleted.)
The name, type and judgment condition of a detectable alarm/failure on MYPRO TOUCH system will be described in ”4.4. Type
and judgment condition of an alarm/failure”.

- 81 -
QT1101-13
3.5.3 ‘EVENT LOG’ Screen

This screen displays the past 100 operation events and digital
input/output change events (event log).
You can track the operations of the compressor and that what
types of control were made in the past.
The event log covers 100 past events such as operation of the
CLEAR ALARM switch and the dates/times of changes of digital
input/output.
Every time a new event occurs when 100 events have been
expired, the previous events will be overwritten with the newly
occurring events.
Mark Function
DO-01 Compressor Start
DO-02 Oil Pump Start
DI-10 Emergency Stop Input
DI-16 Remote Start/Stop Input
DO-19 Chiller Pump Start
DO-21 Oil Pump #2 Start
switch START
switch STOP
switch Clear Alarm
Power supply Power-on

- 82 -
QT1101-13
3.5.4 ‘LIMITS 1/4 to 3/4’ Screen
This Screen allows you to set alarm/failure set points

(‘ALARM/FAILURE’). (As for the items, refer the next page.)
Each alarm/failure set points should be set within the number

range of ‘OEM LIMITS’.
There are two sets of alarm/failure set points (#1 and #2).
You can switch for each set that has been preset without
changing each alarm/failure set points.
NOTE :
“No ALARM” is issued if you set the same value for both
FAILURE and ALARM.
NOTE : Switching of #1 and #2

The items, which are in parentheses on the next table, can be の切り替え
displayed or set by option setting.
3.5.5 ‘LIMITS 4/4’ Screen

(Setting of’ OPTION ANALOG INPUT ALARM/FAILURE’)
This ‘LIMITS 4/4’ screen allows you to input a HIGH or LOW

threshold of ALARM/FAILURE alarm of each optional analog
input. The threshold has been assigned at “4.2.2 OPTIONAL
ANALOG INPUT”.
(As for the items, refer to the next page.)
An ALARM/FAILURE alarm is issued with the preset delay if the

optional analog input value exceeds the HIGH or LOW limit set
here at the end of the specified masking time from starting of the
compressor.
This screen cannot be selected for display from the menu if no

ALARM/FAILURE is assigned to any analog input in the
‘OPTION ANALOG INPUT’ screen.
Unlike the alarms for standard analog input items handled in

windows ‘LIMITS 1/4’ ~ ‘LIMITS 3/4’ where two values (#1 and
#2) are preset for each of the items, only one value is set for
each ALARM/FAILURE alarm item in the case of optional
analog inputs. Another difference of ALARM/FAILURE alarms
for optional analog inputs is that they are issued even when you
set the same value for both FAILURE and ALARM.
NOTE:
No OEM LIMITS setting is possible with optional analog inputs for ALARM/FAILURE.
The items, which are in parentheses on the next table, can be enabled by ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ setting.

- 83 -
QT1101-13
Items in ‘ALARM/FAILURE 1/4 to 3/4’ Screen
Items Description
RE-START/TIMEOUT Set a period of time during which whether a "RE-START" alarm is to be issued or not is determined.
HIGH MA Set “COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT HIGH” alarm set point.
LOW SP Set “SUCTION PRESSURE LOW” alarm set point.
DELAY Set delay before “SP LOW” alarm is issued.
MASK TIME Set the mask time until “SP LOW” alarm is issued after start of compressor. (both ALARM and FAILURE.)
HIGH SP Set “SUCTION PRESSURE HIGH” alarm set point.
DELAY Set delay before “SP HIGH” alarm is issued.
(HIGH IP) Set “INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE HIGH” alarm set point.
(LOW OP2) Set point at which “dOP2 (= [SVOP] – [DP]) LOW” alarm is issued.
HIGH DP Set “DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH” alarm set point.
LOW OP Set point at which “dOP (= [OP] – [DP]) LOW” alarm is issued.
(LOW OP (OP - SP)) Set point at which “dOP (= [OP] – [SP]) LOW” alarm is issued.
Set “dP LOW” alarm point. dP is as defined below:
LOW dP
Single-stage compressor: dP = [AFP] – [SP] , Two-stage compressor: dP = [AFP] – [IP]
Set a period of time during which “dP LOW” alarm is to be masked after start of compressor. (This setting works for
MASK TIME
both ALARM and FAILURE.)
HIGH OF Set point at which “OIL FILTER” alarm is issued. (dFP = [DP] – [AFP])
DELAY Set delay before “OIL FILTER” alarm is issued. (This setting works for both ALARM and FAILURE.)
(HIGH FF) Set point at which “FINE FILTER” alarm is issued. (dFFP = [DP] – [AFP])
(DELAY) Set delay before “FINE FILTER” alarm is issued. (This setting works for both ALARM and FAILURE.)
HIGH ST Set point at which “SUCTION TEMPERATURE HIGH” alarm is issued.
DELAY/ Set delay before “ST HIGH” alarm is issued. (This setting works for both ALARM and FAILURE.)
/MASK TIME Set period during which “ST HIGH” alarm is masked after start of compressor. (both ALARM and FAILURE.)
HIGH DT Set point at which “DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH” alarm is issued.
HIGH OT Set point at which “OIL TEMPERATURE HIGH” alarm is issued.
(LOW OS) Set point at which “OIL SEPARATOR TEMPERATURE LOW” alarm (ALARM) is issued.
Set period during which “OS LOW” alarm (ALARM) is masked after start of compressor. (This setting works also for dP
(MASK TIME)
MASK TIME.)
(LOW EB) Set point at which “CHILLER ENTERING TEMPERATURE LOW” alarm (ALARM) is issued.
(LOW LB) Set point at which “CHILLER LEAVING TEMPERATURE LOW” alarm is issued.
LOW SSH Set point at which “SUCTION SUPERHEAT LOW” alarm is issued.
CANCEL/ Set point at which “SSH LOW” ALARM is cancelled. (Cancellation occurs with a fixed delay of 15 seconds).
/DELAY Set delay before “SSH LOW” FAILURE is issued. (In the case of ALARM, the delay time is fixed at 30 seconds.)
(LOW SSH2) Set point at which “SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 (CGT2-CGP2 saturation temperature) LOW” alarm is issued.
(CANCEL/) Set point at which “SSH2 LOW” ALARM is cancelled. (Cancellation occurs with delay fixed at 15 seconds.)
(/DELAY) Set delay before “SSH2 LOW” FAILURE is issued. (In the case of ALARM delay time is fixed at 30 seconds.)
(LOW ISH) Set point at which “INTERMEDIATE SUPERHEAT LOW” alarm is issued.
LOW DSH Set point at which “DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT LOW” alarm is issued.
DELAY Set delay before “DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT LOW” alarm is issued.
MASK TIME Set period during which “DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT LOW” ALARM is masked after start of compressor.
(LOW CHILLER LEVEL) Set point at which “LIQUID LEVEL LOW” ALARM is issued.
DELAY/ Set delay before “LIQUID LEVEL LOW” ALARM is issued.
/MASK TIME Set period during which “LIQUID LEVEL LOW” ALARM is masked after start of compressor.
Items ‘ALARM/FAILURE 4/4’ (OPTION ANALOG INPUT ALARM/FAILURE)Screen

Item Description
LOW OPT# Set point at which “OPTION ANALOG INPUT# LOW” alarm is issued.
DELAY/ Set delay before “OPTION ANALOG INPUT# LOW” alarm is issued.
/MASK TIME Set period during which “OPT#AI# LOW” alarm is masked after start of compressor. (both ALARM and FAILURE.)
HIGH OPT# Set point at which “OPTION# ANALOG INPUT# HIGH” alarm is issued
DELAY/ Set delay before “OPT# HIGH” alarm is issued.
/MASK TIME Set period during which “OPT# AI#HIGH” alarm is masked after start of compressor. (both ALARM and FAILURE.)

- 84 -
QT1101-13
3.5.6 ‘RANGE OVER’ Screen

This screen allows you to set the period of the time during which
an over-range / under-range alarm condition is to be detected
and the mask time during which a failure condition is not
detected for each sensor also.
If settings are made for the individual sensors listed in this

screen, you can identify a sensor to be faulty if it is sending data
showing a value above the upper limit (95% or more of the full
scale) or below the lower limit (5 % or less of the full scale).
(Only for ‘INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE SENSOR’, its lower
limit is 2 % or less of the full scale.)
If zero (0) is entered in the ‘[ 0 ] SEC’ space for a sensor under

the ‘FAILURE DELAY’ item, no alarm is issued for the sensor.
(Inputting 0 is valid and it is possible to input from the sensor.)
Items in ‘RANGE OVER’ Screen

Item Description
No sensor alarm conditions are detected during this period of time after the
FAILURE MASK TIME
start of compressor operation.
PRESSURE SENSOR Set the failure mask time for the pressure sensor.
TEMPERATURE SENSOR Set the failure mask time for the temperature sensor.
Set the delay before output of alarm for each sensor.
FAILURE DELAY (VALUE 0 INVALIDATES)
(If it is set to “0”, no alarm state is detected of the sensor.)
SUCTION PRESSURE OVER Upper limit alarm of suction pressure sensor at AI-01
DISCHARGE PRESSURE UNDER Lower limit alarm of discharge pressure sensor at AI-02
OIL SUPPLY PRESSURE OVER Upper limit alarm of oil supply pressure sensor at AI-03
AFTER FILTER PRESSURE OVER Upper limit alarm of after-oil-filter pressure sensor at AI-04
SUCTION TEMPERATURE OVER/UNDER Upper/ lower limit alarm of suction temperature sensor at AI-06
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE UNDER Lower limit alarm of discharge temperature sensor at AI-07
OIL SUPPLY TEMPERATURE UNDER Lower limit alarm of oil supply temperature sensor at AI-08
*1
(INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE UNDER) Lower limit alarm of intermediate pressure sensor at AI-09
(INTERMEDIATE TEMPERATURE UNDER) *1 Lower limit alarm of intermediate temperature sensor at AI-10
COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT UNDER Lower limit alarm of compressor motor current sensor at AI-12
(LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE OVER) *2 Upper limit alarm of brine leaving temperature sensor at AI-14
LOW STAGE SLIDE VALVE POSITION OVER/UNDER Upper/lower limit alarm of low stage slide valve position sensor at AI-15
(HIGH STAGE SLIDE VALVE POSITION OVER/UNDER) *3 Upper/ lower limit alarm of high stage slide valve position sensor at AI-16
(CHILLER GAS TEMPERATURE 1 & 2 OVER/UNDER) *4 Lower limit alarm of chiller gas temperature sensor at AI-18 or AI-26
(CHILLER GAS PRESSURE 1 & 2 OVER / UNDER) *5 Lower limit alarm of chiller gas pressure sensor at AI-17 or AI-25
NOTE : Display and setting of each parenthesized item above is enabled according the option settings you make as follows.
*1 Enabled when any of the following is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’ screen:
ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR, COMPOUND-1 (1610 & 1612), COMPOUND-2 (2016 & HIGHER)
SINGLE J ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR, FM160 ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR
*2 Enabled when ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘CHILLER LEAVING TEMP. SENSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’
Screen.
*3 Enabled when ‘COMPOUND-2 (2016 & HIGHER)’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’
screen.
*4 Enabled when ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘CHILLER GAS TEMP. SENSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
*5 Enabled when ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘CHILLER GAS PRESS. SENSOR’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ’
screen.

- 85 -
QT1101-13
3.6 System Operations (Setting Method for Normal Operation)
(Control Summary ICON)
3.6.1 ‘CONTROL SUMMARY (1/2)’ Screen

(1) to ’SETPOINTS’ screen ((2)‘SCHEDULER’ screen）
(7) to ’HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen
(3) to ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen
(8) to ‘ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER SV’ screen
(4) to ‘VFD COMPRESSOR’ screen
(9) to ‘LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL’
(6) to ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ screen

(STARTING BYPASS）
(6) to ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ screen
(HOTGAS BYPASS）
(5) to ‘AUTO Vi’ screen

(6) to ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ screen (ANTI CYCLE)
The setting method for the normal operation will be described.

Control Summary (1/2) allows you to summarize , check and set below main set points.
(1) ‘SET POINTS’ It allows you to set the set points about the operations of each compressor.
(2) ‘SCHEDULER’ It allows you to set the operation schedule.
(3) ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ It allows you to set the parameter of the controller that controls capacity of the
compressor by the solenoid valve outputs.
(4) ‘VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ It allows you to set the parameter of the controller that controls rotational speed of the
compressor by the analog outputs.
(5) ‘AUTO Vi’ It allows you to set the parameter of the controller which controls capacity of the
compressor by the auto Vi control function.
(6) ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ It allows to set values for the restarting timer, the bypass control and the oil heater.
(7) ‘HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL’ It allows you to set the parameter of the controller that controls the high stage
capacity of the two-stage compressor.
(8) ‘ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER SV’ It allows you to set the parameter of the controller that controls the
economizer/intercooler.
(9) ‘LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL’ It allows you to set the parameter of the controller that controls the liquid injection oil
cooling.

- 86 -
QT1101-13
Items in’ OPERATION MODE’ Screen

Item Description
Select the operation control mode of the compressor unit(s) from the following options:
‘LOCAL’: Start/stop control of the compressor unit is performed using the

START/STOP switch on the touch panel.
‘REMOTE’: Start/stop control of the compressor unit is performed by ON/OFF of
external command through DI-16 (X0F).
‘COMM’: Start/stop control of the compressor unit(s) is performed by ON/OFF
commands (X140) from an external control device through communications.
OPERATION ‘AUTO STAGE’: Start/stop control of the compressor units is performed according the
commands sent from the master station for the AUTO STAGE. This mode is
selectable only when the AUTO STAGE control (option) is provided.
‘AUTO STAGE COMM’: Start/stop control of the compressor units is performed according the
commands(X140) sent by communication to the master station for the
AUTO STAGE.
‘AUTO STAGE REMOTE’: Start/stop control of the compressor units is performed according the
remote-start input (DI-16) to the master station for the AUTO STAGE.
(See 3.6.2.7 ‘AUTO STAGE’ Screen)
The setting for this item is necessary to enable or disable the automatic start/stop (CUT IN/CUT OUT)
control that takes place according to the settings made in the ‘SET POINTS’ screen (See 3.6.1.1 ‘SET
COMPRESSOR
POINTS’ Screen).
AUTO START/STOP
‘YES’: Automatic CUT IN/CUT OUT control is enabled.
‘NO’ : Automatic CUT IN/CUT OUT control is disabled.
The setting for this item is necessary to enable or disable manual operation on the digital ON/OFF
outputs for testing purposes. To be able to select ‘YES’, you must have selected ‘LOCAL’ for the
‘OPERATION’ item and ‘NO’ for the ‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item in the above.
D/O TEST
‘YES’: Manual operation is enabled.
OPERATION
‘NO’ : Manual operation is disabled.
NOTE:
About the manual ON/OFF control of the compressor, see 3.4.3.6 ‘DI/ STATUS’ screen
When D/O TEST OPERATION ' -> ' YES 'is selected, this item is displayed.
'AUTO' : oil pump is made automatic to running.
OIL.P MANUAL
'MANUAL : oil pump is run manually.
When it returns to 'AUTO' or ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’ -> "NO", the OIL PUMP output is turned off.
CAUTION
注意
According to the selection for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, the following conditions
are automatically executed when the STOP switch is pressed on the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH.
- When the ‘LOCAL’, ‘REMOTE’, or ‘COMM’ mode (except the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode) has been selected,
pressing the STOP switch causes no change to the operation control mode in the case of the ‘LOCAL’
mode. On the other hand, the mode automatically changes to ‘LOCAL’ in the case of the ‘REMOTE’ and
‘COMM’ modes. The compressor, if operating, will then stop after the pump-out sequence. (It remains
stopped thereafter.)
To restart the compressor, simply touch the START switch if you need not change the mode from ‘LOCAL’
to another, or turn ON the relevant operation control command after changing the mode from ‘LOCAL’ to the
desired mode.
- When the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode has been selected, pressing the STOP switch does not cause any change
to the setting for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, but the selection of ‘ENABLE’
you made for the ‘CONTROL’ item in the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen automatically changes to ‘DISABLE’.
In this case, if the compressor under control is running when the STOP switch is pressed, the compressor
will then stop after completing the pump-out sequence.
STAGE’ screen is consequently changed to ‘DISABLE’, the AUTO SATAGE control continues to work on all
the other stations (slave stations).
To recover the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode control after pressing the STOP switch, it is necessary (for the case of
the master station and the case of a slave station) to perform the steps below. (Simply pressing the START
switch on the station does not recover the AUTO SATGE control.)
1. From the ‘CONTROL SUMMARY’, open the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen.

- 87 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.1 ‘SET POINTS’ Screen
This window includes four sections (four sub-screens), entitled

‘SYSTEM START’, ‘MISCELLANEOUS’, ‘PUMP OUT’, and
‘SET POINTS’.
These sections allow you to make settings of parameters
related to
compressor operation.
‘SCHEDULLER’
Start icon
(Calendar）
Items in’ SET POINTS’ Screen

Sub-screen title Items Description
Set the delay time before start of the system after turning ON of the
SYSTEM START SYSTEM START DELAY
operation command for each of the operation control mode.
Set the delay before the “CUT IN” control is actually performed after a
CUT IN DELAY
rise exceeding the “CUT IN” value for the “CUT IN/OUT” control target.
Set the delay before the “CUT OUT” control is actually performed after a
CUT OUT DELAY drop exceeding the “CUT OUT” value for the “CUT IN/OUT” control
target.
Set the minimum low-stage capacity at which compressor operation

CUT OUT LSV%
command at DO-01 (Y00) turns OFF.
Set the delay before turning ON of oil pump start command at DO-02
OIL P. START DELAY
(Y01) after system startup.
Set the delay before turning ON of compressor operation command at

COMP. START DELAY DO-01 (Y00) after turning ON of oil pump start command at DO-02
(Y01).
Set the delay before the restart check sequence begins when the
COMP. RE-START DELAY compressor fails to start with the unloader slide valve at 5% or higher
MISCELLANEOUS position.
(Setting for start up)
Set the delay before the oil return solenoid valve at DO-09 (Y08) turns
OFF after turning OFF of compressor start command at DO-01 (Y00).
OIL FEED OFF DELAY
NOTE:
This item is displayed only when ‘PRE LUBE’ is selected for the ‘OIL
FEED TYPE’ item in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’ screen.
LAG OIL P. START dOP If 2-OIL PUMP is selected,

(Lagging oil pump start the lagging oil pump starts after 3 seconds of that oil differential
differential pressure) pressure becomes lower than the ‘LAG OIL P. START dOP’ set points.
If 2-OIL PUMP is selected

LAG OIL P. STOP DELAY
the lagging oil pump starts after the oil differential pressure becomes
(Lagging oil pump
lower than the ‘LAG OIL P. START dOP’ set points and the end of ‘LAG
stop delay time)
OIL P. STOP DELAY’ also.

- 88 -
QT1101-13
Items in ‘SET POINTS’ Screen (continued)

Sub-screen title Item description
YES: Enables a stop only when the low-stage capacity is 0% after
pump-out sequence.
CAPACITY 0% STOP
NO: Enables a stop even when the low-stage capacity is not 0% after
pump-out sequence.
Set the minimum delay before pump-out sequence terminates for when
suction pressure drops below the pump-out termination suction
MINIMUM DELAY pressure set for ‘PUMP OUT PRESS’ below.
NOTE: It should be under the condition,
‘MINIMUM DELAY’ <= ‘MAXIMUM DELAY’.
Set the maximum delay before pump-out sequence terminates for when
suction pressure remains above the pump-out termination suction
MAXIMUM DELAY pressure.
NOTE: It should be under the condition,
‘MAXIMUM DELAY’ >= ‘MINIMUM DELAY’ .
PUMP OUT PUMP OUT PRESS Set the suction pressure at which the pump-out sequence terminates.
(Settings for Set the low-stage capacity or rotational speed of the compressor during
PERCENTAGE
pump-out sequence) the pump-out sequence.
Set the delay time from start of pump-out sequence to fix capacity or
CAPACITY LOCK DELAY
rotational speed of compressor to PUMP OUT -> PERCENTAGE.
when "PUMP OUT" -> "CAPACITY 0% STOP" is "NO";
It is residual operation time of oil pump.
The oil pump is running in the maximum only at this set time at running
confirmation of compressor:OFF, and the capacity decrease operates.
This set time passes or the oil pump is stopped by 5% or less at the slide
valve position.
RESIDUAL OPERATION
when "PUMP OUT" -> "CAPACITY 0% STOP" is "YES";
It is residual operation time of compressor.
The compressor running is continued in the maximum only at this set
time when PUMP OUT ends, and the capacity decrease operates.
This set time passes or the compressor is stopped by 5% or less at the
slide valve position.
Set an operation starting value during automatic operation (a pressure
or temperature value according to the selection made for the
CUT IN SETPOINT
‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’
screen.)
Set a value for capacity control during operation (a pressure or
temperature value according to the selection made for the ‘CONTROL
TARGET (CAPACITY CONTROL)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’
SET POINTS
CONTROL PRESS. screen.)
NOTE:
The setting for this item is valid when the capacity control is set to
“AUTO”. (It is invalid for excluding “AUTO” capacity control.)
Set an operation stopping value during automatic operation (a pressure
or temperature value according to the selection made for the
CUT OUT SETPOINT
‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’
screen.)
NOTE:
In the ‘SET POINTS’ section, you can enter a specific value under each of the SET POINT numbers 1 to 4 (indicated as
‘SETPT #1’ to ‘SETPT #4’ on the screen). The entered values are associated with each SETPT numbers and the numbers can
be used for setting in the ‘SCHEDULER’ screen.
(The values under ‘COMM’ are the set values written from the remote station through communications. These values become
valid when ‘COMM’ is selected for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘CONTROL SUMMARY’ screen. These values cannot be
changed by the operation of the touch panel.)
In the ‘SCHEDULER’ screen, you specify any of numbers SETPT #1 to #4 in combination with the schedule patterns to
program a schedule for automatic operation control of the compressor so that the compressor can be operated at different
settings depending on the day of week and time zone in a day.

- 89 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.2 ‘SCHEDULER’ Screen

The ‘SCHEDULER’ screen includes a total of eight sub-screens:
‘SCHEDULER (ASSIGN DAYS)’ and ‘SCHEDULE 1’,
‘SCHEDULE 2’, ‘SCHEDULE 3’, ‘SCHEDULE 4’, ‘SCHEDULE
5’, ‘SCHEDULE 6’, and ‘SCHEDULE 7’.
(The last seven sub-screens present schedule patterns.)
By making entries in these sub-screens, you can program a
compressor operation schedule according which operation of
the compressor is controlled automatically.
During the programming, you select an appropriate one of the
numbers (SETPT #1 to #4) to which different pressure or
temperature settings are associated in the ‘SET POINTS’
screens for both automatic starting/stopping (CUT IN / CUT
OUT) control and automatic capacity control. After this, you allot
the selected number to each day of the week and each time of Schedule pattern
the day.
In these sub-screens, you can also make ALARM / FAILURE selection and assignment using one of the numbers (#1 and #2) to
which different warning points are associated in the ‘ALARM/FAILURE’ screens.
Items in’ SCHEDULER’ Screen

Sub-screen title Item Description
SUNDAY
to SATURDAY Assign one of the schedule pattern numbers (SCHEDULE1 to SCHEDULE7) to each
(Schedule number day of the week.
assignment)
If ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item in the

‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, MYPRO TOUCH makes automatic start/stop (CUT IN /
CUT OUT) control according to your selection from the following options:
SET POINT #1: Setting for ‘SETPT #1’ in ‘SET POINTS’ screen is always used.
CUT IN / CUT OUT
(CUT IN / CUT OUT
number selection)
SCHEDULER: ‘SETPT #1’ to ‘SETPT #4’ settings are used as you have
programmed for a scheduled automatic control.
SCHEDULER COMM: Settings written by the remote computer through communications
(ASSIGN are used.
DAYS) MYPRO TOUCH makes automatic capacity control of the compressor according to
your selection from the following options:
CONTROL TARGET SET POINT #2: Setting for ‘SETPT #2’ in ‘SET POINTS’ screen is always used.
(Capacity control SET POINT #3: Setting for ‘SETPT #3’ in ‘SET POINTS’ screen is always used.
number selection) SET POINT #4: Setting for ‘SETPT #4’ in ‘SET POINTS’ screen is always used.
SCHEDULER: ‘SET POINT #1’ to ‘SETPT #4’ settings are used as you have
programmed for a scheduled automatic control.
COMM: Settings written by the remote computer through communications
are used.
SET POINT #1: ALARM/FAILURE warning is issued based on the settings made for
ALARM/FAILURE
‘ALARM #1’ and ‘FAILURE #1’ in ‘ALARM/FAILURE’ screen.
(Alarm number
SET POINT #2: ALARM/FAILURE warning is issued based on the settings made for
selection)
‘ALARM #2’ and ‘FAILURE #2’ in ‘ALARM/FAILURE’ screen.

- 90 -
QT1101-13
Items in’ SCHEDULER’ Screen (continued)

Assign one of the ‘SETPT #1’ to ‘SETPT #4’ settings (made in the ‘SET
POINTS’ screen) to each of the schedule patterns ‘SCHEDULE 1’ to
‘SCHEDULE 7’. If ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR AUTO
SET# START/STOP’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, MYPRO TOUCH
(SET POINT# selection) makes both automatic start/stop (CUT IN / CUT OUT) and automatic
capacity control. MYPRO TOUCH controls them from the first ‘START’ time
to the ‘START’ time of the time segment (time span) specified below it
SCHEDULE 1 to 7 according to your set point assignment by a number (one of #1 to #4).
(Schedule patterns)
Divide a day into 8 time segments and enter the start time of each time
segment in hours and minutes to program a schedule for a day of the week.
(The end of the time segment is the ‘START’ time entered on the bottom
START line.) If ‘YES’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item
(Start time setting) in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, MYPRO TOUCH makes both automatic
start/stop (CUT IN / CUT OUT) and automatic capacity control from the first
‘START’ time according to your set point assignment by a number (one of #1
to #4).
NOTE:
- You cannot specify the same time for different ‘START’ times within the same ‘SCHEDULE’ number.
- If you divide a day into segments of smaller number than eight, set the same number in ‘SET #’ of two or more time segments.
(The same number is set for all ‘SET #’ by default.)
- Any set time must be earlier than that on the next lower line. Otherwise, time entries are not accepted.

- 91 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.3 ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen

This ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen allows you to control of the
compressor capacity by the capacity control solenoid valve using
[SP] or [DP] as the control target.
(Use PID 01/16)
The process value is displayed by touching ‘PV MONITOR’ switch at

the top right corner of the window. You are allowed to set them while
checking the process value.
This window can be switched to right and left by using right and left
switches of the ‘PV MONITOR’.
(the process value and the arithmetic value Actual are displayed in
gray)
Items in ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen
CONTROL TARGET Process value of the control target
CONTROL SET POINT Process value of the control target
PID OUT(MV)% Manipulating Value (MV) of the PID controller
L.SLIDE VALVE Current position of (low stage) capacity slide valve
Control action type

MANUAL : It allows to operate the capacity control solenoid valve by switching
operation of touch panel.(Switches are displayed)
AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the capacity depending on above control
targets.
CAPACITY REMOTE DIGITAL : Capacity increase/decrees solenoid valve turns ON/OFF by turning
CONTROL ON/OFF of the related digital inputs.
(MONITOR) REMOTE ANALOG : It allows to use the related analog inputs value as the MV of
capacity.
OPERATION COMM : It allows to use the related communication value as the MV of
capacity.
CAUTION
注意
[MANUAL] has been selected with OPERTION, and when CPU is reset
(Or, power supply OFF -> ON), it changes to [AUTO] automatically.
MVL% Manipulating Value Lower limit
STEP-1 to STEP-8 Capacity control steps
CAPACITY RAMP MVH% Manipulating Value Upper limit
CONTROL The set point of this item is the upper limit while the recordable (on the communication)
REMOTE MVH%
related coil is turning on.
MVL%/MVH% BY COMM Enable/disable of the set points writing on the communication
Control target dead band
It allows to set the dead band to avoid high-frequency adjustment (ON/OFF of a solenoid
DEAD BAND±
valves and etc.) The adjustment is invalid if the process value is in the range of SET
POINT ± DEAD BAND.
CAPACITY Controller proportional band set points
CONTROL PROPORTIONAL BAND If you set it smaller, the adjustment is performed earlier and the convergence takes time.
(SET POINTS) If you set it bigger, the adjustment is performed slowly and the convergence takes time.
Controller integral time set points
If you set it shorter, the adjustment is performed earlier and it becomes difficult to
INTEGRAL TIME
converge.
If you set it longer, the adjustment is performed slowly and the convergence takes time.

- 92 -
QT1101-13
Controller derivative time set points
If you set it shorter, the manipulating variable becomes smaller and the convergence
DERIVATIVE TIME
takes time. If you set it longer, the manipulating variable becomes bigger and it becomes
difficult to converge
Controller manual reset set points
MANUAL RESET (the manipulating variable for 0.0% of the deflection)
Set the input/output as "0" for I and D, the set point enables as the proportional action.
dMV LIMIT The control set points for the changing rate (%/second) of the controller manipulating value.
Forced unloading command outputs set points on the compressor motor current increasing.
HI MA UNLOAD
Issues unloading command if the compressor motor current >= the set points.
Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the compressor motor current
HI MA LOAD FORBID increasing.
Not issue loading command if the compressor motor current >= the set points.
Forced unloading command outputs set points on the discharge pressure raising.
HI DP UNLOAD
Issues unloading command if the discharge pressure >= the set points.
Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the discharge pressure raising.
HI DP LOAD FORBID
Not issue loading command if the discharge pressure >= the set points.
CAPACITY
CONTROL Forced unloading command outputs set points on the intermediate pressure raising.
(SET POINTS) HI IP UNLOAD Issues unloading command if the intermediate pressure >= the set points.
Limiter function (Depending on ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ setting, it will not be displayed.)
(mainly for overload
protection) Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the intermediate pressure raising.
HI IP LOAD FORBID Not issue loading command if the intermediate pressure >= the set points.
(Depending on ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ setting, it will not be displayed.)
Forced unloading command outputs set points on the suction pressure drop.
LO SP UNLOAD Issues unloading command if the suction pressure <= the set points.
(It is not for overload protection, is for suction pressure drop prevention.)
Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the suction pressure drop.
LO SP LOAD FORBID Not issue loading command if the suction pressure <= the set points.
CONTROL START Delay time from the compressor start to start of capacity control.
DELAY (To secure retention time of capacity 0%)
Manipulating value ((low stage)capacity)dead band

The response of the slide valve position to change in manipulating value improves if you
set a relatively small value for ‘MV (LSV) DEAD BAND’. However, the life of the digital
output device becomes shorter since the number of ON/OFF times to energize and
CAPACITY MV(LSV) DEAD BAND de-energize the solenoid valves becomes greater.
CONTROL In addition, if the slide valve must move quickly to meet the setting, not only the number
(SET POINTS) of the ON/OFF times to drive the loading and unloading solenoid valves increases, but
also these two valves alternately turn ON and OFF. As a result, it takes too long time
before their positions settle. In the worst case, their positions would never settle.
FORCE FULL LOAD Set the capacity loading ratio for “Forced capacity loading” on the communication.
If the control target is set as the leaving brain temperature (LBT),

the screen is right figure. (Use PID 02/16)
(‘CHILLER CONTROL’ option is needed)
The sub-screen of the ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen allows

you to make the following settings and displaying related to
the capacity control of the compressor.
- Setting for the basic capacity control items

- Setting for the unloader slide valve positioner
- Setting for the capacity control limiters
- displaying and setting of the upper limit at the start of the capacity control (‘CAPACITY RAMP CONTROL’)

- 93 -
QT1101-13
Setting in the ‘CAPACITY CONTROL (MONITOR)’ sub-screen

For the ‘OPERATION’ item, select appropriate one concerning determination of the capacity from the following options:
‘MANUAL’ The loading solenoid valve turns ON and OFF when you select MANUAL LOAD using touch panel
switches. The unloading solenoid valve turns ON and OFF when you select MANUAL UNLOAD .
‘AUTO’ MYPRO TOUCH automatically determines an appropriate compressor capacity according to the
pressures or temperatures of the control target.
‘REMOTE DIGITAL’ The loading and unloading solenoid valves turn ON/OFF as the relevant digital input turns ON/OFF.
* However, when VFD COMPRESSOR:USE is selected, The compressor rotational speed is fixed to
MVL% of VFD between ‘slide valve position < MVH%’ when compressor starting.
When the slide valve position is corresponding to MVH% once, the slide valve position is fixed.
ON/OFF of the corresponding digital input acts only on the rotational speed increase and decrease of
the compressor.
Moreover, the rotational speed is fixed when the compressor rotational speed decreases to MVL% of
VFD, and the loading and unloading solenoid valves are turned on and off again.
‘REMOTE ANALOG’ The value of the relevant analog input is used as the MV of capacity value.
‘COMM’ The value of the corresponding address by communication is used as the MV of capacity value.
Setting in the ‘CAPACITY CONTROL (SETPOINTS)’ sub-screen

Enter an appropriate value for the ‘MV (LSV) DEAD BAND’ item to adjust the positioner function of the low-stage slide valve.
If the difference between the setting for the capacity controller’s manipulating value ‘PID OUT (MV)%’ in the ‘CAPACITY
CONTROL (MONITOR)’ sub-screen and the current low-stage slide valve position ‘L. SLIDE VALVE’ exceeds the value for ‘MV
(LSV) DEAD BAND’, MYPRO TOUCH issues an loading and unloading command to drive each corresponding solenoid valves.
In general, the response of the slide valve position to change in manipulating value improves if you set a relatively small value for
‘MV (LSV) DEAD BAND’. However, the life of the digital output device becomes shorter since the number of ON/OFF times to
energize and de-energize the solenoid valves becomes greater. In addition, if the slide valve must move quickly to meet the
setting, not only the number of the ON/OFF times to drive the “increase” and “decrease” solenoid valves increases, but also
these two valves alternately turn ON and OFF. As a result, it takes too long time before their positions settle. In the worst case,
their positions would never settle.
MYPRO TOUCH uses the setting you make for the ‘CTRL START DELAY’ item in this sub-screen to allow the time for to keep
the capacity at 0 % for the period from the start of compressor operation to the time when the capacity control is started.
The setting for the ‘FORCE FULL LOAD’ item is used to adjust the time until a 100 % load is reached during the “forced 100 %
operation” implemented through communications.
The manipulating value of the capacity controller displayed in ‘PID OUT (MV) %’ starts increasing by the amount set for the
‘FORCE FULL LOAD’ item every second beginning with the value at the ON time of the corresponding coil (in which data are
written through communications). This means that the larger the set value, the shorter the time needed for the manipulating value
of the capacity controller to reach 100 %.
Settings in the ‘CAPACITY RAMP CONTROL’ sub-screen

MYPRO TOUCH uses time vales as well as capacity values (expressed in manipulating values (MV)) you have entered in
‘SEC’ and ‘%’ for each of the capacity control steps (‘STEP-1’ to ‘STEP-8’) in this sub-window in order to prevent the capacity
from going beyond the upper limit during the initial period of capacity control.
STEP-1 The lower limit of the capacity changes over the time you set for this STEP along the line connecting the
0.0 % point and the MVL % point. (“MVL” stands for “manipulating value low limit”.)
The upper limit of the capacity changes over the time you set for this STEP along the line connecting the
0.0 % point and the percentage point you set for STEP-1.
STEP-2 to STEP-8 The capacity lower limit remains at the MVL %.
The capacity upper limit changes over the time you set for each STEP along the line connecting the
percentage point of the preceding STEP and the percentage point of each STEP.
After STEP-8 The capacity lower limit remains at the MVL % for normal operation.

- 94 -
QT1101-13
The capacity upper limit remains at the MVH % (the same percentage as the one set for STEP-8) for normal
operation. (“MVH” stands for “manipulating value high limit”.)
Controller manipulating value

100.0%
MVH%:%-8
%-7
%-6
%-5
%-4
%-3
%-2
%-1
MVL%
0.0% Time
CTRL START SEC-1 SEC-2 SEC-3 SEC-4 SEC-5 SEC-6 SEC-7 SEC-8
Normal operation
DELAY
Compressor operation
Start of capacity control
confirmation (OFF -> ON)
You can set any percentage between 0.0 % and 100.0 % for all STEPs from STEP-1 to STEP-7. However, if you set percentages
smaller than MVL % for these STEPs, the ramp formed by the capacity upper limit may go below the MVL % line for a certain
period. The capacity lower limit in this period becomes 0.0 %, and MYPRO TOUCH confines the manipulating value (MV) of the
capacity controller within the shaded areas shown in the following diagram during this period.
Controller MV
Set %-( n+1)
Set %-( n-1)
MVL%
Set%-n
0.0 Time
SEC-(n-1) SEC-n SEC-(n+1) SEC-(n+2)
%
Even during STEP-1 to STEP-8, however, either the capacity control limiter may work in the same manner as for the normal
operation or the manipulating value (‘PID OUT (MV)’) may go beyond the shaded area while the compressor is in the
limited-capacity operation, 100 %-capacity operation, or pump-out operation.
The settings made in this sub-screen for the following two items are not displayed if the ‘VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ is
made valid. To display and make settings for them, use the ‘CAPACITY RAMP CONTROL’ sub-screen in the ‘VFD
COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ screen.
‘REMOTE MVH%’
The value set for this item is used as the capacity upper limit while the relevant communication-writable coil is in the ON state.
However, this function is invalid when any of the following conditions is met.
- ‘ENABLE’ is selected for ‘MVL%/MVH% BY COMM’
- ‘AUTO STAGE’ is selected for ‘OPERATION’.
- ‘REMOTE CAPACITY CONTROL’ is enabled.
- pump-out sequence is in progress in the compressor.
‘MVL%/MVH% BY COMM’
Select either ‘DISABLE’ or ‘ENABLE’ to make valid or invalid the function that allows using the two values (each stored in the
relevant two communication-writable registers) as ‘MVL%’ (capacity lower limit) and ‘MVH%’ (capacity upper limit),
respectively.

- 95 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.4 ‘VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ Screen

‘VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ screen allows you to control the
compressor rotational speed on VFD by analog outputs using the
suction pressure or discharge pressure as the control target.
(Use PID 11/16)
(VFD COMPRESSOR option is required.)
The process value window is displayed by touching ‘PV MONITOR’

switch at the top right corner of the window. You are allowed to set
them while checking the process value.
This screen can be switched to right and left by using right and left
(the process value and the arithmetic value are displayed in gray)
Items in ‘VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ Screen

CONTROL TARGET Process value of the control target
CONTROL SET POINT Set point of the control target
PID OUT(MV)% Manipulating value of the controller
L.SLIDE VALVE Current position of (low stage) capacity slide valve
Control action method

MANUAL : It allows to operate the rotational speed by switching operation of the
touch panel.(Switches will be displayed)
AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the rotational speed depending on above
control targets.
VFD
REMOTE DIGITAL : Rotational speed increase/decrees by turning ON/OFF of the related
COMPRESSOR
(MONITOR) digital inputs.
REMOTE ANALOG : Corresponding analog inputs value is used as the rotational speed.
OPERATION COMM : It allows to use the related communication value as the rotational speed.
CAUTION
注意
MVL% Manipulating Value Lower limit

STEP-1 to STEP-8 Capacity control steps
MVH% Manipulating Value Upper limit
RAMP CONTROL
The set point of this item is the upper limit of the rotational speed control while the recordable
REMOTE MVH%
related coil is turning on.
MVL/MVH% BY COMM Enable/disable of the set points writing on the communication

OUTPUT Process value monitor of actual analog output percentage
OUTPUT LIMIT Output prohibition band (the maximum is 3 points)
ZONE-1 to ZONE-3
Control revolutions output band to avoid the operation on the specific revolutions.

It allows to set the dead band to avoid high-frequency adjustment (ON/OFF of a solenoid
DEAD BAND±
valves and etc.)
The adjustment is invalid if the process value is in the range of SET POINT ± DEAD BAND.
VFD Controller proportional band set points
COMPRESSOR PROPORTIONAL
If you set it smaller, the adjustment is performed earlier and it becomes difficult to converge.
(SET POINTS) BAND
If you set it bigger, the adjustment is performed slowly and the convergence takes time.

INTEGRAL TIME If you set it shorter, the adjustment is performed earlier and it becomes difficult to converge.
If you set it longer, the adjustment is performed slowly and the convergence takes time.

- 96 -
QT1101-13
If you set it shorter, the manipulating value becomes smaller and the convergence takes time.
DERIVATIVE TIME
If you set it longer, the manipulating value becomes bigger and it becomes difficult to
converge

MANUAL RESET (the manipulating value for 0.0% of the deflection)
Set the input/output as "0" for I and D, the set point enables as the proportional action.
dMV LIMIT The control set points for the changing rate (%/second) of the controller manipulating value.
Sub—title screen Item Description

Forced unloading command outputs set points on the discharge pressure raising.
HI DP UNLOAD
It issues unloading command if the discharge pressure >= the set points.
Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the discharge pressure raising.
HI DP LOAD FORBID
It dose not issue loading command if the discharge pressure >= the set points.
Forced unloading command outputs set points on the intermediate pressure raising.
HI IP UNLOAD It issues unloading command if the intermediate pressure >= the set points.
(Depends on ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ setting, it will not be displayed.)
Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the intermediate pressure raising.
HI IP LOAD FORBID It does not issue loading command if the intermediate pressure >= the set points.
(Depending on ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ setting, it will not be displayed.)
VFD Forced unloading command outputs set points on the suction pressure drop.
COMPRESSOR LO SP UNLOAD It issues unloading command if the suction pressure <= the set points.
(SET POINTS) (It is not for overload protection, is for suction pressure drop prevention.)
Limiter function
Prohibited loading command outputs set points on the suction pressure drop.
(mainly for
LO SP LOAD FORBID It does not issue loading command if the suction pressure <= the set points.
overload
protection)
CTRL START DELAY Delay time of moving from slide value position control to revolutions control.
CTRL STOP DELAY Delay time of moving from revolutions control to slide value position control.
Except when OPERATION is REMOTE DIGITAL,
The ratio of "Compulsion rotational speed increase" by the communication is set.
FORCE FULL LOAD
When OPERATION is REMOTE DIGITAL,
Ratio is set the increase of "Compressor rotational speed" by the corresponding digital input.
Except when OPERATION is REMOTE DIGITAL,
The ratio of "Compulsion rotational speed decrease" by the limiter function.
FORCE UNLOAD
When OPERATION is REMOTE DIGITAL,
Ratio is set the decrease of "Compressor rotational speed" by the corresponding digital input.
The right figure will be displayed if you set the control target as
leaving brain temperature(LBT).
(USE PID 12/16 )
(VFD COMPRESSOR + CHILLER CONTROL option is
required)
Select and inputs as following instructed on ‘VFD

COMPRESSOR CONTROL’ screen to perform the capacity
control properly by variable frequency drive (VFD).
CAUTION
注意
Please set a setpoint appropriately on the inverter side
at the lowest rotational speed, the maximum speed, the
start frequency, the acceleration time, the deceleration
time, and analog input filter time constant, when the VFD
function is used.

- 97 -
QT1101-13
Settings in ‘VFD COMPRESSOR (MONITOR)’ sub-screen

On ‘OPERATION’, select an appropriate rotational speed control method from the following options:
‘MANUAL’ The rotational speed increases or decreases as you select ‘ MANUAL PLUS ’ or ‘ MANUAL MINUS ’.
‘AUTO’ MYPRO TOUCH automatically determines appropriate rotational speed according to the pressure or
temperature of the control target.
‘REMOTE DIGITAL’ The rotational speed increase/decrease as the relevant digital input turns ON/OFF.
* By ON/OFF of the corresponding contact input,
When the rotational speed is controlled, The rotational speed of the compressor increases and
decreases according to the FORCE FULL LOAD/UNLOAD setting.
‘REMOTE ANALOG’ The value of the relevant analog input is used as the MV of rotational speed.
‘COMM’ The value of the corresponding address by communication is used as the MV of rotational speed.
Settings in ‘VFD COMPRESSOR (SETPOINTS)’ sub-screen

As to the limiter functions to prevent overloading, the same method of setting as with the ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen
applies, except that the value set for ‘FORCE UNLOAD’ is used when a “forced decrease” condition occurs depending on the
‘UNLOAD’ set value. The manipulating value ‘PID OUT (MV) %’ of the revolution control regulator starts decreasing from the
time when the “forced decrease” condition is reached by the value set for ‘FORCE UNLOAD’ every second. This means that
the larger the set value, the shorter the time taken for reducing the manipulating value of the evolution control regulator.
The value set for ‘VFD START DELAY’ is used as the allowance period for confirming the transfer of control from the slide
valve position control to the revolutions control after the unloader slide valve has reached the ‘MVH%’ position. On the other
hand, the value set for ‘VFD STOP DELAY’ is used when transferring the capacity control by the slide valve position control
after reaching to ‘MVL%’ of the manipulating value of the revolution control regulator ‘PID OUT (MV) %’ .
As to the settings for ‘FORCE FULL LOAD’ and ‘CAPACITY RAMP CONTROL’, it is the same explanation as with the
‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen.
Settings for ‘OUTPUT LIMIT’ sub-screen

MYPRO TOUCH uses the ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’ values of the output prohibition zones ‘ZONE-1’ to ‘ZONE-3’ for the purpose of
limiting the revolutions output zones. Analog output
100%
The revolution output zone limiting function works to HIGH

ZONE-3
Path followed
make the analog output corresponding to the ‘VFD LOW
when increasing
COMPRESSOR CONTROL PID OUT’ output change HIGH the speed
ZONE-2
following the paths shown right. LOW
Path followed
If the ‘LOW’ and ‘HIGH’ values are different in the same HIGH when decreasing
ZONE-1 the speed
zone, a step-like path results. If they are the same, a LOW
linear path results. 0%
0% 100%
(This function is defaulted as “disabled”.) PID OUT (MV) %
LOW HIGH LOW HIGH LOW HIGH
ZONE-1 ZONE-2 ZONE-3
[ Outline of starting operation ~ VFD control~Stopping operation ]
The compressor starts under the condition of that the pressure >= operation pressure set points.
The position of the slide valve changes to MVL% from 0%, revolutions outputs change to MVL% from 0%.
During the operation, slide valve control (position control by the pressure) is performed first with fixing revolutions output as MVL% under the
condition that pressure > the target set point. Then manipulating value is fixed at MVH% when it becomes the value from MVL% to MVH%
after slide valve control.
After the period of ‘VFD START DELAY’, revolutions control (revolutions output by the pressure) is performed between the range of MVL%
and MVH%.
If the pressure < the target pressure set point, revolutions control is performed first with fixing revolutions as MVH%. Then manipulating value
is fixed as MVL% when it becomes the value MVL%. After the period of ‘VFD START DELAY’, slide valve control is performed between the
range of MVL% and MVH%.
If the pressure <= the stop pressure set point, slide valve decrease its capacity with fixing revolutions output as MVL% and tries to fix the slide
valve position as 0%. After making sure the slide valve position is 0%, it is stopped.
(When the liquid is collected, it depends on setting of liquid collection operation setting such as pump-out capacity (PERCENTAGE).)
You are allowed to operate it again (continue) before dead stop and with satisfied condition (again), even above stop conditions are met once.

- 98 -
QT1101-13
About using of 'Capacity control' and 'Rotational speed control' of the compressor together
In MYPRO TOUCH, about the capacity control and the rotational speed control of the compressor, it controls as follows.
- 'Slide valve position control' -> setting of 'CAPACITY CONTROL'
- 'Rotational speed control' -> setting of 'VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL'
Combination of
'CAPACITY CONTROL' – 'VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL' 'MANUAL' "Manual Operation" by the switch on the touch
VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL panel screen
REMOTE REMOTE 'AUTO' "Automatic Control" by the set value of the
MANUAL AUTO COMM
DIGITAL ANALOG
controller
MANUAL X (2) X X X 'REMOTE DIGITAL' "Remote Control" by the Digital input
CAPACITY CONTROL
AUTO (3) (4) X (4) (4) 'REMOTE ANALOG' "Remote Control" by the Analog input
'COMM' "Remote Control" by the set value via
REMOTE
X X (5) X X communication
DIGITAL
REMOTE
X X X X X
ANALOG
COMM X X X X X
(Attention) "X" cannot be selected.

'OPERATION' of 'CAPACITY CONTROL' cannot be changed to 'REMOTE ANALOG' or 'COMM'.
On the other hand, when 'REMOTE DIGITAL' is selected by 'OPERATION' of 'CAPACITY CONTROL' or 'VFD
COMPRESSOR COTROL', it is changed to 'REMOTE DIGITAL'. At this time, when either is changed, it
becomes AUTO on the other hand.
When "X" is selected when the case is other, it is changed to 'AUTO' to select it previously.
Operation at combination of 'CAPACITY CONTROL' – 'VFD COMRESSOR CONTROL'

(1) 'AUTO' – 'AUTO'
When the slide valve position becomes MVH% or more by 'Slide valve control', it shifts to 'Rotational speed control'.
When the rotational speed output becomes MVL% or less by 'Rotational speed control', it shifts to 'Slide valve control'.
(2) 'MANUAL' – 'AUTO'
'Slide valve control' : Capacity "Increase"/"Decrease" solenoid valves can be operated with the touch panel.
When the slide valve position becomes MVH% or more, 'Rotational speed control' is begun.
(The solenoid valve operation is effective while it is 'VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL'.)
When the rotational speed output becomes MVL% or less by 'Rotational speed control', it shifts to 'Slide valve control'.
(3) 'AUTO' – 'MANUAL'
The slide valve position is controlled by 'Slide valve control'.
The rotational speed output can be increased and decreased with the touch panel.
(The rotational speed operation is effective while it is 'Slide valve control'.)
(4) 'AUTO' – 'REMOTE ANALOG' or 'COMM'
The slide valve position increases according to FORCE FULL LOAD setting value of 'CAPACITY CONTROL' side, and
becomes MVH%. (Operation is different from usual 'AUTO'. )
When the slide valve position becomes MVH% or more, it shifts to 'Rotational speed control'.
('Rotational speed control' is continued at the following.
The analog input or the setting according to the communication are effective even to the beginning of pump out.)
(5) 'REMOTE DIGITAL' – 'REMOTE DIGITAL'
During 'Slide valve control', When DI-31 is turned on, a capacity "Increase" solenoid valve is turned on.
When DI-32 is turned on, a capacity "Decrease" solenoid valve is turned on.
When the slide valve position becomes MVH% or more, it shifts to 'Rotational speed control'.
On 'Rotational speed control', it The rotational speed output :
When DI-31 is turned on, it increases by FORCE FULL LOAD setting value of 'VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL' side.
When DI-32 is turned on, it decreases by FORCE UNLOAD setting value of 'VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL' side.
When the rotational speed output becomes MVL% or less, it shifts to 'Slide valve control'.

- 99 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.5 ‘AUTO Vi’ Screen

‘AUTO Vi’ screen allows you to control the compressor capacity on the auto Vi control function.
(’VARIABLE Vi or SINGLE J’ option is required.)
This is brief description of Auto-Vi.

- Vi control consists of a combination of below 7 solenoid valves.
MPLD (Vi M-Port Load SV), MPUL (Vi M-Port Unload SV)
ViBP (Vi Bypass SV), L->H (Vi L->H SV), H->L (Vi H->L SV),
LOAD (low stage capacity loading SV), UNLD (low stage capacity unloading SV)
Above 7 solenoid valves control the Vi slide valve position at 3 stages (2.63(L port), 3.65(M port), 5.80(H port)
- Vi slide valve moves to Vi position that is set on ‘Initial Vi Position’ when the compressor starts.
- Vi slide valve moves to new position by set ‘Move Delay’ time with operating of the required solenoid valves.
- Capacity slide valve is fixed its movement by capacity slide bypass slide valve during Vi slide valve operation.
- Vi slide valve does not work during the operation of capacity limit control, such as HI MA UNLOAD, HI DP UNLOAD.,.
- Required variable for Vi control are suction pressure, discharge pressure and k value of the selected refrigerant (adiabatic
exponent).
- Pressure ratio of suction pressure and discharge pressure is calculated by the set time on ‘Sample Delay’. Vi position is
moved when Sample count reaches to ‘Sample Quantity’ according to comparison with k-th power of Vi and the calculated
pressure ration and discriminant of following paragraph.
(Comparison with calculation value of “(DP/IP) ^ (1/k) * 1.375” in case of J Economizer W/ Sensor)
- There are Vi fixed mode and Vi variable mode.
- Capacity slide valve needs analog adjustment of slid valve on Calibration after selecting Auto-Vi Control on System
Configuration. (there are 0% calibration and 100% calibrations on the three positions(H,M,L port).)
(J series adjusts 0% per two position of H and L and 100%.)
(1) H port: 0% (4) L port: 100%

(Movement range of capacity slide valve is small (Movement range of capacity slide valve is big
→pressure ratio is big.) →pressure ratio is small.)
(2)H port: 100% (5) L port: 0%

(Movement range of capacity slid valve is small (Movement range of capacity slid valve is big
→pressure ratio is big.) →pressure ratio is small.)
(容量スライド弁の動作幅は狭い→圧縮比は大きい） (容量スライド弁の動作幅は広い→圧縮比は小さい）
(3)H port: 100%

(Movement range of capacity slid valve is middle→
pressure ratio is middle also.)
(J series cannot be adjusted.)

- 100 -
QT1101-13
This screen (consists of two sub-screens) allows you to set parameter which is relevant to auto Vi control function (option).
Depending on the selection on ’ SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen, optional extension digital input/output board is required to
use the auto Vi control function.(Extension DI/O board is required when ‘USE DO10, 11, 12, 16, 17 (UD-V)’ or ‘USE DO19, 1A,
1B, 1C, 1D(UD-V)’ is selected on ‘AUTO Vi CONTROL’ item of the same screen.)
These sub-screens are displayed when one of ‘SINGLE J’,

‘SINGLE J ECONOMIZER W/O SENSOR’, ‘SINGLE J
ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR’, and ‘SINGLE UD-V (VARIABLE
Vi)’ is selected for ‘COMPRESSOR’ items in ‘SYSTEM SETUP’
screens.
Items in ‘AUTO Vi’ Screen

Screen title Item Description
It indicates the Vi value of the unloader slide valve in currently selected
AUTO Vi CONTROL CURRENT Vi
port position. ”O” is displayed during stoppage of the compressor.
(MONITOR)
CALCULATED Vi It indicates the current calculated Vi value
Select one of the following as the port from which automatic Vi control is
started.
INITIAL Vi 2.63(L) or 2.50(L) *: L port
3.65(M) or 3.50(M) *: M port
5.80(H) or 5.00(H) *: H port
Set the frequency (time) at which sampling is made to determine the

SAMPLE DELAY
need for port switching.
AUTO Vi CONTROL
(SETPOINT) SAMPLE QUANTITY Set the number of samples for determining the need for port switching.
*
(Displaying CONFIRM DELAY Set the delay before confirmation of the port position.
set points) MOVE DELAY Set the delay before switching of port.
Select Vi mode as fixed or Auto.
* 2.63(L) or 2.50(L) : L port fixed
3.65(M) or 3.50(M) : M port fixed
* 5.80(H) or 5.00(H) : H port fixed
CONTROL
AUTO-Vi : Auto Vi control(Auto Vi mode)
The control begins from L port position when starting even if it is a fixed
mode.
NOTE:
The items and options marked * are displayed when ‘SINGLE J’, ‘SINGLE J ECONOMIZER W/O SENSOR’, or ‘SINGLE J
ECONOMIZER W/ SENSOR’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR’ item on the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen. They are
not displayed if ‘SINGLE UD-V (VARIABLE Vi)’ is selected.

- 101 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.6 ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ Screen

This screen consists of these three sub-screens ‘ANTI CYCLE’,
‘OIL HEATER’ and ‘OIL DRAIN SV’. They allow you to set the
anti-cycle timer and other parameters for optional functions.
The process value window is displayed by touching ‘PV

MONITOR’ switch at the top right corner of the window. You are
allowed to set items while checking the process value.
This screen can be switched to right and left by using right and
left switches of the ‘PV MONITOR’.
(the process value and the arithmetic value Actual are
displayed in gray)
NOTE : The displayed items may be different from those shown
above depending on the setting.
Items in ‘OTHER SETPOINT’ Screen

Set the time after start of the compressor operation during which
ANTI CYCLE TIME
*1 the start for the next operation is prohibited. (This limits the
ANTI CYCLE (Restart prohibition time)
number of start/stop times in a unit time.)
(Anti repeat)
INTERVAL TIME Set the time from the end of a compressor operation to the start
(Operation-to-operation) of the next operation. (This limits the stop-to-start interval.)
HEATER ON OS Set an oil separator temperature at which OIL HEATER output at
OIL HEATER
*2 (Oil heater ON temperature) DO-07 (Y06) turns ON.
(Oil heater control) HEATER OFF OS Set an oil separator temperature at which OIL HEATER signal at
(Oil heater OFF temperature) DO-07 (Y06) turns OFF.
*3 Set the delay before OIL DRAIN SV signal at DO-09 (Y08) turns
OIL DRAIN SV SV OFF DELAY
OFF after turning OFF of compressor operation command at
(Oil drain SV OFF delay)
DO-01 (Y00).
*5
STARTING BYPASS SV SV OFF DELAY Set the delay before the start bypass solenoid valve is OFF after
(Delay time) operation confirmation input at DI-12 (XOB) turns ON.
SV ON LSV% Set the low-stage capacity at which the hot gas bypass solenoid
(Capacity) valve turns ON.
SV OFF LSV% Set the low-stage capacity at which the hot gas bypass solenoid
(Capacity) valve turns OFF.
*6
HOT GAS BYPASS SV SV ON DELAY (LSV%) Set the delay before the hot gas bypass solenoid valve turns ON
(Delay before SV turns ON) after the low-stage capacity has reached the set value.
SV ON SP Set the suction pressure at which the hot gas bypass solenoid
(Suction Pressure) valve turns ON.
SV ON DELAY (SP) Set the delay before the hot gas bypass solenoid valve turns ON
(Delay time) after the suction pressure has reached the set value.
START SP The oil pump starts if the suction pressure >= START SP (fixed
(starting suction pressure) value) when AUTO LUBE is selected on OIL FEED TYPE.
STOP SP The oil pump stops if the suction pressure <= STOP SP (fixed
OIL PUMP START dP (stopping suction pressure) value) when AUTO LUBE is selected on OIL FEED TYPE.
(Oil pump starting differential
pressure) START dP The oil pump starts if the differential pressure <= START dP (fixed
(starting differential pressure) value) when AUTO LUBE is selected on OIL FEED TYPE.
STOP dP The oil pump stops if the differential pressure >= STOP dP when
(stopping differential pressure) AUTO LUBE is selected on OIL FEED TYPE.
START Set the delay before the oil return solenoid valve is ON after
OIL RETURN SV (delay time of SV-open) operation confirmation input at DI-12 (XOB) turns ON.
OPEN DELAY STOP Set the delay before the start bypass solenoid valve is OFF after
(delay time of SV-close) operation confirmation input at DI-12 (XOB) turns OFF.

- 102 -
QT1101-13
Items in’ OTHER SETPOINT’ Screen (continued)

Select either of the following options concerning “intermittent

INTERVAL operation” of the oil pump.
(Intermittent operation) DISABLE (Intermittent operation disabled)
ENABLE (Intermittent operation enabled)
Select either of the following options in which intermittent
operation of the oil pump is to be enabled.
AUTO ONLY : Enabled only when ‘YES’ is selected for the
AUTO ONLY/ALL
‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item.
(Operation mode subjected to
ALL : Enabled only when ‘NO’ is selected for the
oil pump intermittent
‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item.
operation)
NOTE: Setting for this item is valid only when ‘ENABLE’ is
selected for the ‘INTERVAL’ item.
Set the interval of the oil pump intermittent operation.
(The intermittent operation takes place when the count of
*4 START PERIOD
SEAL PROTECTION compressor non-operation time is longer than the time set here.)
(Oil pump intermittent
(Oil pump operation for operation set point)
protecting oil seals) NOTE: Setting for this item is valid only when ‘ENABLE’ is
selected for the ‘INTERVAL’ item.
Set the length of running time for each “intermittent operation” of
PUMP RUN the oil pump.
(Oil pump running time set
point) NOTE: Setting for this item is valid only when ‘ENABLE’ is
selected for the ‘INTERVAL’ item in the above.
Select either of the following options to determine whether to
COMP. STOP allow or not a delay before start of the oil pump after stopping of
(Operation of oil pump after the compressor.
stop of compressor) DISABLE: Delay is not allowed.
ENABLE: Delay is allowed.
Set the delay before the oil pump stops after turning OFF of the
OIL PUMP DELAY compressor operation command at DO-01(YOO).
(The delay of oil pump
stopping time) NOTE : Setting for this item is valid only when ‘ENABLE’ is
selected for the ‘COMP. STOP’ item in the above.
NOTE:
*1 Any settings for ‘ANTI CYCLE’ are invalid if, in the ‘CONTROL SUMMARY’ screen, ‘LOCAL’ is selected for the
‘OPERATION’ item and ‘NO’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP’ item.
*2 Display of and setting for the items in the ‘OIL HEATER’ sub-screen is possible only when ‘NORTH AMERICA’ is selected
for the ‘I/O PLATFORM’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
*3 Display of and setting for the item in the ‘OIL DRAIN SV’ sub-screen is possible only when ‘NORTH AMERICA’ is selected
for the ‘I/O PLATFORM’ item and ‘COMPOUND-2 (2016 & HIGHER)’ is selected for the ‘COMPRESSOR’ item, both in the
‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
*4 Display of and setting for the items in the ‘SEAL PROTECTION’ sub-screen possible only when ‘USE’ is selected for the
‘COMPRESSOR OIL SEAL PROTECTION’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
*5 Display of and setting for the item in the ‘STARTING BYPASS SV’ sub-screen is possible only when ‘USE’ is selected for the
‘STARTING BYPASS CONTROL’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
*6 Display of and setting for the items in the ‘HOT GAS BYPASS SV’ sub-screen is possible only when ‘USE’ is selected for the
‘HOT GAS BYPASS CONTROL’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
The hot gas bypass solenoid valve turns ON when the following conditions are concurrently met during operation of the
compressor:
- The capacity <= the value set for ‘SV ON LSV%’ is kept for the period set for ‘SV ON DELAY (LSV %)’.
- The suction pressure <= the value set for ‘SV ON SP’ is kept for the period set for ‘SV ON DELAY (SP)’.
The hot gas bypass solenoid valve turns OFF when the capacity becomes equal to or larger than the value set for ‘SV OFF
LSV%’.

- 103 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.7 ‘HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen
‘HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen allows you to control

the compressor high-stage capacity by the capacity control solenoid
valve outputs, as intermediate pressure (IP) is target control.
(Use PID 10/16)
(HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL option is required.)
The process value screen is displayed by touching ‘PV MONITOR’

switch at the top right corner of the window. You are allowed to set
items while checking the process value.
This screen can be switched to right and left by using right and left
Items in ‘HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL’ Screen

Sub screen title Item Description
INTERMEDIATE PRESS. Process Value(PV) of the intermediate pressure (control target)
PID OUT(MV)% Manipulating value(MV) of the PID controller
H.SLIDE VALVE Current position of (high stage) capacity slide valve
MANUAL : It allows to operate the high stage capacity control solenoid
HIGH STAGE valve by switching operation of touch panel.
CAPACITY AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the high stage capacity depending on
CONTROL above control targets.
(MONITOR)
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
It allows to set the dead band to avoid high-frequency adjustment (ON/OFF of a
DEAD BAND± solenoid valves and etc.)
The adjustment is invalid if the PV is in the range of SET POINT ± DEAD BAND.
Controller proportional band set points
If you set it smaller, the adjustment is performed earlier and it becomes difficult to
PROPORTIONAL BAND converge.
If you set it bigger, the adjustment is performed slowly and the convergence takes
time.
If you set it shorter, the adjustment is performed earlier and it becomes difficult to
HIGH STAGE INTEGRAL TIME converge.
CAPACITY If you set it longer, the adjustment is performed slowly and the convergence takes
time.
CONTROL
(SET POINTS)
DERIVATIVE TIME If you set it shorter, the MV becomes smaller and the convergence takes time.
If you set it longer, the MV becomes bigger and it becomes difficult to converge
Controller manual reset set points (the MV for 0.0% of the deflection)
MANUAL RESET Set the input/output as "0", the set point enables as the proportional action.
dMV LIMIT The control set points for the changing rate (%/second) of the controller MV.
MVL % Manipulating Value lower limit
MVH % Manipulating Value upper limit
Manipulating Value(high stage capacity) dead band
MV(HSV) DEAD BAND
See “Capacity control controller” for the detail.

- 104 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.8 ‘ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER SV’ Screen

‘ECNOMIZER/ INTERCOOLER SV’ screen allows you to
control the expansion valve opening position by economizer/
intercooler YOSAKU expansion valve outputs or analog outputs
using intermediate superheat (ISH) as the target control.
(Use PID 06/16)
(ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER EXPANSION VALVE
CONTROL option is required.)
The process value screen is displayed by touching ‘PV

(The process value and the arithmetic value are displayed in gray.)
Items in’ ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER CONTROL’ Screen

Sub-title Item Description
INTER. SUPERHEAT Process value of the intermediate superheat (control target)
PID OUT(MV)% Manipulating value of the PID controller
MANUAL : It allows to operate the expansion valve opening position by
switching operation of touch panel.
ECONO.
AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the expansion valve opening position
EXP.VALVE
depending on above control targets.
CONTROL
(MONITOR)
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
DEAD BAND± Control target dead band
PROPORTIONAL BAND Controller proportional band set points
INTEGRAL TIME Controller integral time set points
DERIVATIVE TIME Controller derivative time set points
ECONO.
EXP.VALVE Controller manual reset set points (the MV for 0.0% of the deflection)
MANUAL RESET
CONTROL Set the input/output as "0", the set point enables as the proportional action.
(SET POINTS)
MVL %, MVH % Manipulating Value Lower limit , Upper limit
SLOW OPEN Adjust to 100 % within a set time.
CONTROL CYCLE Yosaku Control cycle
SV ON LSV% LSV% for economizer/intercooler liquid supply SV turning on (open).
ECONOMIZER SV OFF LSV% LSV% for economizer/intercooler liquid supply SV turning off (close).
/INTERCOOLER
SV SV ON SP SP for economizer/intercooler liquid supply SV turning on (open).
SV OFF SP SP for economizer/intercooler liquid supply SV turning off (close).
The right screen is display if you select “no-sensor” for

Economize specification, because it only controls liquid supply
solenoid valves. (Expansion valve control is not performed.)

- 105 -
QT1101-13
3.6.1.9 ‘LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL’ Screen
‘LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL’ screen allows you to control

the oil cooler by liquid injection YOSAKU expansion valve
outputs or analog outputs using discharge temperature (DT) or
discharge superheat (DSH) as the target control.
(Use PID 07/16)
(LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL option is required.)

(The process value and the arithmetic value are displayed in
gray.)
Items in ‘LIQUID INJECTION OIL COOLING’ Screen

DISCHARGE
TEMPERATURE
Process values of discharge temperature or discharge superheat temperature
or
(control target).
DISCHARGE
SUPERHEAT
LIQUID
MANUAL : It allows to operate the expansion valve opening position by
INJECTION
switching operation of touch panel.
CONTROL
AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the expansion valve opening position
(MONITOR)
depending on above control targets.
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
LIQUID MANUAL RESET (the manipulating value for 0.0% of the deflection)
INJECTION Set the input/output as "0", the set point enables as the proportional action.
CONTROL
(SET POINTS) The control set points for the changing rate (%/second) of the controller
dMV LIMIT
manipulating value.
LIQUID SV ON OT Oil feed temperature for liquid injection liquid supply SV turning on (open).
INJECTION SV SV OFF OT Oil feed temperature for liquid injection liquid supply SV turning off (close).

- 106 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2 ‘CONTROL SUMMARY (2/2)’ Screen

To ‘OTHER SETPOINTS’ screen ( refer to preceding
section）
(SEAL PROTECTION）
(5) to ‘EXPANSION VALVE (LBT) CONTROL’ screen
(6) to ‘LEVEL CONTROL’ screen
(8) to’ CONDENSER CONTROL’ screens
(7) to ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen

(8)‘COMMUNICATION’ screen）
(9) to ‘VFD SETUP’ screen
(2) to’ Chiller LBT CONTROL’ screens
(3)to’ EXPANSION VALVE (SH) CONTROL’ screens

(to’ EXPANSION VALVE(SSH2) CONTROL’ screen）
(4) to ‘EXPPANSION VALVE (SP) CONTROL’ screen

(to ‘EXPANSION VALVE(CGP2) CONTROL’ screen）
The setting method for the normal operation will be described.

Control Summary (2/2) allows you to summarize, check and set below main set points.
(1) ‘CONDENSER CONTROL’ It allows you to set parameter of the controller, which controls condenser fan
revolutions.
(2) ‘CHILLER LBT CONTROL’ It allows you to set parameter of the controller, which controls chiller flowing.
(3) ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SSH) CONTROL’ It allows you to set the controller (suction superheat), which controls
evaporator YOSAKU expansion valve-1.
‘EXPANSION VALVE (SSH2) CONTROL’ It allows you to set the controller (suction superheat 2), which controls
evaporator YOSAKU expansion valve-2.
(4) ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SP) CONTROL’ It allows you to set the controller (suction pressure), which controls evaporator
YOSAKU expansion valve-1.
‘EXPANSION VALVE (CGP2) CONTROL’ It allows you to set the controller (chiller gas outlet pressure 2), which
controls evaporator YOSAKU expansion valve-2.
(5) ‘EXPANSION VALVE (LBT) CONTROL’ It allows you to set the controller (chiller leaving brine temperature), which
controls evaporator YOSAKU expansion valve.
(6) ‘LEVEL CONTROL’ It allows you to set parameter of the controller, which controls the chiller liquid
level.
(7) ‘AUTO STAGE’ It allows you to set the parameter that controls the AUTO STAGE (number
control).
(8) ‘COMMUNICATION SETUP’ It allows you to set the communication port for the AUTO STAGE.
(9) ‘VFD SETUP’ It allows you to set the number of revolution display of the VFD.

- 107 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.1 ‘CONDENSER CONTROL’ Screen
‘CONDENSER CONTROL’ screen allows you to control the

revolutions or stage of the condenser fan by the fan operating
outputs or analog outputs using local discharge pressure (DP)
or system discharge pressure (SDP) as the target control.
(Use PID 09/16 )
(CONDENSOR VFD or STEPS CONTROL option is required.)

(the process value and the arithmetic value are displayed in
gray)
Items in’ CONDENSER CONTROL’ Screen

LOCAL DIS. PRESS. Process value of Local discharge pressure or system discharge pressure
SYSTEM DIS. PRESS. (control target)
SET POINT SELECT Select set point#1 or #2.
MANUAL : It allows to operate the revolutions or stage of the condenser
CONDENSER fan by switching operation of touch panel.
CONTROL AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the revolutions or stage of the
(MONITOR) condenser fan depending on above control targets.
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
CONDENSER MANUAL RESET (the manipulating value for 0.0% of the deflection)
CONTROL Set the input/output as "0", the set point enables as the proportional action.
(SET POINTS)
The control set points for the changing rate (%/second)of the controller
dMV LIMIT
manipulating value.
START #1 Starting pressure set point for the first condenser.
STOP Stopping pressure set point for the first condenser
CONDENSER START #2 Starting pressure set point for the first and second condensers.
CONTROL
(SET POINTS)*1 STOP Stopping pressure set point for the first and second condensers.
START #3 Starting pressure set point for three condensers from first to third.
STOP Stopping pressure set point for three condensers from first to third..
*1 You are allowed to set the set points of stage of the condenser on ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.

- 108 -
QT1101-13
When an optional digital input/output board (at DO 25 (Y18) – DO 30 (Y1D)) and an optional analog output board (when “disable”
is not selected for ‘CONDENSER VFD CONTROL’ (see Section 4.4))are installed, MYPRO TOUCH makes the number and
revolutions controls on the condenser fans or pumps using the discharge pressure as the control target. Then MYPRO TOUCH
displays the states on the screen of this sub-screen. (However, this function does not work unless one of the following factory
options is enabled ‘CONDENSER VFD CONTROL’ (VFD ONLY, VFD + 2 STEPS, VFD + 3 STEPS, or VFD + 5 STEPS),
‘CONDENSER 3 STEPS CONTROL’, and ‘CONDENSER 6 STEPS CONTROL’.)
This control works when you make selections for the three items in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen as follows.
- Select ‘USE’ for the ‘CONDENSER CONTROL’ item to enable this control.
- Select ‘LOCAL’ or ‘SYSTEM DISCHARGE PRESSURE’ for the ‘CONDENSER CONTROL TARGET’ item as the control
target.
- Select ‘ON/OFF SINGLE SET’ or ‘ON/OFF MULTI SET’ for the ‘CONDENSER CONTROL METHOD’ item as the control
method. (When ‘ON/OFF SINGLE SET’ is selected, the start/stop control is made using one set of start and stop values to
control the number of operating condenser fans or pumps. Selection of ‘ON/OFF MULTI SET’ allows using different start/stop
values for individual fans or pumps. If ‘VFD ONLY’ is selected as the factory option, the number control of operating fans or
pumps is not implemented, so ‘ON/OFF MULTI SET’ is selected invariably.)
The following examples show the ‘CONDENSER CONTROL’ screen displays appearing under different conditions.
When ‘VFD CONTROL ONLY’ is selected.
When ‘ON/OFF SINGLE SET’ is selected on the option “VFD + # STEPS CONTROL”.
‘VFD LAG/VFD LEAD’ Select VFD LAG (last ON) or LEAD

(first ON) for DO 25:Y18 channel.
Different control set value can also
be used for LAG and LEAD.
‘START’ Set pressure for increasing the
number of units’ control.
‘STOP’ Set pressure for decreasing the
‘CYCLE TIME’ Set cycle for checking whether to
increase or decrease the number of
units.

- 109 -
QT1101-13
When ‘ON/OFF MULTI SET’ is selected on the “VFD + # STEPS CONTROL”.
‘SET POINT SELECT’ Select ‘SET POINT #1’ or ‘SET

POINT #2’ when using a pair of two
different set points (one pair
associated to #1 and the other
associated to #2) by switching
between them.
‘START #1 to #6’ Operating set pressure for each of
digital outputs DO 25 (Y18) to DO
30(Y1D).
‘STOP’ Stopping set pressure for each of
30(Y1D).
NOTE:
Depending on the enabled factory option, the ‘START’ and ‘STOP’
set pressures displayed are different as follows:
Factory option ‘START’ and ‘STOP’ set pressures displayed
VFD ONLY #1
VFD + 2 STEPS #1 to #3
VFD + 3 STEPS #1 to #4
When ‘ON/OFF SINGLE SET’ is selected on the “3 STEPS” or “6 STEPS’ CONTROL”.
‘START’ Set pressure for increasing the

‘STOP’ Set pressure for decreasing the
‘CYCLE TIME’ Set cycle for checking whether to
increase or decrease the number of
units.
When ‘ON/OFF MULTI SET’ is selected on the “6 STEPS CONTROL”. ‘
‘START #1 to #6’ Operating set pressure for each of

30(Y1D).
‘STOP’ Stopping set pressure for each of
30(Y1D).
NOTE:
When factory option is “VFD 3 STEPS CONTROL”,
‘START’ and ‘STOP’ set points are displayed from #1 to #3.

- 110 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.2 ‘CHILLER LBT CONTROL’ Screen
‘CHILLER LBT CONTROL’ screen allows you to control the

chiller flow by analog outputs using chiller leaving brine
temperature as the target control.
(Use PID 08/16)
(CHILLER LEAVING TEMPERATUE CONTROL option is
required.)

(the process value and the arithmetic value are displayed in
gray)
Items in’ CHILLER LBT CONTROL’ Screen

LB TEMPERATURE Process value of chiller leaving brine temperature (control target)

MANUAL : It allows to operate the chiller flow by switching operation of
touch panel.
AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the chiller flow depending on
LBT CONTROL
above control targets.
(MONITOR)
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
MANUAL RESET (the manipulating value for 0.0% of the deflection)
Set the input/output as "0", the set point enables as the proportional action.
LBT CONTROL
(SET POINTS) The control set points for the changing rate (%/second) of the controller
dMV LIMIT
manipulating value.
100% LOAD ON MV Manipulating value set point for starting 100% loading.
100% LOAD OFF MV Manipulating value set point for stopping 100% loading.

- 111 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.3 ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SSH) CONTROL’ Screen
‘EXPANSION VALVE (Superheat) CONTROL’ screen allows you to control

the expansion valve opening position by evaporator YOSAKU expansion
valve outputs or analog outputs using suction superheat temperature(SSH),
suction pressure(SP) or Chiller gas outlet pressure1(CGP1), (Chiller
leaving brine temperature (LBT)) as the target control (on the minimum
value of the three controller outputs).
(Use PID 03/16, 04/16, 05/16)
(CHILLER CONTROL option is required.)
The process value screen is displayed by touching ‘PV MONITOR’ switch at

the top right corner of the window. You are allowed to set items while
This screen can be switched to right and left by using right and left switches
of the ‘PV MONITOR’.
The right screen is displayed when you select "2 MOTERIZED CONTROL
VALVE ".
You are allowed to control the expansion valve opening position by
evaporator YOSAKU expansion valve outputs 2 or analog outputs 2 using
suction superheat temperature 2(SSH2) (CGT2 – CGP2 saturation
temperature) as the target control.
(Use PID 13/16)
(CHILLER CONTROL (2 MOTERIZED CONTROL VALVE) option is Expansion valve output (the first)
required) Expansion valve output (the second)
Items in ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SSH) CONTROL’ Screen

SUC. PRESS. or SUC. S.H. Process value of suction pressure or suction superheat (control target)
SP LIMIT(MV)% Manipulating value (limiter) of the controller on suction pressure
LBT LIMIT(MV)% MV (limiter) of the controller on chiller leaving brine temperature
MANUAL : It allows to operate the expansion valve output by switching
EXP. VALVE(SSH) operation of touch panel.
CONTROL AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the expansion valve outputs
(MONITOR) depending on above control targets.
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
EXP. VALVE(SSH) INTEGRAL TIME Controller integral time set points
CONTROL DERIVATIVE TIME Controller derivative time set points
(SET POINTS) MANUAL RESET Controller manual reset set points
MVL % , MVH % Manipulating Value lower limit , upper limit

- 112 -
QT1101-13
Adjust to 100 % within a set time.
SLOW OPEN When beginning to control when negative time is set, the amount of the operation
maintains operation amount upper bound value (MVH %) only by the set time.
nd
2ND LIQ. SUPPLY OFF LSV% Set point of the low stage slide valve % turning off the 2
liduid supply SV.
LIQUID SUPPLY 2 LIQ. SUPPLY ON LSV% Set point of the low stage slide valve % turning on the 2nd liduid supply SV.
ND
CONTROL RD rd
(SET POINTS) 3 LIQ. SUPPLY OFF LSV% Set point of the low stage slide valve % turning off the 3 liduid supply SV.
3 LIQ. SUPPLY ON LSV% Set point of the low stage slide valve % turning on the 3rd liduid supply SV.
RD
3.6.2.4 ‘EXPANSION VALVE (SP) CONTROL’ Screen

‘EXPANSION VALVE (Suction pressure) CONTROL’ screen allows you to
control the expansion valve opening position by evaporator YOSAKU
expansion valve outputs or analog outputs using suction superheat
temperature(SSH) and suction pressure(SP) or chiller gas outlet
pressure1(CGP1) as the target control.
(Use PID 03/16, 04/16, 05/16 )
(CHILLER CONTROL option
+ EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL SSH w/ SP Limit setting is required.)

the top right corner of the window. You are allowed to set items while
This screen can be switched to right and left by using right and left switches of the ‘PV MONITOR’.
The right screen is displayed when you select "2 MOTERIZED CONTROL
VALVE".
You are allowed to control the expansion valve opening position by
evaporator YOSAKU expansion valve outputs 2 or analog outputs 2 using
chiller gas outlet pressure 2 (CGP2) as the target control.
(Use PID 14/16)
(CHILLER CONTROL(2 MOTERIZED CONTROL VALVE) option is
required)
Refer to describing the controller section for each setting items.
3.6.2.5 ‘EXPANSION VALVE (LBT) CONTROL’ Screen

‘EXPANSION VALVE (Leaving brine temperature) CONTROL’ screen
allows you to control the expansion valve opening position by evaporator
YOSAKU expansion valve outputs or analog outputs using suction
superheat temperature(SSH) and chiller leaving brine temperature (LBT)
as the target on the minimum value of the controller outputs.
(Use PID 03/16, 04/16, 05/16)
(CHILLER CONTROL option
+ EXPANSION VALVE CONTROL SSH w/ LBT Limit setting is required.)

the top right corner of the window.
You are allowed to set items while checking the process value.
This screen can be switched to right and left by using right and left switches of the ‘PV MONITOR’.
See the previous describing of the controller section for each setting items.

- 113 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.6 ‘LEVEL CONTROL’ Screen
‘LEVEL CONTROL’ screen allows you to control the chiller

liquid level by analog outputs using chiller liquid level (LVL) as
the target control.
(Use PID 15/16 )
(LEVEL CONTROL option is required.)
Items in ‘LEVEL COUNTROL’ Screen

LEVEL Process value of chiller level (control target)

MANUAL : It allows to operate the chiller liquid level by switching operation
of touch panel.
AUTO : MYPRO TOUCH decides the chiller liquid level depending on
LEVEL CONTROL
above control targets.
(MONITOR)
OPERATION
CAUTION
注意
LEVEL CONTROL Controller manual reset set points (the MV for 0.0% of the deflection)
MANUAL RESET
(SET POINTS) Set the input/output as "0", the set point enables as the proportional action.
dMV LIMIT The control set points for the changing rate (%/second)of the controller MV.
MVL % Manipulating value lower limit
MVH % Manipulating value upper limit

- 114 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.7 ‘AUTO STAGE’ Screen

This screen (consisting of two sub-screens) allows you to make parameter settings concerning the 'AUTO STAGE' control (an
optional function that automatically increase or decrease the number of working screw compressor units in the system according
to load and other conditions).
MYPRO TOUCH Configuration for 'AUTO STAGE' Control

The 'AUTO STAGE' control involves multiple MYPRO TOUCH that are inter-connected through the standard feature
communication port (COMM1) on each MYPRO TOUCH. One of these MYPRO TOUCH is assigned to the “master station”
and the others to the “slave stations”.
Master station determines compressor units to be operated in the below 2 modes (Auto mode and MANUAL mode).
AUTO mode is the mode where the priority is determined according to the operation time (the station having the shortest
running time is given the top priority). The operation time is taken account of its operating/stopping set points and their
corresponding pressure or temperature. MANUAL mode is the mode where the priority is determined according to the
pre-established listing of station addresses. The master station then sends start operation and capacity-fixing commands to
the slave stations that control the corresponding compressor units one after another.
Starting Control
The master station issues a start/operation command to the slave station of the highest priority if a pressure or temperature in
its own compressor unit exceeds the corresponding target setting.
Control to Increase the Number of Operating Units
The slave station that has received the operation command from the master station starts operating its compressor unit. The
slave station then uses the master station’s capacity control values and the pressure/temperature data. The slave station
receives them continuously from the master station as its own capacity control values and process values to make capacity
control (normal capacity control) of its compressor unit.
When the capacity of the compressor unit in operation under the control of the slave station has reached its setting for capacity
control upper limit (“manipulating value high limit” (MVH%)), the master station sends a command for fixing the capacity to the
slave station and then issues a start command to the slave station of the next lower priority.
Likewise, the number of working compressor units is increased as conditions are met one by one subsequently.
Consequently, only the slave station that has last received a start command continues the capacity control according to the
varying value data from the master station, while the capacity control values of all the other slave stations of working
compressor units are fixed to the preset maximum values of the stations.
Control to Decrease the Number of Operating Units

When the capacity of the compressor unit in operation under control of the last-started (or the lowest-priority) slave station
reaches its setting for capacity control lower limit (“manipulating value low limit” (MVL%)), the master station cancels the
capacity-fixing command being sent until then to the slave station of the next higher priority. Then the master station instead
permits it making the normal capacity control.
When the second lowest-priority station that has received the normal capacity control permission goes below the setting for its
stoppage threshold (‘SV HOLD PREVIOUS’), the master station cancels the operation command for the next lower priority
station (the lowest-priority station), thus stopping the compressor unit under the control of the last-priority station.
Likewise, the number of working compressor units is
decreased one by one subsequently as conditions are met.
Control for Stopping All Units

The master station sends a stop command to all slave
stations When any of the pressure or temperature inputs
indicates a value exceeding the preset value.
The right screen is displayed when you have selected ‘USE’

for the ‘AUTO STAGER’ item in the ‘SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION’ screen.

- 115 -
QT1101-13
NOTE : In the following table, *M, *S, and *A indicate the following:
*M: Selection or setting is enabled only on the master station. On a slave station, the relevant item is only displayed.
*S: Selection or setting is enabled only on a slave station. On the master station, the relevant item is only displayed.
*A: Selection or setting is enabled on both the master and slave stations.
Items in’ AUTO STAGE’ Screen

Sub-screen
Item Description
title
Set the communication address of the master/slave station. (This setting can be changed when
*A ‘DISABLE’ is selected for the ‘CONTROL’ item below.)
ADDRESS
0: No AUTO STAGE control is implemented at any station (Also no communications ).
(Communications address)
1: The station with address 1 assigned becomes the master station.
2 to 99: The station with any of these numbers assigned becomes a slave station.
DISABLE : AUTO STAGE control is disabled.
CONTROL *A
ENABLE : AUTO SATGE control is enabled. (When this option is selected, the settings for some
(AUTO STAGE control)
of the related items become unchangeable.)
Select either of the following options as the mode used for determining the starting priorities of
compressor units.
MANUAL: Priority is fixed to the setting for the ‘LIST ADDRESS’ on the line below
LEAD LISTING *M the priority numbers on the ‘LIST (MANUAL)’ line.
(Starting priorities) AUTO (VFD LAG): Different priorities are automatically given to different stations according
to their operation times . However, the VFD compressor starts at the end.
AUTO (VFD PRIOR): Different priorities are automatically given to different stations according
to their operation times. However, the VFD compressor starts at the first.
LIST (MANUAL) This line displays the starting priority numbers used when ‘MANUAL’ is selected for the ‘LEAD
(Display of starting priorities) LISTING’ item in the above.
LIST ADDRESS *M When ‘MANUAL’ is selected for the ‘LEAD LISTING’ item in the above, this line will enter the
(Setting starting priorities) station address numbers under the appropriate starting priority numbers each.
This item normally displays the start (CUT IN) set point of the compressor unit controlled by the
master station. (Either a pressure or temperature value is displayed according to the setting for
the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN / CUT OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’
CUT IN SET POINT
screen.
(Setting starting values)
The set point displayed here is the one set on the master station using the ‘SETPOINT’ screen
AUTO and the ‘SCHEDULER’ screen. Displayed for this item on a slave station is the data sent from the
STAGE master station through communications.
DELAY *M Set the delay before one additional slave station compressor is started after the CUT IN / CUT
(Delay before start of an OUT control target has exceeded the CUT IN set point. Displayed on a slave station for this item
additional compressor unit) is only the data sent from the master station through communications.
This item normally displays the capacity control setting of the compressor unit controlled by the
master station. (Either a pressure or a temperature value is displayed according to the setting for
CONTROL SETPOINT the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/CUT OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
(Capacity control set values) The set point displayed here is the one set on the master station using the ‘SETPOINT’ screen
and the ‘SCHEDULER’ screen. Displayed on a slave station for this item is the data sent from the
master station through communications.
TARGET This item shows the Process value of pressure or temperature according to the control target
(Process value of control selected on the master station for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY CONTROL)’ item in the
target) ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
This item normally displays the stopping (CUT OUT) set point of the compressor unit controlled
by the master station. (Either a pressure or a temperature value is displayed according to the
setting for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN / CUT OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM
CUT OUT SET POINT 1
CONFIGURATION’ screen).
(Displaying stop set values)
The set point displayed here is the one set on the master station using the ‘SETPOINT’ screen
and the ‘SCHEDULER’ screen. Displayed on a slave station for this item is the data sent from the
master station through communications.
CUT OUT SET POINT 2d A set value of the compressor unit that the mastering station is controlling is set.
(Decreasing unit set values) A set value becomes a negative value. (-20.0-0.0% within the range)
DELAY 1 *M Set the delay before determining stoppage of all slave station compressors after dropping of
(Setting stop delay time) CUT IN / CUT OUT control target value to or below "the CUT OUT set point 1".
DELAY 2d *M Set the delay before determining decrease compressors after dropping of CUT IN / CUT OUT
(Decreasing unit delay time) control target value to or below "the CUT OUT set point 1 + CUT OUT set point 2d".

- 116 -
QT1101-13
Items in’ AUTO STAGE’ Screen (continued)

Sub-screen
Item Description
title
INTERVAL *M The time of the number decrease when the mode of operation of the mastering station is 'AUTO
(Decreasing unit interval) STAGE COMM' or 'AUTO STAGE REMOTE' of the interval is set.
Either ‘PRESSURE’ or ‘TEMPERATURE’ is displayed (master station) or selected (slave
CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL *S stations).
(Start-stop The display on the master station for this item shows ‘PRESSURE’ or ‘TEMPERATURE’
Pressure/temperature according the selection made in the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN / OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM
display and selection for CONFIGURATION’ screen.
CUT IN and CUT OUT On slave stations, select ‘PRESSURE’ or ‘TEMPERATURE’ whichever is the same as the
values) selection the display on the master station. If the selection made on a slave station is different
from (that) on the master station, incorrect CUT IN and CUT OUT set points will be displayed.
Either ‘PRESSURE’ or ‘TEMPERATURE’ is displayed (master station) or selected (slave
station).
AUTO CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL On the master station, the display for this item shows ‘PRESSURE’ or ‘TEMPERATURE’
STAGE *S
according to the selection made in the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY CONTROL)’ item in
(continued) (Pressure/temperature the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
display and selection for On slave stations, select ‘PRESSURE’ or ‘TEMPERATURE’ whichever is the same as the
compressor capacity control selection on the master station. If the selection made on a slave station is different from that on
values) the master station, incorrect capacity control set points will be displayed. If ‘USER DEFINED’ is
selected for the ‘REFRIGERANT’ item in the ‘SYSTERM CONFIGURATION’ screen, any
selection for this item is only displayed. You cannot set them.
This item is valid when ‘TEMPERATURE’ is selected for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY
APPROACH dT *S CONTROL)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen. An appropriate negative value is
set on slave stations.
Set the capacity of the compressor for own station using which the stoppage of the compressor
*A of the next- lower- priority station is determined.
SV HOLD PREVIOUS
Any setting is unacceptable if it exceeds the valve of the percentage set for MVH%-5.0% in
‘CAPACITY RAMP CONTROL’.
LEAD
This item displays the starting priority in an ascending order, beginning with 1 at the top.
(Starting priority)
LIST This item displays the communication addresses of the stations corresponding to the starting
(Comm. address list) priority numbers assigned.
LOAD% This item displays the current capacity of the compressor controlled by each station both
(compressor capacity) numerically and in the form of a bar graph.
This item displays the current state of each station using the following words.
UNKNOWN : Slave station which is not registered or does not respond to master station
STOPPED : Stopped
ANTI CYCLE : Stopped with restart restricted
AUTO STOP : Automatically stopped
PRE CUT IN : Compressor in preparation for start
PRE SYSTEM : System in preparation for start
PRE START : In preparation for start
MONITOR
START : Started
(state STATE
display) RUN : Running
PRE CUT OUT : Compressor in preparation for stopping
PUMP OUT : pump-out in progress
RUN MVH : Running with capacity at upper limit
RUN MVL : Running with capacity at lower limit
RUN UNDER HOLD : Below stop determination capacity
READY TO RUN : Preparing for operation
READY TO STOP : Preparing for stop
FAILURE : FAILURE (serious alarm) occurred
Displays the current operation control mode of each station.
UNKNOWN : Slave station which is not registered or does not respond to the master
MODE
station
(Operation command)
STAGE-OFF : Operation command from master station is OFF
STAGE-ON : Operation command from master station is ON
RUN TIME HRS
It displays the integrated operating time of the compressor unit controlled by each station.
(Operation time count)

- 117 -
QT1101-13
Selection of Pressure or Temperature Values as Control Targets for Start/Stop Control (‘CUT IN/OUT
& CONTROL’) and Capacity Control (‘CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL’)
To implement the AUTO STAGE control, you should use either pressure values or temperature values as the control targets
for both start/stop (CUT IN / CUT OUT) control and capacity (CONTROL) control. Using pressure or temperature values as the
target values is determined depending on the combination of the selections you make for the following four items in both the
‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen and the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen. (this section):
- Selection for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/OUT)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
- Selection for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY CONTROL)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen.
- On slave stations, selection of the ‘CUT IN/OUT’ side for the ‘CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL’ item in the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen.
- On slave stations, selection of the ‘CONTROL’ side for the ‘CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL’ item in the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen.
a. When pressure values are used for the start/stop (CUT IN/OUT) control:
Select ‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’ or ‘SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE’ on the master station as follows.
Selection Item Selection on Master Station Selection on Slave Station
‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’ (See ‘AUTO

STAGING’)
The ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/OUT)’
‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’ (When ‘DISABLE’ is selected for ‘LOCAL
item
or ‘SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE’ SUCTION PRESSURE’, the compressor unit
in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen
automatically starts/stops upon reach to the
‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’ value.)
The ‘CUT IN/OUT’ side of the ‘CUT IN/OUT & ‘PRESSURE’ must be selected to match with
‘PRESSURE’ is automatically selected.
CONTROL’ item the selection on the master station.
‘APPROACH dT’ in the ‘AUTO STAGE’

Unchangeable Not used for control
screen (refer to the NOTE)
b. When temperature values are used for the start/stop (CUT IN/OUT) control:
Select ‘CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE’ or ‘CHILLER ENTERING BRINE TEMPERATURE’ on the master
station. (Slave stations have no CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE and CHILLER ENTERING BRINE
TEMPERATURE sensors.)

STAGING’)
The ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/OUT)’
‘CHILLER LEAVING TEMPERATURE’ (When ‘DISABLE’ is selected for ‘LOCAL
item
or ‘CHILLER ENTERING TEMPERATURE’ SUCTION PRESSURE’, the compressor unit
in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen
automatically starts/stops upon reach to the
The ‘CUT IN/OUT’ side of the ‘CUT IN/OUT & ‘TEMPERATURE’ must be selected to match
‘TEMPERATURE’ is automatically selected.
CONTROL’ item with the selection on the master station.

Unchangeable Any temperature value (negative value)
screen (See NOTE)
NOTE:
If the automatic staging control on a slave station becomes invalid due to interferences or other communication disturbances, the
automatic start/stop control is continued using the saturation pressure value derived from the following two equations as the set
value for the ‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’.
[‘CUT IN SET POINT’ temperature setting written last by the master station] + [‘APPROACH dT’ value]
and [Set temperature for ‘CUT OUT SET POINT’] + [‘APPROACH dT’ value]
Therefore, you should enter an appropriate negative value. Any negative value can be input if it is within ±20 % of the range.
The “range” here means the measurable range of the temperature sensor selected for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CUT IN/OUT)’
item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen. (Normally, a temperature sensor measurable of temperatures between -50.0
and +50.0 C (i.e. 100 C in range) is used. So a temperature between -20 to +20.0 C can be set as the ‘APPROACH dT’ value.)

- 118 -
QT1101-13
c. When pressure values are used for the capacity control:

Select ‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’ or ‘SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE’ on the master station as follows.

STAGING’)
The ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY
‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’
CONTROL)’ item (‘When ‘DISABLE’ is selected on ‘LOCAL
or ‘SYSTEM SUCTION PRESSURE’
in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen SUCTION PRESSURE’, the capacity of the
compressor unit is controlled using the
The ‘CONTROL’ side ‘PRESSURE’ must be selected match with
‘PRESSURE’ is automatically selected.
of the ‘CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL’ item the selection on the master station.
APPROACH dT Unchangeable Not used for the control.
d. When temperature values are used for the capacity control:

Select ‘CHILLER LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE’. (Slave stations have no chiller leaving brine temperature sensors.)

STAGING’)
The ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY
‘CHILLER LEAVING BRINE
CONTROL)’ item When ‘DISABLE’ is selected on ‘LOCAL
TEMPERATURE’
in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen SUCTION PRESSURE’, the capacity of the
compressor unit is controlled using the
The ‘CONTROL’ side

‘TEMPERATURE’ must be selected to match
of the ‘CUT IN/OUT & CONTROL’ item ‘TEMPERATURE’ is automatically selected.
with the selection on the master station.
in the ‘AUTO STAGE’ window.

Unchangeable Any temperature (negative value)
window (see NOTE)
NOTE:
If the automatic staging control on a slave station becomes invalid due to interferences or other communication disturbances, the
capacity control is performed using the saturation pressure value derived from the following equation as the set values for the
‘LOCAL SUCTION PRESSURE’.
[‘CONTROL SET POINT’ temperature setting written last by the master station] + [‘APPROACH dT’ value]
Therefore, you should enter an appropriate negative value. Any negative value can be input if it is within ±20% of the “range”.
The “range” here means the measurable range of the temperature sensor selected for the ‘CONTROL TARGET (CAPACITY
CONTROL)’ item in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’ screen. (Normally, a temperature sensor of a measurable range of
between -50.0 to +50.0 C (i.e. the range is in 100 C) is used. So a temperature between -20 to +20.0 C can be set as the
‘APPROACH dT’ value.)
Refer to 5.4 AUTO STAGE control. There is explanation of AUTO STAGE.

- 119 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.8 ‘COMMUNICATION SETUP’ Screen

‘COMMUNICATION SETUP’ screen allows you to make all
necessary settings for each communication port.
Items in’ COMMUNICATION SETUP – MYPRO TOUCH CPU – COM2’ Screen

Item Description
Select ‘START’ to make communications active for the port being set. Select ‘STOP’ to deactivate communications
COMMUNICATION
for the port.
Enter different one of the numbers from 0 to 99 as the station number for each MYPRO TOUCH constituting a
ADDRESS
communication control network.
Select a baud rate from among the options

RATE
: 300, 600, 1,200, 2,400, 4,800, 9,600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, and 115,200 bps
(Data transmission
NOTE : Determine the baud rate so that the total of the baud rates for all communication ports of one MYPRO
speed)
TOUCH does not exceed 192,000 bps.
FORMAT Select a desired combination of character format specifications to apply to the communications established.
(Communication You can select a one from a total of 12 combination options:
character format) Data length: 7 or 8 bits, Parity check: None, Odd, or Even, Stop bit: 1 or 2 bits
Selecting this protocol allows the external communication device to read/write data
MODBUS RTU
from/into the devices of MYPRO TOUCH using MODBUS RTU (binary data) protocol.
MODBUS ASCII
from/into the devices of MYPRO TOUCH using MODBUS ASCII (ASCII data) protocol.
PROTOCOL The communication protocol specially used for the optional automatic staging control
AUTO STAGE
(AUTO STAGE).
CP3 PROTOCOL 0
from/into devices of MYPRO TOUCH by using MYPRO-CPIII protocol 0.
Selecting this protocol allows the remote communication device to read/write data
CP3 PROTOCOL 1
from/into devices of MYPRO TOUCH by using MYPRO-CPIII protocol 1.
This item is for setting the delay time until a response is sent from MYPRO TOUCH after it has received a
RESPONSE
command from the communication master station (remote PC).
(Response delay)
(You can see any delay time between 0 and 100 milliseconds at 10 millisecond increments.)
Error count set points of master station communications

The slave station, which continually fails in communication over the error count, is regarded as communication
ERROR COUNT error.
Setting range 20 to 1800, Initial value 20
Items in ‘COMMUNICATION SETUP – MYPRO TOUCH HMI – COM1 & ETHERNET PORT’ Screen
Item Description
DEVICE NONE Not Use

(Communication Protocol) MODBUS RTU / MODBUS TCP MODBUS RTU / MODBUS TCP Protocol
COMMUNICATION
When 'START' is stopped when the communication of the port to be set is started, 'STOP' is selected.
(Comm. Status)
The area of the device used to communicate is selected.
COMMUNICATION
MYPRO TOUCH AREA (Holding Register : 4003001~)
AREA
CP4 AREA (Holding Register : 4000001~)

- 120 -
QT1101-13
3.6.2.9 ‘VFD SETUP’
This setup is for the display translating from control outputs to

revolutions during compressor revolutions control or
condenser/pomp revolutions control.
(VFD COMPRESSOR option

or CONDENSER VFD CONTROL option is required .)
You are allowed to set the scaling used for the display of the
revolutions control outputs on the right figure part of ‘CONTROL
SUMMARY’.
For the ‘COMPRESSOR VFD CONTROL’ or ‘CONDENSER VFD CONTROL’ item, select ‘REVOLUTION’ (‘rpm’) or
‘FREQUENCY’ (‘Hz’) to decide the revolutions scaling or the frequency scaling, respectively.
Under ‘MV0% - 100%’, set the revolutions or frequency values that correspond to the 0 % and 100 % revolutions control outputs
(MV = manipulating value).
Items in ‘VFD SETUP’ screen

COMPRESSOR Display contents

VFD CONTROL REVOLUTION REVOLUTION : [rpm]
or FREQUENCY : [Hz]
CONDENSER MV 0% Displayed value for MV 0%
VFD CONTROL
MV 100% Displayed value for MV 100%

- 121 -
QT1101-13
3.7 Check of System (Graph ICON, Monitor ICON)
(Graph ICON) (Monitor ICON)
Setting methods mainly for test run adjustment or readjustment are described as below.
Graph ICON
(1) ‘TREND GRAPH’ It allows to check current movements of each data.
(2) ‘HISTRICAL TREND GRAPH’ It allows to check histories of each data.
(3) ‘TREND DATA EXPORT’ It allows to copy stored data to external USD flash drive.
Monitor ICON
(1) ‘VERSION’ It allows to check the version of the program.
(2) ‘DEVICE MONITOR’ It allows to check internal device value.
(3) ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ It allows to check the system setting. (Not allow to change it.)
(4) ‘SYSTEM OVERVIEW’ It allows to monitor peripheral systems depends on the system setting.
(5) ‘COUNTER’ It allows to check operation hours and YOSAKU expansion valve operation frequency.
(6) ‘ASSIGNMENT’ It allows to check the assignment (title) of current inputs/outputs.

- 122 -
QT1101-13
3.7.1 ‘GRAPH’ Icon
(Graph ICON）
The data logging of MYPRO TOUCH system can record below 63 types of data.
AI-01 ~ AI-16
AI-17 ~ AI-32
AI-65 ~ AI-80
PID-01/16 ~ PID-15/16
Below two kinds of graphs can be displayed.

“Real time trend”, which allows checking above data current movement
“Historical trend”, which allows checking past data trend
Moreover, it allows copying stored data in internal SD cards, which are sold separately, to external USB storage device
(memory).So you can verify and analyze the data with external personal computers.
3.7.1.1 ‘TREND GRAPH’ Screen
3.7.1.2 ‘HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH’ Screen

(Real time trend graph)
‘TREND GRAPH’ screen allows to check current operating
data in graph form (real time trend graph).
It can show 600 data.
Switch to ‘Historical Trend Graph’
Select display graph

Data transferring
Long term/short term switching
Sampling interval

- 123 -
QT1101-13
(Historical trend Graph)

‘HISTORICAL TREND GRAPH’ screen allows to check past
operating data in graph form (historical trend graph).
1,500,000 past data can be recorded.

(The display is overwritten the past data record beginning with
the chronologically oldest record, when it surpasses 1,500,000
data.)
Switch to ‘Trend Graph’
CAUTION
When time (year, hour, minute) is changed when data is collected, data might not be able to be collected
normally.
When a historical trend is displayed, the cursor cannot be displayed if data cannot collect normally.
SWITCH DATA DATA switch

This switch allows to switch graphs of real time trend graph and historical trend graph.
On real time trend graph, the screen is updated every time getting the latest data. You are allowed to check current status in
Graph form.
On historical trend graph, stored data in SD cards that are sold separately, can be displayed.
[ LOGGING PREIOD ] (Sampling interval)

Sampling interval of logging can be set any period from 1 to 43,200 seconds (12 hours) or zero.
(About 17 days data can be stored when you set the sampling interval as 1 second.)
(Data logging is not performed when you set the sampling interval as 0 second.)
SELECT Display switch

It allows to select display or non-display of 20 graph drawings described as above.
TREND DATA EXPORT switch

This switch allows to copy stored data in internal SD cards, which are sold separately, to external USB storage device (memory).
(See next page)
SHORT RANGE switch <-> LONG RANGE switch

Short range: Displays sampling data one by one. (It allows to check short –term data change.)
Long range: Displays only every 72nd data. (It allows to get the picture of long-term data trend.)

- 124 -
QT1101-13
3.7.1.3 ‘TREND DATA EXPORT’ Screen
‘TREND DATA EXPORT’ screen allows to export (output)

stored data (log data) in MYPRO TOUCH system to the SD
card.
Moreover, data in the SD card can be copied onto the USB
storage device (memory).
TRANSFER CSV switch
FILE MANAGER switch
CSV fail indicator display area
(Exporting to SD card)
1. Please install the SD card in the touch panel.
2. It is correctly installed, and when "TRANSFER CSV" switch is pushed when the sampling data exists in the MYPRO TOUCH
system, the sampling data is output to the SD card as CSV file.
The output file (100 files of SA.0#00.CSV-SA0#99.CSV to 000# folder) becomes it. (# is 0-4.)
Please note an overwrite when this name has already been filed.
(Data copy from SD card to USB storage device, and Display of CSV file)
1. Please confirm the USB storage device (memory) is installed.
2. When copying of the CSV file and confirming it, the FILE MANAGER switch is started, and it touches, and the file manager
is started.
'CSV file indicator' is displayed by choosing the file that wants to be confirmed by the file manager, and it operates with right
side UP, DOWN, R, and L switch, and it is possible to confirm it.
(4) Delete-fail
(5) Select all

(1) Scroll up
(6) Displaying of selected item
(7) Paste (2) Scroll down

(8) Copy
(9) Cut
Device manager
(3) Return to previous folder
3. When the file is copied, the file of the copy origin is selected by the file manager touching.
4. It touches 'COPY' with the file selected.
5. It touches, and it touches 'PASTE' switch at the destination of the copy of the file.
6. It touches OK or Cancel according to the message.

- 125 -
QT1101-13
3.7.2 ‘MONITOR’ Icon
(Monitor ICON）
3.7.2.1 ‘PROGRAM VERSION’ Screen
’PROGRAM VERSION’ screen allows to check the current

program version (Changing of the display is impossible.).
It is necessary information for your inquiries regarding questions

or troubles of its operation.
(The content etc. of the change can be confirmed because in the

end of a manual, there is a program change history. )

- 126 -
QT1101-13
3.7.2.2 ‘DEVICE MONITOR’ Screen
‘DEVICE MONITOR’ screen is only for maintenance by a

service member.
3.7.2.3 ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ Screen

This screen is same as 3.3.2 ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ screen,
however, it does not allow to change settings.

- 127 -
QT1101-13
3.7.2.4 ‘SYSTEM OVER VIEW’ Screen
Not only compressor control, but also peripheral system controls

are possible, such as condenser control, chiller control and level
control, on MYPRO TOUCH system.
Touch a picture of right figure, the screen is changed

corresponding item screen for each control.
3.7.2.5 ‘COUNTER’ Screen
This window displays the accumulated operation hours of the

compressor and the operation counts of the YOSAKU
expansion valves. (This screen does not arrow to change the
setting.)
These data help determine the replacement time and overhaul
time of each device.
Items in’ DEVICE COUNTER MONITOR’ Screen

Item Description
COMPRESSOR START/STOP Displays the number of times the compressor was started (from the
(Compressor operation frequency) non-operating state).
COMPRESSOR RUN TIME Displays the operating hours of the compressor
COMPRESSOR TOTAL RUN TIME Displays the total operating hours of the compressor
CHILLER YOSAKU Displays the number of times the chiller YOSAKU expansion valve was
(Chiller YOSAKU actuation frequency) operated. (Option)
ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER YOSAKU
Displays the number of times the economizer/intercooler YOSAKU expansion
(Economizer/intercooler YOSAKU
valve was operated. (Option)
actuation frequency)
LIQUID INJECTION YOSAKU-1

Displays the number of times the liquid injection YOSAKU-1 expansion valve
(Liquid injection YOSAKU-1
was operated. (Option)
LIQUID INJECTION YOSAKU-2

Displays the number of times the liquid injection YOSAKU-2 expansion valve
(Liquid injection YOSAKU-2
was operated. (Option)

- 128 -
QT1101-13
3.7.2.6 ‘ASSIGNMENT’ Screen
‘I/O ASSIGNMENT’ screen allows to check the assignment of

inputs/outputs on now using MYPRO TOUCH system.
In addition, as for digital inputs/outputs, it allows to check

current status.
Analog outputs
name display switch
Analog outputs are displayed by numbers.

Touch ‘name display’ to show corresponding list of numbers and
names.

- 129 -
QT1101-13
Chapter 4 : Operation
4.1 Compressor unit operation control
4.1.1 Start/Stop Control in Different Operation Control Modes

The start/stop control of the compressor unit is different according to the selection you make for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the
‘OPERATION MODE’ screen.
‘LOCAL’: The START / STOP switch on the touch panel is used to make start/stop control of the compressor unit.
‘REMOTE’: Start/stop of the compressor unit is controlled by ON/OFF command inputs at DI-16 by an external device.
‘COMM’: Start/stop of the compressor unit takes place according to ON/OFF commands at X140 transmitted from a
remote controlling device through communications.
‘AUTO STAGE’: Each of the multiple compressor units operating under automatic staging control (AUTO STAGE; option) is
started and stopped according to commands sent from the master station.
a. Start/stop control in ‘LOCAL’ mode

Start:
- Touch the START switch on the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH.
When the START switch is touched with the compressor in a non-operating condition and without any alarm issued, the
system will be activated after a lapse of the ‘SYSTEM START DELAY’ time.
- The system starts operating after a lapse of the ‘CUT IN DELAY’ time following its activation.
- (If there is an oil pump.)The oil pump operation command at DO-02 turns ON at the end of a delay of the ‘OIL P. START
DELAY’ time, causing the oil pump to start.
- After the start of the oil pump, the following two points are confirmed in the order of mention within the ‘COMP. START
*1
DELAY’ time :
- The process value of the supply oil differential pressure is larger than the setting for ‘LOW dOP’ alarm (for the ‘LOW
dOP MASK TIME’).
- The compressor’s capacity does not exceed 5 %.
- The compressor motor operation command at DO-01 (Y00) turns ON.
- The compressor motor starts and the compressor operation confirmation input at DI-12 (X0B) turns ON to complete the
compressor start sequence.
Stop:
- Touch the STOP switch on the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH.
Pump-out sequence starts as soon as the STOP switch is touched while the compressor is in operation. The compressor
capacity (or rotational speed) set for ‘PUMP OUT > PERCENTAGE’ is maintained during the pump-out operation.
*
- After a delay of the ‘PUMP OUT MINIMUM DELAY’ time , the compressor completes the pump-out sequence either after
*
a lapse of the ‘PUMP OUT MAXIMUM DELAY’ time or after the suction pressure has dropped to the ‘PUMP OUT PRESS’
*
pressure .
At the end of the pump-out sequence, the compressor capacity is brought down to 0 % if ‘YES’ is selected for ‘CAPACITY
*
0% STOP’ . If ‘NO’ is selected, the pump-out sequence finishes without reducing the compressor capacity to 0 %.
- The compressor operation command at DO-01(Y00) is turned OFF to complete the compressor stop control sequence.
b. Start/stop control in ‘REMOTE’ mode

- The compressor is started and stopped according to ON/OFF commands at DI-16 (X0F) from an external device.
c. Start/stop control in ‘COMM’ mode

- The compressor is started and stopped according to ON/OFF commands at X140 transmitted from a remote computer
transmitted through communications.

- 130 -
QT1101-13
d. Start/stop control in ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode

- The master station issues commands to start and stop the compressor units under the control of itself and the individual
slave stations to achieve the automatic staging control. The commands are transmitted to each slave station through
communications.
CAUTION
注意
According to the selection for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, the following
conditions automatically take place when the STOP switch is touched on the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH.
- When the ‘LOCAL’, ‘REMOTE’, or ‘COM’ mode (except ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode) has been selected, pressing
the STOP switch causes no change to the operation control mode in the case of the ‘LOCAL’ mode, but
the mode automatically changes to ‘LOCAL’ in the case of the ‘REMOTE’ and ‘COMM’ modes. The
compressor, if operating, will then stop after the pump-out sequence. (It remains stopped thereafter.)
To restart the compressor, simply press the START switch if you need not change the mode from ‘LOCAL’
to another, or turn ON the relevant operation control command after changing the mode from ‘LOCAL’ to the
desired mode.
- When the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode has been selected, pressing the STOP switch does not cause any change
to the setting for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen, but the selection of ‘ENABLE’
you made for the ‘CONTROL’ item in the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen automatically changes to ‘DISABLE’.
In this case, if the compressor under control is running when the STOP switch is pressed, the compressor
will then stop after completing the pump-out sequence.
STAGE’ screen is consequently changed to ‘DISABLE’, the automatic staging control continues to work on
all the other stations (slave stations).
To recover the ‘AUTO STAGE’ mode control after pressing the STOP switch , it is necessary (for the case
of the master station and the case of a slave station) to perform the steps below. (Simply pressing the
START switch on the station does not recover the automatic staging control.)
1. From the ‘CONTROL SUMMARYS’ , open the ‘AUTO STAGE’ screen.


- 131 -
QT1101-13
4.2 Control system – Digital Input/Output

Channel No. Symbol Input/Output Item Name
Compressor Start command output
Compressor turns on, after turning on DO-02 [OILP] and the end of compressor start delay, when operation
condition has been completed. If OPERATION MODE is set at REMOTE, COMM and AUTO-STAGE, and also
DO-01 COMP COMPRESSOR AUTO START/STOP is set as YES, it starts/stops automatically depending on either selected
control target of below options.
AI-01 SP Suction pressure AI-16 or 19 SSP System suction pressure
AI-13 EBT Chiller entering brine temperature, AI-14 LBT Chiller leaving brine temperature
When it meets the stop conditions, it turns off after pump-out sequence that starts at the end of CUT-OUT DELAY.
Oil Pump Start command output
It allocates it when setting to W/ 2-OIL PUMPS with OIL PUMP, and setting it to LEAD Y01/LAG Y14 with OIL
PUMP LEAD/LAG.
When it meets the start conditions, oil pump turns on after OIL P. START DELAY.
( OILP ) Oil pump turns off when the compressor stop after pump-out sequence and then the capacity becomes 0% or
after 3 minutes later of the stopping.
(After the OIL PUMP DELAY, it turns off by option (COMPRESSOR OIL SEAL CONTROL).
DO-02 * It will turn on even the compressor is not running, if AI-12 MA (compressor motor current) is detected as over
“the specific value”.
It turns off 1 minute later of starting compressor when “J Series – with oil pump - PARTIAL LUBE” is selected.
Oil Pump2 Start command output
It allocates it when setting to W/ 2-OIL PUMPS with OIL PUMP, and setting it to LEAD Y14/LAG Y01 with OIL
( O/P2 ) PUMP LEAD/LAG.
It turns on when the set point is dOP <= #2OIL PUMP START dOP,
It turns off when the set point is dOP > #2OIL PUMP START dOP after #2OIL PUMP STOP DELAY.
(Low stage)Capacity "LOAD" Solenoid Valve output
It allocates it when selecting it with COMPRESSOR excluding FM160. (It is turning "ON" at increase.)
As for the capacity control, PID control is performed depending on either selected control target of below options.
(including pressure/temperature composition.)
AI-01 SP Suction pressure AI-16 or 19 SSP System suction pressure
AI-14 LBT Chiller leaving brine temperature AI-02 DP Discharge Pressure
LOAD By option (REMOTE CAPACITY CONTROL), it controls depending on either command input.
STANDARD DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
DO-03 ANALOG AI-20 RLD Remote capacity command

DIGITAL DI-31 RMLD Remote capacity loading command
DI-32 RMUL Remote capacity unloading command
The limiter functions of LIMIT/UNLOAD are preinstalled by using following inputs.
AI-12 MA(Compressor motor current) rise, AI-02 DP( Discharge pressure) rise
AI-01 SP(Suction pressure) down, AI-09 IP(intermediate pressure) rise (option)
FM160 CAPACITY CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
MT-DIOA-01
FMLD
It allocates When FM160 is selected with COMPRESSOR. (It is turning "OFF" at increase.)
(Low stage)Capacity "UNLOAD" Solenoid Valve output
UNLD It allocates it when selecting it with COMPRESSOR excluding FM160. (It is turning "ON" at decrease.)
DO-04 Refer to (Low stage) capacity loading solenoid valve output DO-03 [LOAD]
FM160 CAPACITY CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2
FMUL
It allocates When FM160 is selected with COMPRESSOR. (It is turning "OFF" at decrease.)
Liquid Injection Liquid Supply Solenoid Valve output-1 (NA)
( INJS ) When DI-12 [MSRB] is ON, if AI-07 OT >= SV ON OT, it turns on,
If AI-07 OT <= SV OFF OT, it turns off. (SV ON OT set point < SV OFF OT set point)
Oil Heater output (SA)
( OILH ) During MYPRO TOUCH system running, if AI-08 OS ≦ HEATER ON OS, it turns on,
DO-05 if AI-08 OS ≧ HEATER OFF OS, it turns off. (HEATER ON OS set point < HEATER OFF OS set point)
(High stage)Capacity "LOAD" Solenoid Valve output (exclude EU)
( HILD )
For capacity control, PID control is performed as the control target is AI-09 IP (intermediate pressure)
100% Running Output (EU)
( FLLD )
30 seconds later of that the compressor capacity becomes 100%, it turns on.
Liquid Injection YOSAKU Solenoid Valve output-1 (NA)
PID Control is performed depending on either selected control target of below options.
( INJY ) AI-02 DP Discharge Pressure, Discharge superheat calculated value
In addition, when INJECTION VALVES is set as MOTORIZED VALVE, it assigned not digital outputs, but analog
out puts (LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL PID OUT).(Extension Analog outputs board is required.)
DO-06 (High stage)Capacity "UNLOAD" Solenoid Valve output
( HIUL )
Refer to (High stage) capacity loading solenoid valve out put DO-05 [HILD].
Oil Return solenoid valve output (J)
( OILR ) After the OIL RETURN START DELAY - START time has passed since DI-12 MSRB was turned on, it turns it on.
After the OIL RETURN START DELAY - STOP time has passed since DI-12 MSRB was turned off, it turns it off.
Oil Heater output (V,NA)
( OILH )
Refer to oil heater output DO-05 [OILH].
DO-07
Oil Return solenoid valve output (V)
( OILR )
Refer to oil heater output DO-06 [OILR].

- 132 -
QT1101-13
Economizer/Intercooler Liquid Supply Solenoid Valve output (J)
( I/CS )
Refer to "DO-08 [I/CS] Economizer/Intercooler Liquid Supply SV output".
Economizer/Intercooler Liquid Supply Solenoid Valve output (V)
When DI-12 [MSRB] is ON,
( I/CS ) if AI-15 LSV >= SV ON LSV%, it turns on. if AI-15 LSV <= SV OFF LSV%, it turns off.
DO-08 if AI-01 SP <= SV ON SP, it turns on. if AI-01 SP >= SV OFF SP, it turns off.
(SV ON LSV% set point > SV OFF LSV% set point) (SV ON SP set point < SV OFF SP set point)
J Vi slide L->H Solenoid Valve output
( L->H )
It is assigned depends on the option (AUTO Vi CONTROL, USE(J)).
Oil Feed Solenoid Valve output

( OILF ) When DI-12 [MSRB] is ON or DO-02 [OILP] is ON, it turns ON. After the OIL FEED OFF DELAY or 10 seconds
later of differential pressure verification, it turns off.
OIL Return Solenoid Valve output (FM)
( OILR )
Refer to oil heater output DO-06 [OILR] (J)
DO-09
Oil Drain Solenoid Valve output (except EU)
( OILD ) It turns on at the time DI-12 [MSRB] turns OFF. After that, it turns off after OIL DRAIN SV - SV OFF DELAY.
(It also turns on at the time MYPRO TOUCH system starts. It also turns off at the end of SV OFF DELAY.)
J Vi slide H->L Solenoid Valve output
( H->L )
It is assigned depending on the options (AUTO Vi CONTROL, USE (J)).
Common Alarm (FAILURE and ALARM) output
DO-10 FAIL It is batch alarm (FAILURE) output. (Normal Close and Normal Open, the options are available)
Alarm (non-critical alarm) is also out puts, when YES is set as ALARM OUTPUT.
Emergency Stop input
DI-11 EMGC It is emergency stop input (non-voltage contact)
The digit is input with emergency stop bottom and so on.
One second OFF status of this input triggers "EMERRGENCY STOP" alarm.
Main motor Starter Read Back input
STANDARD DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
It is compressor motor operation confirming inputs(non-voltage contact)

- At the time of starting up of the compressor, this input does not turn ON within COMP. MSRB(Starting) setting
DI-12 MSRB period after turning on of DO-01 [COMP]. This situation triggers "START FAIL" alarm.
- When the compressor is running, this input keeps OFF status more than the period of COMP. MSRB (Running)
setting point. It triggers "START FAIL" alarm.
- At the time that the compressor stops, this input status does not become OFF at the end of COMP. MSRB
(Stopping) setting time after DO-01 [COMP] turns off. It triggers "START FAIL" alarm.
MT-DIOA-01
Interlock-1 input
It is Interlock-1 input (non-voltage contact) . Interlock of the compressor operation can be unlocked.
DI-13 ITL1 (Short-circuit 13A and 13B when this interlock is not used.)
Follow condition triggers "INTERLOCK" alarm. DI-12 [MSRB] is ON or DO-01 [COMP] is ON, also this input keeps
OFF status for more then INTERLOCK setting period.
Interlock-2 input
It is Interlock-2 input (non-voltage contact). Interlock of the compressor operation, such as cooling water pressure
( ITL2 ) rise switch, can be unlocked. (Short-circuit 14A and 14B when this interlock is not used.)
At the end of OIL PUMP START DELAY (During the compressor is running.) and also this input keeps the status
DI-14 OFF for more than INTERLOCK-2 setting period, it triggers "INTERLOCK2" alarm
100% Running Lock command Input (EU)
( LOCK ) This is running command for the compressor capacity 100%.
It starts with fixed compressor capacity 100% when you make this input ON.
(It can be used for Easy control of number.( sequential operating, sequential stopping))
Interlock-3 input
It is Interlock-3 input (non-voltage contact). It is available only when option (CHILLER CONTROL) is selected.
Interlock of the compressor operation, such as process pressure rise switch, can be unlocked.
(Short-circuit 15A and 15B when this interlock is not used.)
( ITL3 ) When Chiller Pump Mode is set as Not Use,
It triggers "INTERLOCK-3" alarm, when this input keeps OFF status more than INTERLOCK-3 setting period
after completing the compressor operation condition.
DI-15 When Chiller Pump Mode is not set as Not Use,
It triggers "INTERLOCK-3" alarm, when this input keeps OFF status more than INTERLOCK-3 setting period
after turning ON of DO-19 CHLP.
Oil Level High input
( OLVH ) It is oil level switch input (non-voltage contact). (Short-circuit 15A and 15B when this interlock is not used.)
It triggers "OIL LEVEL LOW", when this input kept OFF status more than 30 second under the operation of the
compressor.
Remote Compressor Start command input
DI-16 RMST It is remote compressor operating command input (non-voltage contact). It allows to input compressor-operating
command at a distance. It is available only when OPERATION MODE is set as REMOTE.
* Items in parentheses of Symbol column are assigned depending on options. (The configuration cannot be changed.)
* DO-** : Digital output DI-** : Digital input

- 133 -
QT1101-13
Chiller Liquid Supply Solenoid Valve output-1
( EVPS )
It turns on when DI-12 [MSRB] is ON, it turns off when pump-out starts.
DO-17
Vi slide (M-port) "Drain" Solenoid Valve output
( MPLD )
It is assigned depending on the options (AUTO Vi CONTROL, USE DO10, 11, 12, 16, and 17).
Chiller YOSAKU Expansion Valve output-1 (except J)
( EVPY ) PID control is performed by selected any follow control targets. The minimum value of their PID control outputs is
controlled as the output value.
Suction superheat, AI-01 SP Suction pressure, AI-14 LBT Chiller leaving brine temperature
Vi slide (M-port) "Plug" Solenoid Valve output
( MPUL )
Liquid Injection Liquid Supply Solenoid Valve output-1 (EU)
Extension. DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
( INJS )
DO-18 Refer to liquid injection liquid supply output DO-05 [INJS].
Oil Return Solenoid Valve (NA)
( OILR )
Refer to oil heater output DO-06 [OILR] (J).
Oil Heater output (NA)
MT-DIO4 -01
( OILH )
Refer to oil heater output DO-05 [OILH] (SA).
Auxiliary Machine Start command output
( AUX )
It turns ON after completing the operating condition. It turns off 15 seconds later of the turning off DI-12 [MSRB].
Chiller Pump Start output
CONTINUOUS It operates continuously depending on each operation command of OPERATION MODE.
( CHLP ) (Even during ANTI CYCLE.)
AUTO START/STOP It synchronizes the operation of the compressor.(It does not turn on during ANTI CYCLE.)
(Both of them turn off 30 seconds later of turning off DI-12 [MSRB].)
DO-19
Vi Slide Valve Bypass Solenoid Valve output
( SVBP )
It is assigned depending on options (AUTO Vi CONTROL, USE DO10, 11, 12, 16, and 17).
Liquid Injection YOSAKU Expansion Valve output-1 (EU)
( INJY )
Refer to Liquid injection YOSAKU expansion valve output DO-06 [INJY]
Starting Bypass Solenoid Valve output
( SBYP )
It turns on after DO-01 [COMP] becomes ON. It turns OFF after STARTING BYPASS SV - SV OFF DELAY.
Hot Gas Bypass Solenoid Valve output
DO-20
It turns on when DI-12 [MSRB] is ON and after SV ON DELAY(LSV%) with set point as AI-15 LSV <= (HOT GAS
( HBYP ) SV) SV ON LSV%. Also at the end of SV ON DELAY(SP) with set point as AI-01 SP <= (HOT GAS SV) SV ON SP
It turns off when the setting point is AI-15 LSV > (HOT GAS SV) SV OFF LSV%.
(SV ON LSV% setting point < SV OFF LSV% set point)
Economizer/Intercooler YOSAKU Expansion Valve output
( I/CY ) For capacity control, PID control is performed as the control target is AI-09 IP (intermediate pressure).
In addition if MOTORIZED VALVE is set as EXPANSION VALVES, it assigned not as digital output but as analog
output (INTERMEDIATE SUPERHEAT CONTROL PID OUT) (Extension analog output board is required.)
Oil Pump operating command output
( OILP ) It allocates it when setting to W/ 2-OIL PUMPS with OIL PUMP, and setting it to LEAD Y14/LAG Y01 with OIL
DO-21 PUMP LEAD/LAG. Refer to oil pump operation command output DO-02 [OILP].
Oil Pump2 operating command output
( O/P2 ) It allocates it when setting to W/ 2-OIL PUMPS with OIL PUMP, and setting it to LEAD Y01/LAG Y14 with OIL
PUMP LEAD/LAG. Refer to oil pump operation command output DO-02 [O/P2].
Oil Drain Solenoid Valve output
( OILD )
Refer to oil heater output DO-09 [OILD]
Batch Alarm(ALARM) output
It is batch alarm (ALARM) output. (Options, Normal Close and Normal Open, are available.)
MT-DIO4 -01
DO-22 ( ALRM )
When there are both of ALARM and FAILURE ( Expect superheat and OIL FILTER alarm), ALARM is not out put
if set points of ALARM and FAILURE are same values.(FAILURE is out put)
(High stage)Capacity "LOAD" Solenoid Valve output
( HILD )
For capacity control, PID control is performed as the control target is AI-09 IP (intermediate pressure)
DO-23 ( EVS2 ) During turning on DI-12 [MSRB], it turns on when the set point is AI-15 LSV >= 2ND LIQUID SUPPLY ON LSV%,
it turns off when the set point is AI-15 LSV <= 2ND LIQUID SUPPLY OFF LSV%.
(2ND LIQUID SUPPLY ON LSV% set point> 2ND LIQUID SUPPLY OFF LSV% set point.)
Vi slide (L/H port) "Load" Solenoid Valve output
( LHLD )
(High stage)Capacity "UNLOAD" Solenoid Valve output
( HIUL )
Refer to (High stage) capacity loading solenoid valve out put DO-05 [HILD].
DO-24 Chiller YOSAKU Expansion Valve output-1(J)
( EVPY ) PID control is performed by selected any follow control targets. The minimum value of their PID control outputs is
Suction superheat, AI-01 SP Suction pressure, AI-14 LBT Chiller leaving brine temperature

- 134 -
QT1101-13
PID control is performed by selected any follow control targets. The minimum value of their PID control outputs is
( EVY2 ) controlled as the output value.
Suction superheat, AI-01 SP Suction pressure, AI-14 LBT Chiller leaving brine temperature.
The difference of the control cycles of the outputs and "EXP. VALVE (**) CONTROL (SETPOINTS)" is half –cycle.
Vi slide (L/H port) "Unload" Solenoid Valve output
( LHUL )
Condenser operation output-1(VFD)

In that case control target is set as AI-02 DP (discharge pressure): (START #* set point < STOP #* )
( CND1 ) During turning on of DI-12 [MSRB], it turns on when AI-02 DP >= START #*, it turns off when AI-02 DP <= STOP #* .
DO-25 In that case control target is set asAI-11 SDP (system discharge pressure):
During turning on of DI-12 [MSRB], it turns on when AI-11 SDP >= START #*, It turns off when AI-11 SDP <= STOP #*.
The control method is selected from ON-OFF SINGLE SET or ON-OFF MULTI SET
Auxiliary Machine Start command output

( AUX )
It turns ON after completing the operating condition. It turns off 15 seconds later of the turning off DI-12 [MSRB].
Condenser operating output-2
( CND2 )
Refer to condenser operating output-1DO-25 [CND1].
DO-26
Vi slide (M-port) "Drain" Solenoid Valve output
( MPLD )
It is assigned depending on the options (AUTO Vi CONTROL, USE DO19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D).
MT-DIO4 -01
Condenser operation output-3

( CND3 )
Refer to condenser operating output-1 DO-25 [CND1].
DO-27
Vi slide (M-port) "Plug" Solenoid Valve output
( MPUL )
It is assigned depending on the options (AUTO Vi CONTROL, USE DO19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D).
( CND4 )
Vi Slide Valve Bypass Solenoid Valve output
( SVBP )
It is assigned depending on the options (AUTO-Vi CONTROL, USE DO19, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D).
DO-28 Liquid Injection YOSAKU Expansion Valve output-2
PID Control is performed depending on either selected control target of below options.
( IJY2 ) AI-02 DP Discharge pressure, discharged superheat calculated value
In addition if MOTORIZED VALVE is set as INJECTION VALVES, it assigned not as digital output but as analog
output (LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL PID OUT) (Extension analog output board is required.)
The difference of the control cycles of the output and "EXP. VALVE (**) CONTROL (SETPOINTS)" is half –cycle.
( CND5 )
Vi slide (L/H port) "Load" Solenoid Valve output
( LHLD )
DO-29 During turning on of DI-12 [MSRB],
( EVS3 ) it turns on when it turns on when the set point is AI-15 LSV >= 3RD LIQUID SUPPLY ON LSV%,
it turns off when it turns off when the set point is AI-15 LSV <=3RD LIQUID SUPPLY OFF LSV%.
(3RD LIQUID SUPPLY ON LSV% set point < 3RD LIQUID SUPPLY OFF LSV% set point.)
Extension DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD
Ready to Start
( RDY ) It allocates when there is not allocating the above-mentioned.
In "Running" or "not anti cycle", when "Warning has not been generated" and "The DI-13 interlock is turned on", it
turns on.
( CND6 )
MT-DIO2 -01

Vi slide (L/H port) "Unload" Solenoid Valve output
( LHUL )
Chiller YOSAKU Expansion Valve output-2 (J)
( EVY2 )
DO-30 Refer to Chiller YOSAKU Expansion Valve output-2 DO-24.
PID control is performed by selected any follow control targets. Their minimum value of PID control output is
( EVY3 ) Suction superheat, AI-01 SP suction pressure, AI-14 LBT Chiller leaving brine temperature
In addition if MOTORIZED VALVE is set as EXPANSION VALVES, it assigned not as digital output but as analog
output (SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 CONTROL PID OUT ) (Extension analog output board is required.)
The control cycle of the output is as same cycle as "CONTROL CYCLE" of "EXP. VALVE (**) CONTROL
(SETPOINTS)".
Remote Capacity "LOAD" command input
DI-31 ( RMLD )
It allows to load the capacity at a distance on the LOAD command of digital input.
Remote Capacity "UNLOAD" command input
DI-32 ( RMUL )
It allows to unload the capacity at a distance on the LOAD command of digital input.

- 135 -
QT1101-13
4.3 Types of Alarm/Failure and Judgment condition
The detectable names and types of Alarm/failure on MYPRO TOUCH system, they are categorized as follow.
The displayed Number on ‘ALARM LOG’ and ‘FAILURE LOG’ screens are shown as ALARM/FAILURE CODE No. in the below
table.
[ ALARM : minor ]
ALARM
/FAILURE ALARM Name Description
CODE No.
dOP LOW
At the time, the alarm set point status keeps 10 seconds as dOP <= LOW OP
47 (Oil supply differential pressure (dOP=OP-DP
after DO-02 [OILP] turns on.
or OP-SP))
(Except OIL FEED TYPE is FULL LUBE)

dP LOW At the time when the alarm set point status keeps 90 seconds as dP <= LOW dP
48
(Differential pressure (dP=AFP-SP or AFP-IP)) at the end of dP MASK TIME after turning on DI-12 [MSRB] or after the
confirmation of the differential pressure rising.
When the alarm set point status is DP >= HIGH DP during turning on DI-12
49 DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH
[MSRB], it is issued immediately.
When the alarm set point status is DT >= HIGH DT during turning on DI-12
50 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH
When the alarm set point status is OT >= HIGH OT during turning on DI-12
51 OIL SUPPLY TEMPERATURE HIGH
At the time, 60 seconds later turning on DI-12 [MSRB] and then the alarm set
52 COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT HIGH
point status keeps 6 seconds as MA >= HIGH MA.
At the time, 3 minutes later turning on DI-12 [MSRB] and then the alarm set point
53 INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE HIGH
status keeps 20 seconds as IP >= HIGH IP
At the time, the alarm set point status keeps LOW SP ALARM DELAY period as
54 SUCTION PRESSURE LOW
SP <= LOW SP at the end of LOW SP MASK TIME after DI-12 [MSRB] turns on.
When DI-12 [MSRB] is turning on and the alarm set point is LBT <= LOW LB, it is
55 LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE LOW
issued immediately.
At the time, the capacity does not decrees to 5% or less even DO-04 [UNLD]
keeps ON status for 3 minutes after DO-02 [OILP] turns on.
56 CAPACITY NO DOWN ("OVER RANGE" is out put ahead of ALARM issuing when the default setting is
60 seconds because the judgment time of "CAPACITY NO DOWN" ALARM is
fixed as 3 minutes.)
When the alarm set point keeps its status for 30 seconds as SSH <= LOW SSH
after the liquid supply control starts. In addition, if ALARM auto cancellation is
57 SUCTION SUPERHEAT LOW
available, it is canceled when the alarm set point keeps its status for 15 seconds
as SSH >= LOW SSH CANCEL after issuing ALARM.
OIL FILTER
When DI-12 [MSRB] turns on and the alarm set point status keeps OF ALARM
58 (After filter differential pressure
DELAY period as dFP >= HIGH OF.
(dFP=DP-AFP))
At the time, after turning on DO-02 [OILP] and checking dOP, the capacity does
not decrees to 5% or less after the COMP. RE-START DELAY period and then
59 RE-START the capacity decreases to 5% or less during ALARM > RE- START/ TIME.
(At this time, start INTERVAL timer and the timing of next operation is after the
INTERVAL.)
At the time, DO-06 [HIUL] keeps its status ON for 10 minutes when the
compressor is running. In addition, when DO-05 [HILD] keeps its status ON for
10 minutes during running of the compressor.
60 HIGH STAGE
("OVER RANGE" is out put ahead of ALARM issuing when it is set ass the
default (60 seconds) because the judgment time of "HIGH STAGE"ALARM is
fixed as 10 minutes.)
When, 3 minutes later turning DI-12 [MSRB] on and the alarm set point keeps its
61 INTERMEDIATE SUPERHEAT LOW
status for 30 seconds as ISH <= LOW ISH.

- 136 -
QT1101-13
ALARM
/FAILURE ALARM Name Description
CODE No.
When DI-12 [MSRB] turns on and the alarm set point status is EBT <= LOW EB,
62 ENTERING BRINE TEMPERATURE LOW
alarm is issued immediately.
When the alarm set point status is OS <= LOW OS after DI-12 [MSRB] is turns on
63 SEPARATOR OIL TEMPERATURE LOW
and then after the dP MASK TIME, alarm is issued immediately.
(Only for 400 Series)

dOP2 LOW
At the time, after DO-02 [OILP] turns on, the alarm set point keeps its status for
64 (Oil supply differential pressure 2
10 seconds as dOP2 <= LOW OP2 and then DI-12 [MSRB] still turns on, alarm is
(dOP2=SVOP-DP))
issued.
When the alarm set point keeps its status for 30 seconds as SSH2 <= LOW
SSH2 after liquid supply control starts. In addition, if ALARM auto cancellation is
65 SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 LOW
available, it is automatically canceled when the alarm set point keeps it status for
15 seconds as SSH2 >= LOW SSH2 CANCEL after issuing ALARM.
When Vi slide valve position is not proper position.

(Running when the state that low stage slide valve position (LSV%) continues for
66 AUTO Vi SLIDE
30 seconds by 100% or more occurs three times within about 54 minutes, it is
generated. )
FINE FILTER
When DI-12 [MSRB] turns on, the alarm set point keeps its status for FF DELAY
67 (Fine filter differential pressure
period as dFFP(DP - AFFP) >=HIGH FF.
(dFFP=DP-AFFP))
When the alarm set point keeps its status for DELAY period as DSH <= LOW
68 DISCHARGE SUPERHEAT LOW
DSH after DI-12 [MSRB] turns on and after LOW DSH MASK TIME.
When the alarm set point keeps its status for HIGH SP DELAY period as
69 SUCTION PRESSURE HIGH
SP >=HIGH SP after DI-12 [MSRB] turns on.
When the alarm set point keeps its status for HIGH ST DELAY period as
70 SUCTION TEMPERATURE HIGH
ST >=HIGH ST after DI-12 [MSRB] turns on.
When the alarm set point keeps its status for DELAY period as LVL <= LOW
71 CHILLER LIQUID LEVEL LOW CHILLER LEVEL after DI-12 [MSRB] turns on and at the end of LOW CHILLER
LEVEL MASK TIME.
When the command from MASTER station cannot be received at AUTO STAGE
72 AUTO STAGE NO REQUEST
– SLAVE station.
When the responses from SLAVE station address *(1 to 8) cannot be received at
73 to 80 AUTO STAGE LIST* NO RESPONSE
AUTO STAGE – MASTER station.
81 to 88 OPTION ANALOG INPUT1 LOW/HIGH The ALARM can be issued depends on a setting.

- 137 -
QT1101-13
[ FAILURE : Serious ]
ALARM
/FAILURE FAILURE Name Description
CODE No.
- At the time of compressor starting, DI-12 [MSRB] does not turn on within
COMP. MSRB (Starting) setting time after DO-01 [COMP] turns on.
- When DI-12 [MSRB] keeps the status as OFF over COMP. MSRB (Running)
setting time during compressor operating.
89 START FAIL - At the time compressor has stopped, DI-12 [MSRB] does not turn off at the end
of COMP. MSRB(Stopping) setting time after DO-01 [COMP] turns off
- When the capacity does not decrease 5 % or less at the end of COMP.
RE-START DELAY after DO-02 [OILP] turns on also the capacity does not
decrease 5 % or less at the end of RE-START/TIMEOUT.
dOP LOW
When the alarm setting keeps its status for 30 seconds as dOP <= LOW OP after
90 (Oil supply differential pressure (dOP=OP-DP
or OP-SP)) DI-12 [MSRB] turns on.
(Except FULL LUBE of OIL FEED TYPE)

dP LOW When the alarm setting keeps its status for 2 minutes as dP <= LOW dP after
91
(Differential pressure (dP=AFP-SP or AFP-IP))
DI-12 [MSRB] turns on at the end of dP MASK TIME or after checking dP rising.
92 DISCHARGE PRESSURE HIGH When the alarm setting is DP >= HIGH DP, alarm is issuing immediately.
93 DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE HIGH When the alarm setting is DT >= HIGH DT, alarm is issuing immediately.
94 OIL SUPPLY TEMPERATURE HIGH When the alarm setting is OT >= HIGH OT, alarm is issuing immediately.
At the time 60 seconds later DI-12 [MSRB] turns on, the alarm setting keeps its
95 COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT HIGH
status for 10 seconds as MA >= HIGH MA.
OIL FILTER When the alarm setting keeps its status for OF FAILURE DELAY period as
96 (After filter differential pressure
dFP >= HIGH OF during turning on DI-12 [MSRB].
(dFP=DP-AFP))
When DI-14 [ITL2] keeps its status OFF for INTERLOCK2 setting time after OIL
97 INTERLOCK-2
PUMP START DELAY period.
98 EMERGENCY STOP When DI-11 [EMGC] keeps its status OFF for 1 second.
When DI-15 [OLVH] keeps its status OFF for 30 seconds during the running of
99 OIL LEVEL LOW
the compressor.
At the time , 3 minutes later DI-12 [MSRB] turns on, the alarm setting keeps its
100 FINE FILTER
status FF ≧ HIGH FF for FF FAILURE DELAY period.
At the time , 3 minutes later DI-12 [MSRB] turns on, the alarm setting keeps its
101 INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE HIGH
status as FF >= HIGH FF for 30 seconds.
When the DI-13 [ITL1] keeps its status OFF for INTERLOCK setting time during
102 INTERLOCK
turning on DI-12 [MSRB] or DO-01 [COMP].
When DI-12 [MSRB] turns on and the alarm set point status is LBT <= LOW LB,
103 LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE LOW
alarm is issued immediately.
When the DI-15 [ITL3] keeps its status OFF for INTERLOCK3 setting time after
104 INTERLOCK-3 completing compressor-operating condition (no CHLP) or during "turning on
DO-19 [CHIP]” (with CHLP).
When the alarm setting keeps its status as SP <= LOW SP for SP ALARM
105 SUCTION PRESSURE LOW DELAY(FAILURE ) setting time at the end of SP MASK TIME after DI-12 [MSRB]
turns on.
When the sensor process value keeps its status as the upper limit (95% or more)
106 SUCTION PRESSURE OVER RANGE for FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of FAILURE MASK TIME after DI-12
[MSRB] turns on.
When the sensor process value keeps its status as the lower limit (5% or less) for
107 DISCHARGE PRESSURE UNDER RANGE FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of FAILURE MASK TIME after DI-12
[MSRB] turns on.
108 OIL SUPPLY PRESSURE OVER RANGE for FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of FAILURE MASK TIME after DI-12
[MSRB] turns on.

- 138 -
QT1101-13
ALARM
FAILURE Name Description
/FAILURE
CODE No.
109 OIL FILTER PRESSURE OVER RANGE for FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of FAILURE MASK TIME after DI-12
[MSRB] turns on.
When the sensor process value keeps its status as the upper limit (95% or more )
SUCTION TEMPERATURE
110 or the lower limit (5% or less ) for FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of
UNDER/OVER RANGE
FAILURE MASK TIME after DI-12 [MSRB] turns on.
When the sensor process value keeps its status as the lower limit (5% or less)
DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
111 for FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of FAILURE MASK TIME after DI-12
UNDER RANGE
[MSRB] turns on.
When the sensor process value keeps its status as the lower limit (5% or less )
OIL SUPPLY TEMPERATURE
UNDER RANGE
[MSRB] turns on.
When the sensor process value keeps its status as the lower limit (2% or less)
INTERMEDIATE PRESSURE
UNDER RANGE
[MSRB] turns on.
INTERMEDIATE TEMPERATURE
114 or the lower limit (5% or less) for FAILURE DELAY setting time at the end of
UNDER/OVER RANGE
COMPRESSOR MOTOR CURRENT
UNDER RANGE
LEAVING BRINE TEMPERATURE
OVER RANGE
When the capacity loading command keeps out putting for FAILURE DELAY
setting time with the condition that capacity is the lower limit (5% or less),
LOW SLIDE VALVE POSITION "UNDER RANGE" is issued.
117
UNDER/OVER RANGE When the capacity unloading command keeps out putting for FAILURE DELAY
setting time with the condition that capacity is the upper limit (95% or
more),"OVER RANGE" is issued.
When the capacity loading command keeps out putting for FAILURE DELAY
setting time with the condition that capacity is the lower limit (5% or less), the
HIGH SLIDE VALVE POSITION "UNDER RANGE" is issued.
118
UNDER/OVER RANGE When the capacity unloading command keeps out putting for FAILURE DELAY
setting time with the condition that capacity is the upper limit (95% or more),
"OVER RANGE" is issued.
CHILLER GAS TEMPERATURE1&2
UNDER/OVER RANGE
CHILLER GAS PRESSURE1&2
UNDER/OVER RANGE FAILURE
When the alarm set point keeps its status as SSH <= LOW SSH for LOW SSH
121 SUCTION SUPERHEAT LOW
FAILURE DELAY period after starting liquid supply control.
When the alarm set point keeps its status as SSH2 <= LOW SSH2 for LOW
122 SUCTION SUPERHEAT2 LOW
SSH2 FAILURE DELAY period after starting liquid supply control.
When the alarm set point keeps its status as SP <= HIGH SP for SP FAILURE
123 SUCTION PRESSURE HIGH
DELAY period at the end of HI SP MASK TIME after turning on DI-12 [MSRB].
When the alarm set point keeps its status as ST <= HIGH ST for ST FAILURE
124 SUCTION TEMPERATURE HIGH
DELAY period at the end of HI ST MASK TIME after turning on DI-12 [MSRB].
125 to 132 OPTION ANALOG INPUT* LOW/HIGH FAILURE can be out put depending on the setting.

- 139 -
QT1101-13
Chapter 5 : Communication
5.1 Outline of “Communication” on MYPRO TOUCH

MYPRO TOUCH has four communication ports.
Please note system construction and the connection enough, As for each communication port, each role is different.
Hardware Interface a name Use
COM1(RS-232C port) TP-COM1 Communication with External Device
Touch Panel COM2(RS-485 port) TP-COM2 System occupation (Data communication to CPU board)
Ethernet Port TP-Ether Remote watch with remote PC etc.
COM1(RS-485 port) CPU-COM1 System occupation (Data communication to Touch Panel)
CPU Board
COM2(RS-485 port) CPU-COM2 AUTO STAGE Control or Communication with External Device
CAUTION
"RS-485 port of Touch panel (TP-COM2)" and "RS-485 port of CPU board (CPU-COM1)" cannot be used
for other usages while always using it.
Fig．Communication concept chart (System configuration chart)
[ MYPRO TOUCH ]
* Protocol for Ethernet : MODBUS TCP

Ethernet PC for remote watch
Touch Panel Ethernet

Cross Cable RS-232C
for Anybus Anybus RS-422/485
External Comm. Device
COM2 COM1 or
RS-485 RS-232C Straight RS-485 (2 wire or 4 wire)
Cable Level Terminal (Modbus)
Modbus Unit
Converter Block
CPU-TP Cable
RS-485 (2 wire or 4wire)
(Modbus)
Modbus Unit
COM1 COM2 or
RS-485 RS-485 RS-485 (２ wire)
(AUTO STAGE)
[MYPRO TOUCH]
CPU Board
MT-CPU-02-A USB Communication PC
・Update Program
USB ・Read/Write Setpoints ([MYPRO TOUCH] [MYPRO TOUCH]
type-B ・Data Logging
Support Software)
* All are an options or external equipments excluding the main body of MYPRO TOUCH (above figure dotted line part).
CAUTION
Please note writing data (set value) in MYPRO TOUCH from two or more communication ports enough.
The value written at the end becomes effective.
When it keeps writing a different value from two or more communication ports in one set value, the
movement of the system might become unstable.

- 140 -
QT1101-13
5.2 Communication with External Device

MYPRO TOUCH allows to communication (sending/receiving data) with external devices using "TP-COM1" of touch panel side
(RS-232 communication port) or "TP-Ether" of touch panel side (Ethernet port).
Standard support protocol
MODBUS (TP-COM1), MODBUS TCP (TP-Ether)
Option support protocol
Profibus, Devicenet, Ethernet/IP
5.2.1 Communication System Configuration with External Equipments

MYPRO TOUCH has one RS-232C communication port at the touch panel side for the communication with external
devices.(TP-COM1)
TP-COM1 Communication initial setting TP-COM1 Connector pin configuration

(ER(DTR/CTS) Connection with no flow control))
Item Initial setting
Communication system RS232C MYPRO TOUCH TP-COM1 External connected device
Communication speed 115200[bps] 1 - CD
Parity 8[bit] 2 RD(RxD) RD(RxD)
Stop bit Even number 3 SD(TxD) SD(TxD)
Flow control None 4 ER(DTR) ER(DTR)
Transmittal weight 1[msec] 5 SG SG
Slave machine address 1 6 - DR(DSR)
7 - RS(RTS)
8 CS(CTS) CS(CTS)
9 RI RI
5.2.2 Remote Communication Device and Communication Protocols

When the remote communications device sends a “data write” or “data read” command, the MYPRO TOUCH with the specified
address in the command sends an answer. This constitutes one session of communication. (Any MYPRO TOUCH does not
voluntarily start transmission.)
Flow of data on communications line
(1) Write/read
Transmission from remote device command
Transmission from MYPRO TOUCH (2) Answer Time
Answer delay time

(1) A command is sent from remote device to MYPRO TOUCH.
(2) MYPRO TOUCH receives command and check if the command is addressed to the MYPRO TOUCH,
evaluates its content before sending back an answer. (However, when the command has error, the answer
might not be sent back.)
The arrangement between the command and answer used in (1) and (2) above is called “protocol”. Among multiple
communication protocols, MYPRO TOUCH supports the two of them: MODBUS ASCII protocol and MODBUS RTU protocol.
As both the protocols are standard protocols in industry, communications can easily be implemented without originally
programming yourself if MODBUS-compatible SCADA Software and a PLC communication unit are used.
As for MODBUS protocol that MYPRO TOUCH system supports, see Appendix 2 .

- 141 -
QT1101-13
5.3 AUTO STAGE Control

The connection MYPRO TOUCH –to –MYPRO TOUCH with COM2 (RS-485commnication port) on Central Processing Unit
board side allows to control number (AUTO STAGE) with the communication.
Setting on "SYSTEM DETAILS" as "AUTO STAGE" - "2UNITS - 8UNITS" is required for AUTO STAGE control.
AUTO STAGE allows to connect with multiple MYPRO TOUCH by multi-drop methods. One of them is assigned as a master
station (the rest are slave stations) to control number depending on the size of the load. The control target is “(System) suction
pressure”.
Start/stop operation of the compressor is controlled base on its operating time. That is why equalization of their operating time of
each compressor is expected.
5.3.1 System configuration of AUTO STAGE communication

MYPRO TOUCH has one RS-485 communication port for Auto stage. (CPU-COM2)
Using this communication port, MYPRO TOUCH can make serial communications with a remote communication device.
Serial communication for AUTO STAGE is possible among maximum 8 MYPRO TOUCHs that are connected with a bus of up to
150 meters in total length.
Conforming to the EIA 485 standard, the communication system uses a 4-wire, half-duplex system. (2-wire system is also
possible).The communication ports of the devices located at the physical ends be provided with termination resistors (these ports
are called “termination ports”).
The CPU board in each MYPRO TOUCH has a built-in termination resistor. To connect or disconnect the termination resistor,
termination switches SW3 for the CPU-COM2 port is used. Turn the switch ON to connect the termination resistor, or turn it OFF
to disconnect it.
A connection example is shown as below.

Communication for AUTO STAGE by 2-Wire
Maximum Connections 結線図150 meters in
8 MYPRO TOUCHs：
total length.
COM2 of MYPRO TOUCH 総延長
COM2 150mTOUCH
of MYPRO COM2 of MYPRO TOUCH
CPU board CPU board ・・・ CPU board

(RS485 communication port) (RS485 communication port) (RS485 communication port)
(Masrer）
Termination (Slave 1)
Termination (Slave 7)
Termination
resistor resistor resistor
connection SW1 (スレーブ 1） SW1
connection connection SW1
ON OFF ON
RD+
RD+ RD+
110Ω 110Ω 110Ω
RD- RD- RD-

Termination Termination Termination
resistor resistor resistor
connection SW2 connection SW2 connection SW2
OFF OFF OFF
SD+ SD+ SD+

110Ω 110Ω 110Ω
SD- SD- SD-
SG SG SG
FG FG FG
Shielded 6-core, 3-pair cable Shielded 6-core, 3-pair cable
CAUTION
注意
Be sure to connect the termination resistors by tuning ON their switches. This is necessary only for the physical
termination ports. Without connecting termination resistors correctly for the necessary RS-485 ports, normal
communications between the network devices is not guaranteed.
When setting the switch, move it until it clicks.

- 142 -
QT1101-13
5.3.2 Out line of number control (AUTO STAGE)
"AUTO STAGE" has aimed at a plural highly effective driving with the compressor.
Basically, capacity is fixed to the upper limit when the capacity of the lead step compressor reaches the upper limit, and capacity
is controlled with the lag(next) step compressor.
In a word, only one of compressors while always driving capacity is controlled, and other compressors are driven highly effective
by the capacity upper limit.
Moreover, to level the operating time of the compressor, a short compressor at the operation time is assumed to be a lead
compressor.
Connect controllers using communication wires, and then assigned one of them as a master (MASTER) station and assigned
others as slave (SLAVE) stations. This setting allows to number control, maximum 8 controllers, by start/stop command from the
master station.
Address (ADDRESS) setting 1 is for a master station, setting 2 to 99 are for slave stations.
Increasing or Decreasing of operating number is performed as below procedure following the order (1 is the most significant, n is
the least significant) which the master station decides.
The capacity control usually uses target (CONTROL SET POINT) of value (PV) and the mastering station by the general
situation together as set value (SV) with the sensor input of the mastering station now.
However, because the slave station drives in automatic operation (AUTO) mode when it is not possible to communicate with the
mastering station by some reasons, the sensor input of a set value of the station and the station drive/is stopped as a value now
and, in that case, capacity is controlled.
Moreover, the slave station that cannot communicate with the mastering station by an abnormal connection and the power
supply determination, etc. in the station and the communication line warning stopping is excluded from the object of the number
control.
The slave station to which warning is released and the slave station that revived the communication are "It is added automatically
to the object of the number control again. ".
In the following procedure, they stand for, MVL: Capacity control lower limit setting point, MVH: Capacity control upper limit
setting point, MVP: Stop judgment capacity (MVL < MVP < MVH)
“Number increasing process”

Pressure >= operation (CUT IN) setting points is the start cue under the condition all compressor are halting, between pressure
> goal (CONTROL SET POINT)
st
All compressor stop → Order 1 starting ~ capacity control operation
st nd
→ the capacity of order 1 reaches at MVH ~ fixes the capacity as MVH → Order 2 starting ~ capacity control operation
nd th
→ the capacity of order 2 reaches at MVH ~ fixes the capacity as MVH → Order N-1 starting~capacity control operation
th th
→ the capacity of order N-1 reaches at MVH ~ fixes the capacity as MVH → Order N starting~capacity control operation
“Number decreasing process”
During some controllers are operating, between pressure < goal (CONTROL SET POINT)
th
Order N starting~ the capacity reaches at MVL
st th
→ fix the capacity of order N-1 as MVH~capacity control operation~ the capacity reaches at MVP → order N stopping
nd
→ Capacity control of order 2 ~ the capacity reaches at MVL
st nd
→ fix the capacity of order 1 as MVH~ capacity control operation~ the capacity reaches at MVP → order 2 stopping
st
→ Capacity control operation of order 1 .
* At the any process, pressure <= stopping (CUT OUT) setting point makes all compressors are stopping

- 143 -
QT1101-13
"Operation order"
Decision procedure (LEAD LISTING) of operation order can be selected from below 3 options, MANUAL, revolutions control
lag(AUTO (VFD LAG)) and revolutions control priority AUTO (VFD PRIOR).
1/3) MANUAL
Decide operation order by registering any (ADDRESS) from controller witch is connected with the order of master station
(LIST (MANUAL)) 1 to 8 using communication wires regardless of compressor operating time and with/without revolutions
control (VFD COMPRESSOR)
2/3) Revolutions control lag (AUTO (VFD LAG))
When the control target (N units) has no compressor with revolutions control (All units have slide valve capacity control), put
the priority on the compressor whose operating time is less time. The shortest operating time compressor is ‘the top 1’, the
longest operation time compressor is ‘the bottom N’. (As a result, all compressors operation time is averaged.)
When the number control target (N units) includes a compressor with revolutions control, put the priority on the compressor
with shorter operation time and make the order of a compressor with revolutions control lower. The compressor with
revolutions control starts last and stops first. (As a result, the operating time of the compressor with revolutions control is
shorter.)
3/3) Revolutions control lag priority (AUTO (VFD PRIOR))
When the condition is same as 2/3) Revolutions control lag (AUTO (VFD LAG)) , the procedure is also same way as 2/3) .
When the number control target (N units) includes compressors with revolutions control, put the priority on the compressor
with shorter operating time. On the process of number increasing, put the priority on a stopping compressor with revolutions
control to make it start first.
After the starting, when the revolutions reach at MVH, start a compressor without revolutions control to change the order.
Capacity of the starting compressor without revolutions control is fixed MVH forcedly, a compressor that had been fixed
MVH, performs revolutions control by pressure. Repeat that to increase operation unit number.
On the number decrease process, at first the top order compressor without revolutions control starts capacity control by
pressure from capacity MVH fixed condition after the revolutions of the lowest order compressor with revolutions control
reaches MVL. Then, when its capacity reaches at MVP, stop the compressor without revolutions control.
The compressor, which had been fixed its revolutions at MVL until then, starts revolutions control by pressure.
Repeat that to decrease operating unit number. (As a result, whole of capacity is always controlled by revolutions, and
operating time of whole capacity of compressors with revolutions control is getting longer.)
* When the control target (N units) has no compressor with revolutions control (all of the compressors are controlled by slide
valve control), same behavior is performed with the both selections of Revolutions control lag (AUTO (VFD LAG)) and
Revolutions control lag priority (AUTO (VFD PRIOR)).

- 144 -
QT1101-13
Example of the option ‘Revolutions control lag priority (AUTO (VFD PRIOR))’ for one compressor with VFD and others with 2
SLV (slide valve)
In the follow table, ‘time short’ means the operating time is short, ‘time long’ means the operation time is long.
Pressure status Order [1] [2] [3] Operation of start/stop and order
Time short SLV Time long SLV

Pressure < CUT IN ALL Stop VFD(0% stop) Set VFD as the top order tentatively.
(0% stop) (0% stop)
Pressure > CUT IN 1 unit run VFD(<MVH) ↓ ↓ ↓
The second compressor start is required when
Pressure > CONTROL ↓ VFD(=MVH) ↓ ↓
PID of VFD reaches at MVH.
Time short SLV Switch the order of time short SLV and VFD order
↓ 2 units run VFD(=MVH) ↓
(<MVH) immediately after starting the time short SLV.
Time short SLV is increased forcedly by when it
↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(<MVH) ↓ reaches at MVH. As for VFD, depending on PID
calculation.
Time short SLV
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(=MVH)
The third compressor start is required when PID

↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(=MVH) ↓
of VFD reaches at MVH.
Time long SLV Switch the order of time long SLV and VFD order
↓ 3 units run ↓ VFD(=MVH)
(<MVH) immediately after starting the time long SLV.
Time long SLV is increased forcedly by when it
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(<MVH) reaches at MVH. As for VFD, depending on PID
calculation.
Time short SLV
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
(=MVH)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(=MVH) ↓
Pressure < CONTROL ↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(<MVH) ↓
When PID of the lowest VFD reaches at MVL, the
Time long SLV
↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(=MVL) next upper order time long SLV starts PID
(<MVH)
calculation.
Time long SLV When PID of time long SLV reaches at stop
↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(=MVL)
(<Stop setting) setting switch the order of it and VFD order.
Time long SLV Stopping Time long SLV of the lowest order is
↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(=MVL)
(< Stop setting) required.
Time long SLV is decreased forcedly by when it
↓ ↓ ↓ VFD(<MVH) ↓ reaches at 0%. As for VFD, depending on PID
calculation.
Time long SLV
↓ 2 units run ↓ ↓
(0% stop)
When PID of the lowest VFD reaches at MVL, the
Time short SLV
↓ ↓ VFD(=MVL) ↓ next upper order time long SLV starts PID
(< MVH)
calculation.
Time short SLV When PID of time short SLV reaches at stop
↓ ↓ VFD(=MVL) ↓
(< Stop setting) setting switch the order of it and VFD order.
Time short SLV Stopping Time short SLV of the lowest order is
↓ ↓ VFD(= MVL) ↓
(< Stop setting) required.
Time short SLV is decreased forcedly by when it
↓ ↓ VFD(< MVH) ↓ ↓ reaches at 0%. As for VFD, depending on PID
calculation.
Time short SLV
↓ 1 unit run ↓ ↓
(0% stop)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Pressure < CUT OUT ↓ VFD(0% stop) ↓ ↓

- 145 -
QT1101-13
Chapter 6 : Troubleshooting
This chapter contains several conditions that may suggest failures or other problems with MYPRO TOUCH and the actions we
recommend you to take when these conditions occur.
(1) Nothing is displayed on the touch panel screen.

→ • MYPRO TOUCH has the function of automatically turning off the backlight to prevent LCD from burning and
increase its life.
By default, the backlight is automatically turned off if no operation is performed on the touch panel for 10 minutes.
Press any key on the touch panel to turn on the backlight again.
• MYPRO TOUCH has a power indicator light at the right center part of the touch panel. When this light is out,
check its power supply line and power supply voltage just in case there is no power supply from the Control Box.
Check power supply line and power supply voltage.
(2) Display remains dark (backlight is not lit)

→ • MYPRO TOUCH has the function of automatically turning off the backlight to prevent LCD from burning and
increase its life.
By default, the backlight is automatically turned off if no operation is performed on the touch panel for 10 minutes.
Touch the touch panel to turn on the backlight again.
• MYPRO TOUCH has a power indicator light at the right center part of the touch panel. When this light is out,
check its power supply line and power supply voltage just in case there is no power supply from the Control Box.
Check power supply line and power supply voltage.
• Check whether the backlight’s life (30,000 to 50,000 hours, about 5 years under continuous lighting) has expired
or not.
(3) The CPU light (an LED regularly blinking to indicate normal state) does not blink.
→ • Check that 24V DC power is supplied to J4 on the CPU board.
• Check the wiring to the circuit breaker and noise filter has no defects and the power voltage is correct.
(4) The displayed process value (PV) of the pressure sensors differ from the actual pressure values (pressure gauge readings
etc.)
→ • Check that the pressure sensor and its wiring have no defects.
• Check that the scaling for displaying the process value is set correctly.
(The scaling is set in the ‘ANALOG INPUT SCALING’ screen on the “SYSTEM CONFIGURATION”.)
• If the displayed process value noticeably gap from the actual values, you can enter an appropriate offset value to
make the displayed values close to the actual pressure values.
(5) The displayed PV of the temperature sensors differ from the actual temperature values (thermometer readings etc.)
→ • Check that the temperature sensors and their wiring have no defects.
(The scaling is set in the ‘ANALOG INPUT SCALING’ screen on “SYSTEM CONFIGURATION”.)
• If the displayed process noticeably gap from the actual values, you can enter an appropriate offset value to make
the displayed values closer to the actual temperature values
(6) The displayed PV of the current sensor differ from the actual Process values.
→ • Check that the jumper pins of the CT sensor are in the correct (removed) state.
• Check that the CT sensor winding is correct in number of coils (twice).
(The scaling is set in the ‘ANALOG INPUT SCALING’ screen on “SYSTEM CONFIGURATION”.)
• If the displayed process values noticeably gap from the actual values, you can enter an appropriate offset value
to make the displayed values closer to the actual Process values.
(Use the “Setting: ANALOG INPUT SCALING”)

- 146 -
QT1101-13
(7) Process values respond to changes too slowly or too fast

→ • To make the response faster, decrease the ‘FILTER COEFFICIENT’ value. (Use the “ Setting : ANALOG INPUT
ADJUSTMENT”.)
NOTE:
Making the response time too short increases effects of noise.
• To make the response slower, increase the ‘FILTER COEFFICIENT’ value. (Use the “ Setting : ANALOG INPUT
ADJUSTMENT”.)
NOTE:
Making the response time too long results in too slow reactions.
(8) Settings cannot be changed.

→ • Entry of a password of the required level is needed to change settings. Make sure you have entered the required
password correctly.
• Some items of setting have limitations. Enter only values within the permitted range.
• Touch the ENTER switch to complete a change to any setting.
(9) The compressor does not run.

→ • Check the operation control mode you have selected in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen. The way to give
operation commands to the compressor varies depending on the selected operation control mode.
• The compressor does not start running until the operation start delay time elapses after the compressor
operation conditions (operation command etc.) are satisfied.
• Check that the compressor start command has turned ON at DO-01(Y00).
• Check that ‘YES’ is selected for ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’ in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen of the Control
Summary.
• If you make a selection to enable an item that requires installation of an optional extension board in the ‘System
Configuration’ screen without actually installing that board, MYPRO TOUCH issues, for the sake of safety, an
EMERGENCY STOP FAILURE alarm that cannot be cancelled with the CLEAR ALARM switch and disables
operation of the compressor. In this case, do either of the following:
- Install the optional extension board.
- Disable the item that requires installation of the optional extension board.
• The compressor has been stopped by touching the STOP switch.
If the compressor has been stopped by touching the STOP switch, different action should be taken according to
the operation control mode selected at that time to recover operation of the compressor.
- When the STOP switch has been touched while the operation command is ON with a mode other than the
‘AUTO STAGE’ selected for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen of the Control
Summary, the operation control mode automatically changes to ‘LOCAL’. In this case, you must reselect the
desired operation control mode for the ‘OPERATION’ item and then turn ON the operation command.
- When the STOP switch has been touched with ‘AUTO STAGE’ selected for ‘OPERATION’ and ‘ENABLE’
selected for the ‘CONTROL’ item, ‘ENABLE’ automatically changes to ‘DISABLE’. To resume the automatic
staging control (AUTO STAGE), you must reselect ‘ENABLE’ for the ‘CONTROL’ item in the ‘AUTO STAGE’
screen and then turn ON the operation command.
• The CPU is reset by such action as turning power ON while ‘BATTERY ALARM’ is displayed on the top of the
“Status Display Screen”.
If a run-down time clock battery is detected when the CPU is reset during power-up operation or the like, MYPRO
TOUCH will be in the status “stopping control program status” for safety’s sake, which prevents the compressor
from operating.
See section of Replacement of time clock battery to replace normal voltage battery.

- 147 -
QT1101-13
(10) Capacity control does not take place.

→ • ‘MANUAL’ is selected for ‘OPERATION’ of the capacity controller.
• Selection made for ‘OPERATION’ of the capacity controller is not ‘AUTO’ but any of the following:
‘MANUAL’ (capacity “load”/“unload” commands are given through switch operations on touch panel); ‘REMOTE
DIGITAL’ (capacity “load”/“unload” commands are given by digital inputs from an external device); ‘REMOTE
ANALOG’ (capacity “load”/“unload ” commands are given by external analog inputs); ‘COMM’ (capacity is
determined according to commands from remote master station through communications)
• The capacity control limiter function is working.
While the limiter function is active, ‘LIMIT’ or ‘UNLOAD’ is displayed in white characters for each of the limiter
operation indications ‘MA’, ‘DP’, ‘SP’, and ‘IP’ in the ‘CAPACITY CONTROL’ screen on the Main Status Screen.
(While the function is not working, these indications are displayed in gray.)
• Settings in the ‘SLIDE VALVE Calibration’ screen are incorrect.
If the settings made in the ‘SLIDE VALVE Calibration’ screen of ‘Setting’ are incorrect, the unloader slide valve
position cannot be detected correctly.
See Section 3.4.3.4 SLIDE VALVE CARIBIRATION to make settings correctly.
(11) The compressor fails to stop.

→ • Check the mode set for ‘OPERATION’ in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen of ‘Control Summary’. The
compressor stopping method varies depending on the selected operation control mode.
• Check that the compressor operation command sent through communications from the remote device is not ON.
(12) “BATTERY ALARM” is displayed at the top of the “status display” screen.
→ • The battery for time clock is weak.
See section of Replacement of battery for time clock to replace battery correctly.
Even if this alarm is not displayed, replace the battery every three years.
If a run-down memory backup battery is detected when the CPU is reset during power-up operation or the like,
MYPRO TOUCH will be the status ‘ Control program stop status’ for safety’s sake, which prevents the
compressor from operating.
(If a power failure occurs while this alarm is displayed, the settings in memory may not be backed up.)
(13) D/O TEST OPERATION cannot be enabled.

→ • Check that ‘YES’ is selected for ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’ in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen of ‘Control
Summary’.
• To make ‘YES’ selectable for ‘D/O TEST OPERATION’, check the following in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen:
‘OPERATION MODE’ - ‘LOCAL’
‘AUTO START/STOP’ - ‘NO’
Operation confirmation input (MSRB) at DI-12 (X0B) - OFF
(14) ‘OPERATION’ changes to ‘LOCAL’ unintentionally.

→ • STOP switch has been touched.
If the STOP switch is touched when the operation mode is other than ‘AUTO STAGE’, the operation mode
changes to the ‘LOCAL’ mode automatically.
In this case, reselect the desired mode for the ‘OPERATION’ item in the ‘OPERATION MODE’ screen.
• ‘Change to LOCAL MODE’ is selected for the ‘OPERATION MODE ON FAILURE’ item in the ‘SYSTEM SETUP’
screen.
If “FAILURE” (serious alarm) occurs, MYPRO TOUCH automatically switches the operation mode to ‘LOCAL’.
• ‘Change to LOCAL STOP’ is selected for the ‘OPERATION MODE RESTORE ON POWER UP’ item in the
‘SYSTEM SETUP’ screen,
When the CPU is reset during power-up operation or by other causes, MYPRO TOUCH automatically put itself in
a stopped state in the ‘LOCAL’ mode.

- 148 -
QT1101-13
(15) Even when emergency stop input at DI11 (X0A) is ON, pressing the CLEAR ALARM switch cannot clear EMERGENCY
STOP FAILURE alarm.
→ • An item which requires installing an optional extension board is enabled in the ‘SYSTEM CONFIGURATION’
screen without actually installing the board.
Depending on the setting item, MYPRO TOUCH may issue an EMERGENCY STOP FAILURE alarm, for
safety’s sake, which is not canceled by CLEAR ALARM switch, to disable operation.
In this case, take either of the following actions.
- Install the optional extension board.
- Disable the item that requires installing an optional extension board.
(16) In the ‘SLIDE VALVE CALIBRATION’ screen, display does not advance and entry for adjusting the unloader slide valve
position cannot be completed.
→ • The requirement for the large-small relationship of the analog inputs (showing unloader slide valve positions) are
not satisfied for the correction processing.
- No signal change occurs even when the unloader slide valve moves unless the switches for selecting the
signal source for slide valve position detection (potentiometers, 4 to 20 mA DC, or 1 to 5 V DC) on the
MYPRO TOUCH’s CPU board and analog input board are not correctly set. In this case, the switches must
be set correctly according to Section ‘2.3 Analog input board MT-AD-02.
- The 0 %-position analog input becomes larger than the 100 %-position analog input (the inputs reverse) if
the connections of terminals 1 and 3 are reversed on the potentiometer for detecting the unloader slide valve
position or the potentiometer is installed at a wrong angle.
In this case, perform any of the following.
• Correct the installation angle of the potentiometer.
• Reconnect the potentiometer terminals (1 and 3 ) correctly
- The difference between the 0 %-position and 100 %-position analog inputs may become extremely small if
the potentiometer for detecting the unloader slide valve position is has defect or at a wrong angle, or if it is
connected to the analog input terminals improperly.
In this case, replace the potentiometer if it is defective, correct its installation and correct potentiometer’s
connection to the analog input terminals.

- 149 -
QT1101-13
Chapter 7 : Specifications
7.1 MYPRO TOUCH Specification

Absolute Maximum Rating
Power supply voltage DC 19.2 to 28.8 V
Working temperature 0 °C to 55 °C
Storage temperature -10°C to 70 °C
Ambient humidity 85 % RH or less (no condensation is permitted)
Ambient vibration 1.0G in X-, Y-, and Z-axes
Power line Noise voltage: 1,500 V, noise width: 100 ns 1µs for 5 minutes
Endurance to noise I/O line Noise voltage: 1,000 V, noise width: 100 ns 1µs for 5 minutes
Communication Line Noise voltage: 500 V, noise width: 50 ns for 5 minutes
1,000 VAC for 1 minute (between power terminal and connection terminal)
Withstand voltage
500 VAC for 1 minute (between input/output terminal and connection terminal)
500 VDC 20 MΩ or more (between power terminal and connection terminal)

Insulation resistance
500 VDC 20 MΩ or more (between input/output terminal and connection terminal)
If voltages exceeding the absolute maximum rating are applied, the equipment may suffer permanent damage.
If the equipment is left under the absolute maximum rating conditions for a long time, its reliability may be deteriorated.
Recommended Operating Conditions

Power supply voltage DC 24V
Working temperature 5 °C to 50 °C
Ambient humidity 70 % RH or less (no condensation is tolerated)
Ambient atmosphere Free from corrosive gas and heavy dust
Inputs/ Outputs
4 to 20 mA DC (input impedance: 250 Ω)
Standard: 16 points
Input sensor or, 1 to 5 VDC (input impedance: 100 kΩ) (Switching
Maximum: 32 points
Analog inputs by a switch is possible)
Potentiometer inputs
1 kΩ potentiometer input Maximum: 2 points
(A/D Ch.15B, 16B)
*2
Display unit: MPa
2 *2
*1
Display unit: kgf/cm
Pressure *2
Display unit: bar
*2
Display unit: PSI
Measurement *2
Display unit: ºC
range *1 *2
Temperature Display unit: ºF
*2
Display unit: K
*2
Current Display unit: A
Capacity Display unit: % 0 to 100%
Measurement accuracy ±0.5 % / full-scale (sensor errors not included)
Sensor power supply 24 VDC (supplied from external 24 VDC power supply to analog input board)
Solid state relay Standard: 10 points

Switch output
(AC load 100~240V, 1.2A or DC load 5~24V, 2.0A) Maximum: 24 points
Contacts
No-voltage contact connection Standard: 6 points
Switch input
(internally supplied 12 V at Max. 25 mA DC) Maximum: 8 points
Sampling frequency 250 msec
(Option) analog output 4 to 20mA DC (at load resistance of 500 Ω or less) 4 points
*1 Display units can be selected in the ‘SYSTEM DETAILS’ screen.
*2 Ranges can freely scaled in the ‘ANALOG INPUT SCALING’ screen.

- 150 -
QT1101-13
Central Processing Unit board Assembly specification

CPU board
200[MHz]
CPU Clock
(φ=25[MHz], Iφ=200[MHz], Bφ=100[MHz], Pφ=33.333[MHz])
Program memory area Flash Memory (8[Mbyte])
Working memory area SDRAM (32[Mbyte]) x 2 pcs.
Setting points memory area EEPROM (128[kbit])
Clock function(RTC IC + primary battery(CR2032) + condenser)

Around 1 minute backup is possible without a battery.
Other functions Low battery detection
Power fail detection
Watchdog timer installed
Communication
RS-485 standard conformity(RD+, RD-, SD+, SD-, SG, FG)
Interface COM1, COM2
(* COM1 is occupied by the communication of the touch panel.)
Communication
COM1, COM2 4-wire half-duplex (2-wire system is also usable for communications.)
system
Synchronization method Asynchronous communication method
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps
Communication speed (bit/sec) (The total bit rates of all communication ports must be less than 192,000
bps.)
Start bit Fixed to 1 bit
Character bit 7 or 8 bits
Character format
Parity bit N (none), O (odd), or E (even)
Stop bit 1 or 2 bits
Parity check: Yes (odd/even) or No
Signal transmission error detection CRC-16: Fixed to Yes (in only RTU mode of MODBUS protocol)
LRC: Fixed to Yes (in only ASCII mode of MODBUS protocol)
Transmission distance Up to 150 m in total
Communication protocol MODBUS protocol RTU mode (BINARY code)
(Communication code) MODBUS protocol ASCII mode (ASCII code)
Others
Protective
Between contact output electrodes Circuit protector: Thermal tripping system, rated current 2 A
component
EEPROM
Storage of set points Clock data: Backed up by time clock battery (CR2032).
(Recommended battery replacement interval: 3 years)
Power consumption 50W Max. (The touch panel doesn't include. )

MYPRO TOUCH CPU board Assembly H300mm×W270mm×D120mm Approx. 5.0 kg
Outside AD board(MT-AD-02-A) H120mm×W110mm×D 24mm Approx. 0.2 kg
dimensions DI/O board(MT-DIOA-01-A) H220mm×W110mm×D 28mm Approx. 0.2 kg
Weight Extension DA board (MT-DA-02-A) H120mm×W110mm×D 24mm Approx. 0.2 kg
Extension DIO4 board (MT-DIO4-01-A) H 70mm×W110mm×D 28mm Approx. 0.2 kg
*1 Please consider the power supply capacity and the factor of safety of the touch panel and peripherals when you
select the DC power supply.

- 151 -
QT1101-13
Installation dimension
* In below figure, "φ6.2" holes of each corner (4 points) are mounting holes for installation on the control board.
110
6-φ4
5 5
5
120
5
(Ext. DA Board is the same size.) (Ext. DIO(2/2) Board is the same size.)

- 152 -
QT1101-13
Touch Panel Specification

Touch panel performance specification
Display device TFT color LCD
Display size 12.1- inch
Number of display dots 800 x 600 dots(SVGA)
Effective display dimension W246.0 x H164.5 [mm]
Effective color, gradation 65,536 colors(No blink) / 16,384 colors(with blinks)
Backlight White LED (light-emmiting diodes)(Send back mathod for the replacement)
Intensity control 16 pahses(adjust by touch panel or software)
More than 50,000 hours

Backlight life (anbient temperature 25 °C, consecutive lighting, the time backlight intensity
reaches 50%)
Japanese : 6,962 charactors(JIS first and second level including 607 non-kanji
charactors)
Display charactor type
ANK : 158 charactors(Downloard supports Korean, taraditional Chinese and
simplified Chinese.)
Display font : 8x8 dots, 8x16 dots, 16x16 dots, 32x32 dots
Display charactor size
Stroke font : 6 to 127 dots, Image font : 8 to 72 dots
*1
Displayed charactor expansion factor Standard font : width(horizontaly) 1 to 8 times, height (vertically)1 to 8 times
Quarer square alphanumeric
100 charactors x 75 lines
charactor(8x8 dots)
Display Half size alphanumeric
charactor 100 charactors x 37lines
charactor(8x16 dots)
number Kanji(16x16 dots) 50charactores x 37 lines
Kanji(32x32 dots) 25 charactors x 18 lines
Application memory FLASH EPROM 32M bytes (including logic program area)
*2
Logic program area FLASH EPROM 132K bytes (equivalent to 15,000 steps)
Font area FLASH EPROM 8MB (Use application memory if it exceeds 8MB.)
Backup memory SRAM 320K bytes (Use replaceable lithium battery for backup memory.)
Variale area SRAM 64K bytes (Use replaceable lithium battery for holding variables.)
*3
Clock precision ±65 seconds per a month (The error at normal temperature, no electricity status)
Touch panel system Analog resistive film method
Touch panel resolving power 1,024 x 1,024
Touch panel life More than 100 milion times
RS-232C, Asynchronous communication method,

Serial (COM1) data length : 7/8 bit, Stop bit : 1/2 bit, Parity : Non/Odd/Even,
Transmisson rate : 2,400bps to 115.2kbps, Connector : D-Sub 9 pin plug
Serial(COM2) RS-422/485, Asynchronous communication method,

(* Occupied by the data length : 8/7 bit, Stop bit : 2/1 bit, Parity : Non/Odd/Even,
communication with CPU Transmisson rate : 2,400bps to 115.2kbps, 187.5kbps(MPI),
board)) Connector : D-Sub 9 pin plug
Interface
IEEE802.3i/IEEE802.3u,10BASE-T/100BASE-TX,
Ethernet(LAN)
Connector : modular jack (RJ-45) x 1
USB2.0 Connector : Type A x 1, Power supply voltage : DC5V±5%,
USB(Type A)
Maximum output current : 500[mA], Maximum communication distance : 5m
USB(Type mini B) USB2.0 Connector : mini B x 1, Maximum communication distance : 5m
SD card SD card slot x 1
*1 character expansion factor can be set not only above way also using software.
*2 Logic program area can be switch up to 60,000 steps using software. However, capacity of application memory (screen
data) decreases 1M bytes.
*3 The error might be -380 to +90 seconds / month depending on temperature difference and using age. Reset accurate
time regularly, when using system needs it.

- 153 -
QT1101-13
Touch panel general specification

Overseas safety standards RoHS command, UL, C-UL, CE,
Rated voltage DC24V
Voltage tolerance range DC19.2 to 28.8V
Allowable momentary stop time 10[msec] or less
Electric consumption 17[W] or less
Inrush current 30[A] or less
Dielectric strength AC1,000[V] 20[mA] for one minute (between live part terminal and Fg terminal)
DC500[V] 10[MΩ] or more
Dielectric resistance
(between live part terminal and Fg terminal)
Ambient operating temperature 0 °C to 55 °C
Preservation ambient temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Ambient operating humidity
10 to 90%RH((no condensation is permitted, wet-bulb humidity is 39°C or less)
Preservation ambient humidity
3
Dust 0.1[mg/m ] or less (no conductive dust is permitted.)
Contamination degree Contamination degree 2
Corrosive gas No corrosive gas is permitted.
Atmospheric pressure resistance
800 to 1,114hPa (2,000[m] height above sea level or less)
(Use altitude)
JIS B 3502, IEC/EN61131-2 compliant 5 to 9Hz,

Vibration resistant Half amplitude : 3.5[mm] 9 to 150Hz, constant acceleration : 9.8m/s2 X,Y,Z
each direction 10 cycles(for about 100 minutes)
Noise pressure : 1,000Vp-p, Pulse width : 1μs, Rise time : 1ns(by Noise
Noise resistant
simulator))
Anti-static electric discharge Contact discharge method : 6kV(IEC/EN61000-4-2 level 3)
Earth Functional ground : D class grounding(common to SG-FG)
*1
Protective construction IP65f NEMA #250 TYPE 4X/13(Front at the time of panel implantation time)
Cooling system Natural cooling
Weight 2.5kg or less (Only main body)
Outside dimension W315 x H241 x D56[mm]
*2
Panel cut dimension W301,5 x H227.5, Panel thickness range : 1.6 to 5[mm]
*1 This protective construction is for the front part when touch panel is attached the panel. The conformity has been checked
under the condition of our test, however it does not mean the conformity in any environment. Especially even regulated oil
in the test, the oil might invade into the touch panel because of peeling sheet of the front parts or for any other reason
when the panel (main body) has been kept under the cloud of spray of the oil or the panel is exposed to extremely
Low-viscosity cutting oil and so on. In that case, another measurement is required for them. Similar oil invasion or plastic
deterioration might be caused by using non-regulated oil. Check your usage environment before operating the panel.
Do not reattached drip-proof packing which you had attached on the panel before , also do not use well –worn drip-proof
packing. They might not be expected full efficiency because they have damages and grime. You are recommended to
change the drip-proof packing regularly for stable protective effect.
*2 All dimension tolerance is +1/-0mm, corner radius is R3 or less.

- 154 -
QT1101-13
7.2 MYPRO TOUCH Replaceable Parts List

Set of products
mAYEKAWA
Name Model
Code No.
MYPRO TOUCH Type-S (AI:16, DI:6, DO:10) MYPRO TOUCH Type-S EAD-07001
MYPRO TOUCH Type-S-DC (AI:16, DI:6, DO:10 for DC) MYPRO TOUCH Type-S-DC EAD-07007
Discrete component parts

mAYEKAWA
Name Model
Code No.
CPU Board rev02 MT-CPU-02-A EAD-07031
AD Board rev02 MT-AD-02-A EAD-07032
DI/O(6/10) Board rev01 MT-DIOA-01-A EAD-07033
DA Board rev02 MT-DA-02-A EAD-07034
DI/O(0/4) Drv Board rev03 REF-MCS200-SO3-A EAD-07048
Ext.DI/O(0/4) Board rev01 MT-DIO4-01-A EAD-07035
DI/O(2/2) Drv Board rev03 REF-MCS200-SC23-A EAD-07049
Ext.DI/O(2/2) Board rev01 MT-DIO2-01-A EAD-07036
DI/O(6/10) Board for DC r01 MT-DIOA-DC01-A EAD-07037
Ext.DI/O(0/4) Board DC r01 MT-DIO4-DC01-A EAD-07038
Ext.DI/O(2/2) Board DC r01 MT-DIO2-DC01-A EAD-07039
CPU-AD Harness MT-HCPAD-0100-U EAD-07041
AD-AD Harness MT-HADAD-0100-U EAD-07042
CPU-DI/O Harness MT-HCDIO-0100-U EAD-07043
CPU-Ext.DA Harness MT-HCPDA-0100-U EAD-07044
CPU-Ext.DI/O Harness MT-HEDIO-0100-U EAD-07045
CPU-Ext.AD Harness MT-HEXAD-0100-U EAD-07046
Type-S Touch Panel (12.1) PFXGP4601TAD EAD-07071
HMI Sheet for Type-S MT-PNL-SHT-S EAD-07074
Plug for DC24V Power PC4/3-ST-7.62 EAD-07051
Plug for Analog Input MSTB2.5/3-ST-5.08 EAD-07052
Plug for Digital Input/Output MSTB2.5/2-ST-5.08 EAD-07053
Plug for Analog Output IC2.5/3-ST-5.08 EAD-07054
CPU Chassis for Type-S,M EAD-07061
Option Parts
mAYEKAWA
Name Model
Code No.
232C-485 Level Converter TCC-80 EAD-07101
RS-232C Straight Cable (3.0m) KR-EC9EN3 EAD-07102
Anybus for Profibus AB7000-C EAD-07103
Anybus for ProfiNET AB7013-C EAD-07104
Anybus for DeviceNET AB7001-C EAD-07105
MT-ABC Cross Cable (3.0m) MT-ABC-C232 EAD-07107
CPU-TP Communication Cable (1.8m) MT-TP-485-A EAD-07108
Maintenance Parts
mAYEKAWA
Name Model
Code No.
Metal Fitting for TP PFXZCBAF1 EAD-07111
TP Gasket(12.1) PFXZCBWG121 EAD-07112
TP DC Power Connector(12.1) PFXZCBCNDC2 EAD-07115
TP Battery PFXZCBBT1 EAD-07116
MYPRO TOUCH Touch Pen CA7-TPPEN/ALL-01 EAD-07117
Other parts are not set as replaceable parts.

- 155 -
QT1101-13
7.3 MYPRO TOUCH Input/Output list

*Function selection on ‘System Configuration (setting)’, ◎: fixed, ○: selectable, -: non-selectable
Analog input
SINGLE COMPOUND
FM160 UD-Vi variable
With high stage capacity control

J-Series
No high stage capacity control

(No Oil Pump) SCV, UD (maximizer)
[ 2016 & HIGHER ]

Economizer (with Sensor)
(with condenser control)

Economizer (no Sensor)
[ 1610 & 1612 ]

(with chiller control)
Variable-Vi
Variable-Vi
400 series
---
---
---
Ch.01 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ SP ] Suction pressure

Ch.02 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ DP ] Discharge pressure
Analog input board (1st board)
Ch.03 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ OP ] Oil supply pressure

◎ ◎ ◎ - - - ○ ○ ○ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ [AFP ] After oil filter pressure
Ch.04
MT-AD-02
Standard
- - - ◎ ◎ ◎ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○ ○ ○ [BFP ] Before oil filter pressure
Ch.05 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ ST ] Suction temperature
Ch.06 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ DT ] Discharge temperature
Ch.07 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ OT ] Oil supply temperature
○ ○ ○ - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [ OS ] Oil separator temperature

Ch.08
○ ○ ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [AFFP] After fine filter pressure
Ch.09 - - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎ ◎ - - ◎ ◎ [ IP ] Intermediate pressure
Ch.10 - - ◎ - - ◎ - - ◎ ◎ - - ◎ ◎ [ IT ] Intermediate temperature
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [SDP ] System discharge pressure

Analog input board (2nd board)
Ch.11
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [LVL ] Chiller (liquid) level
Ch.12 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [ MA ] compressor motor electric current

MT-AD-02
Standard
Ch.13 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EBT ] Entering chiller brine temperature

Ch.14 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [LBT ] leaving chiller brine temperature
Ch.15 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [LSV ] (Low stage) slide valve position
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ [HSV ] High stage slide valve position
- - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ - - - ○ - [SSP ] System suction pressure

Ch.16
- - - - - - - - - ◎ - - - - [SVOP] Slide valve oil supply pressure
◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - ◎ ◎ - - [PORT] Vi slide valve position
Ch.17 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [CGP1] Chiller gas outlet pressure-1

Analog input board (3rd board)
Ch.18 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [CGT1] Chiller gas outlet temperature-1

Ch.19 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [SSP ] system suction pressure
MT-AD-02
Extension
[RLD ] (Low stage) remote capacity control

Ch.20 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
command inputs
Ch.21 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Ch.22 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [SDP ] System discharge pressure-2
Ch.23 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [CGP2] Chiller gas outlet pressure-2
Ch.24 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [CGT2] Chiller gas outlet temperature-2
Ch.25 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Analog input board (4th board)
Ch.26 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Ch.27 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
MT-AD-02
Extension
Ch.28 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Ch.29 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Ch.30 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Ch.31 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---
Ch.32 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---

- 156 -
QT1101-13
* NA : North America, EU : Europe, SA : South America
SINGLE COMPOUND
J-Series FM160 UD-Vi variable
With high stage capacity control

No high stage capacity control
(No Oil Pump) SCV, UD (maximizer)
[ 2016 & HIGHER ]

(with condenser control)

[ 1610 & 1612 ]

Economizer(no Sensor)
(with chiller control)

Variable-Vi
Variable-Vi
400 series
---
---
---
D/O 01 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [COMP] Compressor operating command

○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [OILP] Oil pump operation command
D/O 02
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [O/P2] Oil pump2 operation command
[LOAD] (Low stage) capacity loading
◎ ◎ ◎ - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎
D/O 03 solenoid valve
- - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - [FMLD] FM160 Capacity Control solenoid valve-1
[UNLD] (Low stage) capacity unloading solenoid
◎ ◎ ◎ - - - ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎
D/O 04 valve
- - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - [FMUL] FM160 Capacity Control solenoid valve-2
[INJS] Liquid injection oil supply
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
solenoid valve-1(NA)
○ ○ ○ - - - - - - - - - - - [OILH] Oil heater (SA)
D/O 05
[HILD] High stage loading capacity control
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ○
solenoid valve(except EU)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [FLLD] 100% Output (EU)
[INJY] Liquid injection YOSAKU
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
expansion valve-1 (EU)
D/O 06 [HIUL] High stage capacity unloading
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ○
solenoid valve(except EU)
○ ○ ○ - - - - - - - - - - - [OILR] Oil return solenoid valve (J)

MT-DIOA-01
Standard
- - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [OILH] Oil heater (V,NA)
D/O 07 - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [OILR] Oil return solenoid valve (V)

[I/CS] Liquid supply solenoid valve
- ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - - -
for Eco./Int. (J)
[I/CS] Liquid supply solenoid valve
- - - - ◎ ◎ - ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎
D/O 08 for Eco./Int. (V)
◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - [L->H] Vi slide L->H solenoid valve
- - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [OILF] starting oil feed solenoid valve
- - - ◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - [OILR] Oil return solenoid valve (FM)

D/O 09
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ◎ [OILD] Oil drain solenoid valve(except EU)
◎ ◎ ◎ - - - - - - - - - - - [H->L] Vi slide H->L solenoid valve
D/O 10 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [FAIL] Batch failure

D/I 11 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [EMGC] Emergency stop
D/I 12 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [MSRB] Main starter read back
D/I 13 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [INT1] Interlock-1
◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [INT2] Interlock-2
D/I 14
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [LOCK] 100% LOCK Input (EU)
○ ○ ○ - - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [INT3] Interlock-3
D/I 15
○ ○ ○ ◎ ◎ ◎ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [OLVH] Oil level switch
D/I 16 ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ ◎ [RMST] Remote start input

- 157 -
QT1101-13
SINGLE COMPOUND
FM160 UD-Vi variable
capacity control
capacity control
J-Series SCV, UD
(no Oil Pump) (maximizer)
[ 2016 & HIGHER ]

[ 1610 & 1612 ]
(with chiller
(no Sensor)
control)
(no Sensor)
(with Sensor)
(with Sensor)
(no Sensor)
(with Sensor)
(with condenser
with high stage

400 series
no high stage
control)
Economizer
Economizer
Economizer
Economizer
Economizer
Economizer
Variable-Vi
Variable-Vi
---
---
---
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EVPS] Liquid supply solenoid valve-1
D/O 17
- - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - [MPLD] Vi “load” solenoid valve for port -M
- - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EVPY] YOSAKU exp. Valve-1 for chiller(exclude J)

- - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - [MPUL] Vi “unload” solenoid valve for port -M
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [INJS] Liquid supply SV1 for liq. Inj. (EU)
D/O 18
MT-DIO4-01
○ ○ ○ - - - - - - - - - - - [OILR] Oil return solenoid valve (NA)

Extension
○ ○ ○ - - - - - - - - - - - [OILH] Oil heater (NA)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [AUX ] Auxiliary operating command
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [CHLP] Chiller pump

D/O 19 - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - [SVBP] Bypass solenoid for vi slide valve
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [INJY] YOSAKU exp. valve-1 for liq. Inj. (EU)
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [SBYP] Bypass solenoid for starting
D/O 20
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [HBYP] Bypass solenoid valve for hot gas
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [I/CY] YOSAKU expansion valve for Eco./Int.
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [OILP] Oil pump operation command

D/O 21
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [O/P2] Oil pump 2 operation command
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ [OILD] Oil drain solenoid valve(EU)
D/O 22 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [ALRM] Batch ALARM

MT-DIO4-01
Extension
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ [HILD] High stage capacity loading SV(EU)
D/O 23 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EVS2] Liquid supply solenoid valve-2
- - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - [LHLD] Vi “load” solenoid valve for port –L/H
- - - - - - - - - - - - - ○ [HIUL] High stage capacity unloading SV(EU)

○ ○ ○ - - - - - - - - - - - [EVPY] YOSAKU exp. valve-1 for chiller(J)
D/O 24
- - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EVY2] YOSAKU exp. valve-2 for chiller(except J)
- - - - - - - - - - ○ - - - [LHUL] Vi “unload” solenoid valve for port- L/H
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [CND1] Condenser operating command-1

D/O 25
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [AUX ] Auxiliary operating command

D/O 26
MT-DIO4-01
- - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - [MPLD] Vi “load” solenoid valve for port -M

Extension

D/O 27
- - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - [MPUL] Vi “unload” solenoid valve for Port-M

D/O 28 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [INJ2] YOSAKU exp. valve-2 for liq. Inj.
- - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - [SVBP] Bypass solenoid for vi slide valve
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EVS3] Liquid supply solenoid valve-2
D/O 29
- - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - [LHLD] Vi “load” solenoid valve for port –L/H
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [RDY ] Ready to Start

MT-DIO2-01
Extension
○ ○ ○ - - - - - - - - - - - [EVY2] YOSAKU exp. valve-2 for chiller(J)

D/O 30
- - - ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [EVY3] YOSAKU exp. valve-3 for chiller(except J)
- - - - - - - - - - - ○ - - [LHUL] Vi “unload” solenoid valve for port-L/H
D/I 31 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [RMLD] Remote loading input

D/I 32 ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ [RMUL] Remote unloading input
* The extension digital input/output board is four-piece (one set), the set can be used as single piece. (Uninterrupted
connection is not required.)
- 158 -
QT1101-13
7.4 Input/Output Connecting Diagram
Digital input/output (DI/O)
Vi slide L->H SV
Vi slide H->L SV

- 159 -
QT1101-13
Analog input/output (AI/O)

- 160 -
QT1101-13
Appendix
Appendix1. Introducing of MYPRO TOUCH Support software
We have software for supporting MYPRO TOUCH system.
- “MYPRO TOUCH Data Logger” allows to collect actual data of MYPRO
TOUCH.
- “MYPRO TOUCH Updater” allows to update control program of
MYPRO TOUCH.
Hardware requirements
OS: Versions higher than Windows XP
Appendix1.1 “MYPRO TOUCH Data Logger”

This software allows to take in MYPRO TOUCH operating data
into the PC directly, and save the data.
MYPRO TOUCH cannot save many data at once because
MYPRO TOUCH has limit that 20 stored data is the maximum.
Hence, connect MYPRO TOUCH and PC directly to take in
many data by communication.
Up to 32 analog inputs, 32 digital inputs, 8 internal arithmetic
values, 48 values of each PID controller (process value, set
value, manipulating value) and others, total 128 data can be
collected.
(Analog outputs are not collected because it is same as the
manipulating value of PID controller.)
Appendix1.2 “MYPRO TOUCH Updater”

This software allows to write updated program transmitted from Mayekawa on the
central processing unit board and update control program.
The updated program is put out by Mayekawa at random time when there are
defect reports of existing programs, changes of existing control, additional controls
and others.
As for update method, connect the personal computer and MYPRO TOUCH CPU
board using USB cables and write using “MYPRO TOUCH Updater” from the PC
side.

- 161 -
QT1101-13
Appendix2. MODBUS Protocol

Standard MYPRO TOUCH communication supports MODBUS protocol.
MODBUS protocol is a global standard communication protocol.
RTU mode (BINARY method) and ASCII mode (ASCII method), this 2 modes are available for MODBUS protocol.
Below table shows the difference of the 2 modes.
Item RTU mode ASCII mode

Bit number of data 8 bits (BINARY) 7 bits (ASCII)
Start mark of message text. Not necessary : (3Ah)
End mark of sentence. Not necessary CRLF (0Dh, 0Ah)
*1
Length of message text. N 2N + 1
*2 *3
Time interval of data 24 bits time or less 1 second or less
CRC-16 : LRC :
Error check cord
Cyclic Redundancy Check Longitudinal Redundancy Check
("h" indicates hexadecimal number)
NOTE :
*1 “N” is indicated as length of message text of RTU mode.
*2 If the interval between data, which construct message text, exceeds the ‘Time interval of data”, receiving side
regards it as the transmission has completed halfway and ignores the message text. As a result, communication
error might be detected.
*3 Bit time is the time to send 1-bit data by setting transmission rate.
Many function cords are defined on MODBUS protocol, however MYPRO TOUCH supports the function cords, which shown in
the below table.
Function cord Function Available device number by one communication

01h State reading out of coil 2008
03h Contents reading out of holding register 125
05h Status change of single coil 1
06h Contents change of single holding register 1
08h Loop back test ---
0Fh Status change of multiple coils 64
10h Contents change of multiple coils 123
NOTE : Bit information is regarded as a coil on MYPRO TOUCH.
The specifying of each data on MODBUS protocol,” Number” is specified. ”Number“ has reference number, specifying number
and start number. Now the “Number” will be explained.
The reference number is the number that is used to specify coil or holding register when the data are referred. The data is data
from master device to slave device, which supports MODBUS protocol. 000001 to 009999 are available for specifying coils,
400001 to 409999 are available for holding registers.
Specifying number is the number, which is used to specify data in a command sentence on MODBUS protocol. 0000 to 9998 is
available for coils and holding registers.
Specifying of actual each data is performed by using the specifying number. The specifying number is also called start number
because the specifying number means that, “from which data starts to write/read out”.
The numbers are specified in hexadecimal notation in the command sentences.
Calculation method from reference number to specifying (start) number

(Coil) reference number (000001) - 000001 = Specifying number (0000)
(Holding register) reference number (400001) - 400001 = Specifying number (0000)
As for specifying number and reference number of each device, see attachment “MYPRO TOUCH MODBUS communication
device list”.

- 162 -
QT1101-13
Program Revision Record

Program Version Date Revision
Equivalent to Ver.XXX.005.024 except I/O assignment.

Ver.XXX.101.101 2013/01/07 Logic Ver.tr147c4.
Includes Loader Ver.000.102
new I/O assignment.
Added EtherNet/IP for communication device setting.
Ver.120.101.101 2013/01/10 Revised some display and writing bugs.
Changed password input(LOG ON) screen.
Added displaing current port.
Changed color of character on TOP SCR.
Ver.121.101.101 2013/01/17
Revised display bugs.
Corrected MODBUS communication bugs.
Added saving latched conter to EEPROM once a day.
Ver.121.101.102 2013/01/18
Added HMI battery alarm to Bit0 of register 410000.
Added CPU battery alarm to Bit15, HMI battery alarm to Bit14 of register 403004.
Ver.122.102.102 2013/03/01 Revised equivalent function of HMI Ver.114 for CPIV compatible I/O.
Ver.122.102.105 2013/03/05 Changed A/D conversion from interrupt to task.
Revised clock syncronization between TP and CPU.
Ver.123.102.105 2013/03/06 Corerected display bugs.
Changed G-Script.
Logic Ver.tr147c4c.
2013/03/06
Corrected RTC writing bugs.
Ver.124.102.107 Revised clock syncronization between TP and CPU.
2013/03/06 Added delay timer.
Changed alarm text.(Added some japanese translation.)
Reviced function of force full load by LBT controller MV.

Revised input of START dP & STOP dP of OIL PUMP START.
Ver.124.102.108 2013/03/12 Revised CUT IN/OUT changing via COM2 of CPU.
Revised MANUAL operation of VFD COMPRESSOR controller.
Revised MANUAL operation of HIGH STAGE CAPACITY controller.
Corrected the text “Mpa” to “MPa”.

SV PERCENTAGE in on display if AUTO Vi is active .
Corrected the bug that ECONOMIZER screen doesn’t function without thermal .
Corrected the bug that the screens of ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER SV > LSV&SP and
HSV&IP didn’t change .
Modified the terms of CGP2 and CGT2 for display .
Modified CONDENSER 3STEPS CONTROL .
Modified CONDENSER 6STEPS CONTROL .
Change the adrress of manufacturing-support screen .
Corrected the numbers for move in manufacturing-support screen .
Corrected units in HIGH STAGE CAPACITY CONTROL .
Ver.125.102.108 2013/03/29 Corrected terms of SHH for entries to set a alarm .
Corrected the window of Top scr > CONTROLS > OPERATION .
Added the setting of CT SIZE to SYSTEM DETAILS 3/3 .
Corrected the bug that when the panel becomes reset , Liqud Injection Oil Cooling turns
ISABLE .
Corrected DEAD BAND range of Liquid Injection Oil Cooling Motorized Valve .
Corrected the bug that when you don’t choose Discharge Super Heat Control Taarget ,
Disharge Super Heat is displayed in Liquid Injection Oil Cooling Control .
Add the script to prevent CT from turning 150 when you choose Censor in Additional
Analog Input .
Set Alarm screen not appear on setup to correct the bug that the script doesn’t rotate on
setup becausee Boot screen is cut by turning off and on power of the panel on error .
Logic Ver.tr147c4e.
Revised function of force full load by LBT controller MV.
Ver.125.103.109 20113/04/17 Revised function of Vi port fix for SINGLE J~ compressor.
Revised MANUAL operation of ECONOMIZER INTERCOOLER expantion valve
controller.

- 163 -
QT1101-13
Logic Ver.tr147c4e.
Corrected MVH% setpoint bug.
Ver.126.103.110 2013/05/20
Revised STOP switch function in REMOTE or COMM OPERATION MODE.
Revised MODBUS communication response.
Logic Ver.tr147c4e.
Reviced the condition of initialization for Analog Input Scaling and Analog Input
Ver.126.103.111 2013/05/31 Adustment.
Refer to XXX.103.111_AI_Init20130531.xls document.
Revised CPU general I/O port accessing.
Logic Ver.tr147c4e.
Added function to turn all D/O OFF when exception of CPU occurred.
Ver.126.103.112 2013/06/24 Revised OIL SEAL PROTECTION MODE & CONDENSER CONTROL selection defect.
Revised scaling of communication capacity.(403133 & 400261)
Revised CAPACITY CONTROL TARGET input of AUTO STAGE MASTER.
Amended string tables in the COMMUNICATION display .

Amended the string table OIL RETURN SV .
AUTO STAGE CONTROL 1 means not to put anything into Config in ENABLE .
COMMUNICATION 1 means you can’t change the settings of COMMUNICATION in
RUN .
Ver.127.103.112 2013/06/24 Amended the scaling of SLOW OPEN .
mended the string table VFD(read)→VFD(prior).
Modified the terms of SLAVE for display .
Adding a setting not be changed locations in the AUTO STAGE> CONTROL> ENABLE.
Fixed a bug that display the control target value of actual shifts in the case of psi unit and
AUTO STAGE MASTER .
Logic Ver.tr147c4e.
Ver.127.103.113 2013/07/09
Deleted illegal memory accessing function.
Display change and PV Auto Stage CONTROL TARGET
VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL OPERATION settings may be changed
Ver.128.103.113 2013/07/19 Fixed display of VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL PV value SV value
Display modification of OTHER SETPOINT> Oil heater setting
String table modification
Logic Ver. tr147c4h+2

Deleted current limiter of VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL.
Revised current limiter of CAPACITY CONTROL for VFD COMPRESSOR.
Added MV limit function when OPERATION of CAPACITY CONTROL( or VFD
COMPRESSOR) is REMOTE ANALOG or COMM.
Revised decimal place of revolution by VFD SETUP.
Ver.128.104.114 2013/07/29
Added delay time set point for PUMP OUT CAPACITY.
Added set point of oil pump residual operation time.
Added function to be AUTO of COMPRESSOR CONTROL OPERATION, when USE of
VFD COMPRESSOR is selected.
Added function to change COMM to AUTO of CAPACITY CONTROL, when NOT USE of
VFD COMPRESSOR is selected.
Some modifications to string display

Each PID OPERATION win MANUAL, in the firs log on to the operation possible change
(TOP SCR other than) those operations were not not log on
Add an item to the PUMP OUT> CAPACITY LOCK DELAY
Ver.129.104.114 2013/07/29
Add an item to the PUMP OUT> OIL PUMP RESIDUAL OPERATION
Remove items PUMP OUT> STOP LSV%
Remove HIGH MA LOAD FORBID and VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL> HIGH MA
UNLOAD
BOOT state change behavior modification startup
CSV automatic creation script change.
Ver.130.104.114 2013/07/31
Fixed an issue that did not function properly after the USE the OIL SEAL CONTROL
Modified to give a touch tone
Ver.130.104.115 2013/07/31
Revised OIL P. RESIDUAL OPERATION & INTERVAL TIME set point.
Changed range of PUMP OUT MINIMUM DELAY set point.
Ver.131.104.115 2013/08/05
Changed range of PUMP OUT MAXMUM DELAY set point.

- 164 -
QT1101-13

Ver.131.104.116 2013/08/05 Changed range of PUMP OUT MINIMUM DELAY set point.
Changed range of PUMP OUT MAXIMUM DELAY set point.

Ver.131.104.117 2013/08/13 Revised condition for validity of differential pressure calculation.
Revised MODBUS writing of COM2.
Logic Ver. tr147c4k4

Revised logic of CAPACITY NO DOWN ALARM.
Changed ON condition for ECONOMIZER/INTERCOOLER SV of VFD COMPRESSOR.
Ver.131.105.118 2013/09/13 Chenged HIGH MA LIMITER function of VFD COMPRESSOR.
Assigned MODBUS coil 000900~000902 for signal of compressor start ready.
Assigned MODBUS input register
300892~301012 for response of HMI.
Japanese, Portuguese, Spanish, Each string table modification.

ANALOG INPUT SCALING OFFSET correction
CONTROL TARGET display change
OPT1~4 display change
TOP SCR> Script Changes
CONTROL SUMMARY> Auto Stage display fixed.
Fix the setting of 1: OPTION ANALOG INPUT CH. ANALOG INPUT ADJUSTMENT
Ver.132.105.118 2013/09/13 screen change.
Display device changes TOP SCR> CONTROL SET POINT.
How to change the name of each of AI TOP SCR> MAIN PV.
The change in the FAILURE alarm set position of the LIMIT> RE-START/TIME OUT.
Fixed input to disable the VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL> OUTPUT LIMIT> OPUTPUT.
LIQUID INJECTION CONTROL> MVH% point position correction.
CONDENSOR CONTROL (MULTI)> SET POINT # 2> SLOW OPEN scaling correction.
HMI Ver.132 needs CPU Ver.XXX.105.108 or later.
Logic Ver.tr147c4k4
Ver.132.105.119 2013/09/20
Revised SYSTEM CONFIG>COUNTER input.
Fixed a problem that can not be changed by unit ANALOG INPUT SCALING> OPTION
ANALOG INPUT1 / 4 ~ 4/4.
Ver.133.105.119 2013/09/24
Fixed scaling MASK TIME LOW OS bugs and MENU> ALARM> LIMITS> LOW dP
HMI Ver.133 needs CPU Ver.XXX.105.108 or later.
Logic Ver.tr147c4k4
Ver.133.105.120 2013/09/25
Revised MENU>ALARM>LIMITS>DELAY of LOW dP input.
Logic Ver.tr147c4k4
Ver.133.105.121 2013/09/25
Revised timer function of sequence control
Logic Ver.tr147c4m1
105.→
Changed the start of counting INTERVAL TIME in ANTI CYCLE
from stop of compressor to stop of oil pump.
Added four MODBUS coils(0009000~000903:M323~M326) as signal of “ready to start”.
MODBUS coil 000903 is assigned D0-29.
It is valid when other assignment is invalid.
Added REMOTE CAPACITY CONTROL
Ver.133.106.122 2013/10/25 : REMOTE DIGITAL contol for VFD COMPRESSOR:USE. Is works under the
condition of OPERATION is REMOTE DIGITAL of both CAPACITY CONTROL and VFD
COMPRESSOR CONTROL.
.121→
Added setting of CPU Import/Export function between USB flash memory and CPU.
Revised process of MODBUS coil
000519~000575 write through COM2 to avoid turnig [START],[STOP] and[CLEAR
ALARM] switches.
Revised defect of MVL% and MVH% in RAMP CONTROL write through COM2.

- 165 -
QT1101-13
- And LIMIT> LOW dP MASK TIME, LOW OS MASK TIME scaling correction
The error : 0 to 54 (30) SEC X 600 → Positive : 1 to 600 (600) SEC X 10
- CONTROL> OIL.P MANUAL added
Add to item OPERATION MODE.
As the display conditions, DI / O TEST OPERATION display when the YES.
In MANUAL, "00521 Read / Write X0148h DO TEST OPERATION DO02 ON / OFF
Input" ON continue.
- Fixed scaling of SLOW OPEN
EXP_CONTROL, ECONOMIZER CONTROL, CHILLER LBT CONTROL, CONDENSER
CONTROL,
To change the scaling of the SLOW OPEN LEVEL CONTROL
The -600 to 600 (60) sec:: Positive -600 to 600 →: -2400 to 2400: error -600 to 600
- when you have entered the October-December in the SET TIME> MONTH,
Fixed a bug that value is changed only touch panel side, the value of the CPU side does
not change.
- Unit display fixes CONTROL> SET POINTS> PUMP OUT PRESS
Ver.134.106.122 2013/10/25
- CONTROL> ECONOMIZER / INTERCOOLER CONTROL> SV ON SP, the unit display
modification of SV OFF SP
- IMPORT / EXPORT screen, and the device, script additional changes.
( And error display, clear error added)
- The specification changes, and CAPACITY CONTROL,
Display conditions change of VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL> OPERATION REMOTE
DIGITAL
Added display of the REMOTE DIGITAL VFD COMPRESSOR CONTROL>
OPERATION
- The change to the 4 → 5 LIMITS> display input device number of digits.
Display Up to 6 digits including the (decimal) code
- Add the MODBUS TCP on the touch panel connected device set at the request of and
want to add
- Add (DO29 RDY) Ready To Run
- Revised Name "OIL.P RESIDUAL OPERATION" -> "RESIDUAL OPERATION"
- Revised Name "PUMP OUT > LSV%" -> "PUMP OUT > PERCENTAGE"

- 166 -
QT1101-13
Instruction Manual Revision Record

Instruction Manual
Date Revision
version
1st edition, 1st printing 2012.06.01 First edition (for Ver.100.100.100)
1st edition, 2nd printing 2012.06.06 Correction of errors
Changing I/O configuration and range for MYPRO TOUCH specification.
1st edition, 3rd printing 2012.06.22
(previous one is for CPⅣ standard)
1st edition, 4th printing 2012.09.14 (Checking )Correction of errors and orthographic variation
1st edition, 5th printing 2012.10.01 for Ver.108.003.015
for Ver.108.003.017
1st edition, 6th printing 2012.11.01 Addition of Set value explanation of AUTO STAGE, Warning condition of
interlock, Condition of Auto Vi SLIDE ALARM, Option part list
for Ver.112.004.020
1st edition, 7th printing 2012.12.26 Communication terminal block name error correction.
It is possible to input it up to the password eight characters.
(Checking )Correction of errors

1st edition, 8th printing 2013. 04.01
for Ver.125.102.108
for Ver.127.103.112
1st edition, 10th printing 2013. 07.16 (Checking )Correction of errors
for Ver.129.104.114
for Ver.131.104.116
1st edition, 12th printing 2013. 08.05 Addition of Dimension of ext. AD and the DI/O board
Addition of explanation TP protection film
for Ver.134.106.122
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR
SCREW COMPRESSOR UNIT CONTROLLER
MYPRO TOUCH Type-S
st
June 1 2012 1st edition 1st printing
th
November 6 2013 1st edition 13th printing
Corporate office : 3-14-15, Botan, Koto-ku, Tokyo 135-8482, Japan Tel : +81-3-3642-8181 Fax : +81-3-3643-7094
Moriya Plant : 2000, Tatsuzawa, Moriya-shi, Ibaraki-ken 302-0118, Japan Tel : +81-297-48-1593 Fax : +81-297-45-2781
URL: http://www.mayekawa.com
Mayekawa Mfg. Co., Ltd. Reserves the right to change design and specifications.

Instruction Manual For Screw Compressor Unit Controller Mypro Touch Type-S

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Instruction Manual For Screw Compressor Unit Controller Mypro Touch Type-S

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

INSTRUCTION MANUAL

FOR SCREW COMPRESSOR UNIT CONTROLLER

There are a factory set goods enumerated as follows in MYPRO TOUCH.

Additionally, there is an option for enhancing.

b. Are all necessary items supplied?

c. Are the settings in the following screen correct?

Mayekawa Mfg. Co., Ltd.

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

Chapter 0 : Information on This Manual

0.1 This Manual and Other Related Manuals

- SCREW COMPRESSOR UNIT CONTROLLER (Model MYPRO TOUCH Type-S) MANUAL

0.2 Organization of This Manual

Chapters 1 to 3: Setting of MYPRO TOUCH

Chapters 4 to 5: Control of MYPRO TOUCH

Chapters 6 to 7: Maintenance of MYPRO TOUCH

0.3 Glossary of Special Terms

AUTO STAGE Control

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

(ALARM) Mask time

0.5 Words Displayed on Screen

0.6 Acronyms and Abbreviations

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

Chapter 1 : General Description

1.1 Functions and Features

Sequence control and process control inputs/outputs

This user-friendly interface allows intuitive operation by adopting touch panel.

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

1.2 System Organization of MYPRO TOUCH

[MYPRO Ethernet/IP ・DeviceNet (Modbus Unit)

[MYPRO TOUCH] Control Panel

DI/O(10/6) Board Ext.DI/O

Name Q.ty Note

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

1.3 Usable Control Functions

J-Series - SINGLE without Economizer

Compressor capacity control by Discharge/Suction pressure (PID 01/16)

Liquid injection expansion valve control

Compound two-stage Compressor

Compressor VFD control by suction pressure (PID 11/16)

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

Chapter 2 Components and Their Functions

2.1 Touch Panel

Front View Back View

Components of Touch Plane

It shows status of Touch Panel.

This LED is lighting, when SD card is insert.

USB(mini-B) One supporting USB 2.0(mini-B) Communication distance: 5 meters or less

RS-232C serial interface

Support USB 2.0(Type A)×1

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

Power Supply Connection

Short circuit, fire, unplanned device operation

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

Replacement Primary battery

2. Touch the housing or grand connection (not the power

The risk of explosion, fire or chemical

Primary battery cannot be recharged and are used

MYPRO TOUCH Type-S Manual Rel.1.13

Brightness adjustment of Touch Panel

In the touch panel of MYPRO TOUCH, Brightness can be adjusted by 16 stages.